SPECIFICATIONS
PROJECT NO: 24-4704-18083
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County 13301 GATEWAY WEST EL PASO, TX 79928-5410
ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION DESIGN SUBMITTAL 16 OCTOBER 2018 This page was intentionally left blank. RENOVATION of the WAREHOUSE EL PASO DISTRICT HEADQUARTERS EL PASO DISTRICT – 24, EL PASO COUNTY PROJECT NO. 24-4704-18083
SPECIFICATIONS INDEX
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
00 00 02 Index of Drawings 00 00 10 Specifications Index
BALANCE OF DIVISION 00 BY TxDOT
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 10 00 Summary of Work 01 20 00 Price and Payment Procedures 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 40 10 Testing Laboratory Services 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 63 00 Substitutions and Product Options 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 73 10 Cutting and Patching
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 19 Selective Demolition 02 82 00 Asbestos Abatement Texas Department of Transportation Asbestos Survey Report El Paso DHQ Warehouse Remodel Building 248015, dated August 8, 2018
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE
03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete
Specifications Index Page 1
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 04 20 00 Unit Masonry
DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 21 30 Sprayed Foam Insulation – Closed Cell 07 54 23 Thermoplastic-Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim 07 84 00 Firestopping 07 92 00 Joint Sealants
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors And Frames 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts 08 62 23 Tubular Skylights 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 29 00 Gypsum Board 09 51 23 Acoustical Ceilings 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring and Accessories 09 90 00 Painting
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
None In This Project
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 21 13 Horizontal Louver Blinds
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
None In This Project
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
None In This Project
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION None In This Project
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
None In This Project
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For HVAC 23 07 13 Duct Insulation 23 11 23 Facility Natural-Gas Piping 23 31 13 Metal Ducts 23 74 16.11 Packaged, Small-Capacity, Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units 23 81 29 Ductless Mini-Split Systems
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables 26 05 23 Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 29 Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 44 Sleeves And Sleeve Seals For Electrical Raceways And Cabling 26 05 53 Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 73.19 Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis 26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices 26 09 43 Network Lighting Controls 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers 26 51 19 LED Interior Lighting 26 52 13 Emergency And Exit Lighting
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 28 Pathways For Communications Systems 27 05 29 Hangers And Supports For Communications Systems 27 05 44 Sleeves And Sleeve Seals For Communications Pathways And Cabling 27 05 53 Identification For Communications Systems 27 11 16 Communications Racks, Frames, And Enclosures 27 15 13 Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 13 00 Security System 28 46 21 Fire-Alarm Systems
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
None In This Project
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS None In This Project
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
None In This Project
END OF DOCUMENT This page was intentionally left blank. RENOVATION of the WAREHOUSE EL PASO DISTRICT HEADQUARTERS EL PASO DISTRICT – 24, EL PASO COUNTY PROJECT NO. 24-4704-18083
INDEX OF DRAWINGS
GENERAL SHEETS:
G1.1 COVER SHEET G1.2 PROJECT SYMBOLOGY G1.3 ABBREVIATIONS G1.4 ABBREVIATIONS G1.5 ABBREVIATIONS
CIVIL:
NONE IN THIS PROJECT
DEMOLITION:
DA2.1 ARCHITECTURAL DEMOLITION PLAN – AREA K DF2.1 FIRE ALARM DEMOLITION PLAN – AREA K DM2.1 HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN – AREA K DE2.1 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN – AREA K
ARCHITECTURAL:
A2.1 FLOOR PLAN – AREA K A3.1 ROOF PLAN – AREA K A3.2 ROOF DETAILS – AREA K A4.1 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN – AREA K A4.2 REFLECTED CEILING DETAILS – AREA K A5.1 PARTIAL EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS – AREA K A8.1 WALL SECTIONS – AREA K A8.2 WALL SECTIONS – AREA K A9.1 FINISH SCHEDULE – AREA K A9.2 DOOR AND WINDOW SCHEDULES – AREA K A9.3 DOOR AND WINDOW DETAILS – AREA K A9.4 WINDOW DETAILS – AREA K A10.1 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS FS1.1 LIFE SAFETY PLAN – AREA K FS1.2 BUILDING CODE ANALYSIS – AREA K F2.1 FIRE ALARM INSTALLATION PLAN – AREA K
STRUCTURAL:
NONE IN THIS PROJECT
Index of Drawings Page 1
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
MECHANICAL:
M1.1 HVAC LEGEND AND NOTES M2.1 HVAC INSTALLATION PLAN – AREA K M2.2 GAS AND CONDENSATE PIPING – AREA K M4.1 HVAC DETAILS I M4.2 HVAC DETAILS II M4.3 HVAC DETAILS III M5.1 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES M5.2 HVAC CONTROLS AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
PLUMBING:
NONE IN THIS PROJECT
ELECTRICAL:
E1.1 ELECTRICAL LEGENDS AND NOTES E2.1 ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLAN – AREA K E2.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION PLAN – AREA K E2.3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PLAN – AREA K E4.1 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E5.1 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES
END OF LIST OF DRAWINGS
Index of Drawings Page 2
This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Project Identification
B. Contract description
C. Work by the Texas Department of Transportation (Owner)
D. Work by Others
E. Owner supplied products
F. Contractor's use of site and premises
G. Owner occupancy
H. Specification Conventions
I. Contractor
1.2 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION EL PASO DISTRICT 24, EL PASO COUNTY Warehouse – 248015 El Paso District Headquarters 13301 Gateway Blvd. West, El Paso, TX 79928-5410
1.3 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION
A. Work of the Project includes construction of new office space. 1. Demolition: Interior wall, doors, window, roof top units. 2. Construction: New work area, new HVAC, new electrical, data and security, new walls, new doors, new finishes, etc. 3. Refer to drawings for locations.
B. Perform Work of Contract under Lump Sum Total cost contract with Owner in accordance with Conditions of Contract.
Summary of Work 01 10 00 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.4 WORK BY OWNER
A. Owner reserves the right to conduct minor work with its forces or separate contractors during the execution of Work of this Contract.
1.5 WORKS BY OTHERS
A. Owner reserves the right to award contracts in connection with other portions of the Project under these or similar contract conditions. The Contractor shall cooperate with TxDOT, other contractors, utility providers, governmental/regulatory agency representatives, etc. whose work operations are directly or indirectly impacted by the execution of the Work.
B. Owner furnished and Owner Installed furniture. Contractor to make final Electrical/Data connections
1.6 OWNER SUPPLIED PRODUCTS
A. Furniture.
1.7 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A. Access to Site: Contractor will have unrestricted access to site during hours of operation- 7:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m., unless other arrangements are made with Owner.
B. The trash dumpster may be placed as directed by TxDOT.
C. Contractors’ employees may park personal and company vehicles on site as directed by TxDOT.
D. Construction Limit: Limited to area as noted on the drawings.
1.8 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. The Owner will occupy the premises, outside the construction limits, during the entire period of contract work.
B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner's operations.
1.9 SPECIFICATION CONVENTIONS
A. These specifications are written in imperative mood and streamlined form. This imperative language is directed to the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise. The words “shall be” are included by inference where a colon (:) is used within sentences or phrases. Except where specifically intended otherwise, the subject of all imperative statements is the Contractor. For example, 'Provide tile' means 'Contractor shall provide tile.'
Summary of Work 01 10 00 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.0 CONTRACTOR
A. Permits and Fees: No City permits will be required as the work of this contract is on State property. All inspections at site will be conducted by TxDOT staff.
B. Codes: Comply with applicable codes and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Primary code is the International Building Code, latest version. Refer to drawings for a list of applicable codes.
C. Dimensions: Verify dimensions with field measurements before fabrication or ordering of materials. Inform the Architect/Engineer of any dimensional discrepancies, prior to fabrication or ordering material.
D. Existing Conditions: Notify Owner of existing conditions differing from those indicated on the drawings. Do not remove or alter structural components without prior written approval of the Architect.
E. Coordination: Coordinate the work of all trades.
F. Installation Requirements, General: 1. Inspect substrates and report unsatisfactory conditions in writing. 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3. Take field measurements prior to fabrication where practical. 4. Install materials in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions. 5. Install materials in proper relation with adjacent construction and with proper appearance. 6. Restore units damaged during installation. Replace units which cannot be restored at no additional expense to the Owner. 7. Refer to additional installation requirements and tolerances specified under individual specification sections.
G. Definitions: 1. Provide: Furnish and install, complete with all necessary accessories, ready for intended use. Pay for all related costs. 2. Reviewed: Review of items submitted. Not a limitation or release for compliance with the Contract Documents or regulatory requirements.
H. Intent: Drawings, and Specifications are intended to provide the basis for proper completion of the work suitable for the intended use. Anything not expressly set forth, but which is reasonable implied or necessary for proper performance of the project shall be included.
I. The Contractor shall provide a continuous on-site work force during regular work hours each consecutive workday to ensure a minimum amount of time to complete this contract. The contractor shall make every effort to cause the least possible interference to the building occupants. All work personnel shall be thoroughly experienced in the particular class and trade of work for which they are employed.
Summary of Work 01 10 00 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
J. Cleaning: The Contractor shall clean the work area of trash at the end of each day. The Contractor must recycle as much waste as possible with a goal of 80% construction waste recycled, diverting materials from landfills.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
Summary of Work 01 10 00 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083 SECTION 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Schedule of values.
B. Applications for payment.
C. Change procedures.
D. Defect assessment.
1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Submit printed schedule on Owner provided form or electronic media.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets b. Submittals Schedule c. Contractor's Construction Schedule 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect in duplicate no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
C. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. Identify separately site mobilization, bonds and insurance, and a breakdown of the General Contractors general conditions. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location b. Name of Architect c. TxDOT project number d. Contractor's name and address e. Date of submittal 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division b. Description of the Work c. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value d. Dollar value 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent
Price and Payment Procedures 01 20 00 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum (labor & materials) in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing. 6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work- in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 9. Provide any additional information as set forth in the UGC.
1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Submit a copy of each application to Architect for review, 7 days prior to Payment Application Time.
B. Each monthly Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect, TxDOT Project Manager, TxDOT District Representative and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment require additional documentation.
C. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
D. Payment Application Forms: Use forms provided by TxDOT for Applications for Payment.
E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Architect and TxDOT Project Manager will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values. Use updated schedule if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders approved before last day of construction period covered by application. 3. Submit Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims – Monthly Progress Payment 4. Submit HUB Subcontracting Plan (HSP) Prime Contractor Progress Assessment Report. 5. Submit updated construction schedule with each Application for Payment.
Price and Payment Procedures 01 20 00 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083 F. Transmittal: Submit signed copy (electronic signature is acceptable) of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.
G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors 2. Schedule of Values 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule 4. Products list 5. Schedule of unit prices 6. Submittals Schedule 7. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work
H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum 2. Owner provided document , "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims –Final Payment" 3. Owner provided document, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment" 4. Evidence that claims have been settled 5. Final liquidated damages settlement statement if applicable. 6. HUB Subcontracting Plan (HSP) Prime Contractor Progress Assessment Report. 7. Buy America form D-9-USA 1 or it equivalent. 8. If required, a close-out Change Order. 9. Provide any additional information as set forth in UGC.
J. Substantiating Data: When Architect/Engineer requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Include the following with Application for Payment:
1. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products. 2. Construction progress schedules, revised and current.
1.4 CHANGE PROCEDURES
A. Submittals: Submit name of individual authorized to receive change documents, and be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or Subcontractors of changes to the Work.
Price and Payment Procedures 01 20 00 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083 B. The Architect/Engineer will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment to Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time by issuing supplemental instructions.
C. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 10 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
D. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Use TxDOT approved Proposal Requests. a. Document each quotation for change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of quotation.
1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On approval of a Proposal Request, Owner will issue a Change Order for signatures of Contractor and Architect on Owner’s appropriate form. 1. Execution of Change Orders: Owner will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in Conditions of the Contract.
B. Correlation Of Contractor Submittals: 1. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as separate line item and adjust Contract Sum/Price.
Price and Payment Procedures 01 20 00 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083 2. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect change in Contract Time, revise sub-schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. 3. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents.
1.6 DEFECT ASSESSMENT
A. Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements.
B. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Architect/Engineer and/or Owner will direct appropriate remedy or adjust payment.
C. The defective Work may remain, but unit sum/price will be adjusted to new sum/price at discretion of Architect/Engineer and/or Owner.
D. Defective Work will be partially repaired to instructions of Architect/Engineer and/or Owner and unit sum/price will be adjusted to new sum/price at discretion of Architect/Engineer and /or Owner.
E. Individual specification sections may modify these options or may identify specific formula or percentage sum/price reduction.
F. Authority of Architect/Engineer and/or Owner to assess defects and identify payment adjustments, is final.
G. Non-Payment For Rejected Products: Payment will not be made for rejected products for any of the following: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable. 2. Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement. 3. Products not completely unloaded from transporting vehicle. 4. Products placed beyond lines and levels of required Work. 5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work. 6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected products.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used
END OF SECTION
Price and Payment Procedures 01 20 00 - 5 This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Coordination and project conditions
B. Construction Layout
C. Preconstruction meeting
D. Monthly Progress meetings
E. Pre-installation meetings
F. Coordination meetings
1.3 COORDINATION AND PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of various sections of Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later.
B. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Provide project superintendent and other supervisory personnel required for proper performance of the work. 2. Submit list of subcontractors names, phone numbers and trade work. 3. Participate in a pre-construction meeting at a time and place determined by the Owner for the purpose of identifying responsibilities of the Owner’s and Architect’s personnel and explanation of administrative procedures. 4. Schedule and conduct monthly meetings, distribute meeting Minutes. 5. Schedule and conduct other meetings as necessary, distribute meeting Minutes. 6. Owner to schedule and conduct other meetings as necessary, the Owner will distribute meeting Minutes. 7. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 8. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 9. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 10. Preparation of the Submittal Review Schedule.
Administrative Requirements 01 30 00 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
11. Delivery and processing of submittals. 12. Progress meetings. 13. Pre-installation conferences. 14. Project closeout activities. 15. Startup and adjustment of systems. 16. Project closeout activities. 17. Submit bar chart progress schedule, updated monthly. 18. Prepare submittal schedule coordinated with progress schedule. 19. Submit schedule of values, divided so as to facilitate payments to subcontractors, on forms acceptable to the Owner. Schedule, when approved, will be used as the basis for the Contractor’s Application for payment. 20. Submit schedule of required tests. 21. Perform all field engineering, layout, and surveying required for layout of project. 22. Submit and post a list of emergency telephone numbers and addresses for individuals to be contacted in case of emergency. 23. Record drawings and specifications to be maintained and annotated by contractor as work progresses to record actual construction, and be turned over to the Architect at substantial completion. See Section 01 70 00 for detailed requirements. 24. Submit payment request procedures. 25. Perform quality control during installation. 26. Clean and protect the work.
C. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
D. Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, operating equipment.
E. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical Work indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of Work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy.
G. After Owner occupies the premises any access to complete remaining Work or correct defective Work must be coordinated with the Owner's representative in order to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.
1.4 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Provide field engineering services if required to achieve level, plumb, and square conditions in new work. Establish elevations, lines, and levels, utilizing recognized engineering survey practices.
Administrative Requirements 01 30 00 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. The Owner’s Representative will schedule a pre-construction conference and organizational meeting at the Project Site or other convenient location after execution of the Agreement and prior to commencement of construction activities. The Owner’s Representative will conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
B. Attendees shall include: The Owner, Architect/Engineer and their consultants, the Contractor and its superintendent, major subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers and other concerned parties shall each be represented at the conference by persons familiar with and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
C. The Agenda shall: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress including such topics as: 1. Tentative construction schedule 2. Critical Work sequencing 3. Designation of responsible personnel 4. List of Subcontractors, trade work, names and phone numbers 5. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders 6. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment 7. Distribution of Contract Documents 8. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 9. Preparation of record documents 10. Use of the premises 11. Office, Work and storage areas 12. Equipment deliveries and priorities 13. Safety procedures 14. First Aid 15. Security 16. Housekeeping 17. Working hours
D. The Owner’s Representative will record Minutes and distribute copies within five days after meeting to participants, with copies to contractor and those affected by decisions made. 1. General Contractor will distribute Minutes to others.
1.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum bi-weekly intervals. 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with Architect and TxDOT Inspector. 2. Prepare Contractor’s Application for Payment (CAP) on TxDOT form. Architect shall provide forms required for payment submittal.
B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings.
Administrative Requirements 01 30 00 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, Architect/Engineer, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.
D. Agenda: 1. Review of Minutes of previous meetings 2. Review of Work progress 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions 4. Identification of problems impeding planned progress 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules 7. Maintenance of progress schedule 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period 10. Coordination of projected progress 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination 13. Other business relating to Work
E. Record Minutes and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants, with copies to Architect/Engineer, Owner, and those affected by decisions made.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. When required in individual specification sections, convene pre-installation meetings at Project site prior to commencing work of specific section.
B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, Work of specific section.
C. Notify Architect/Engineer and Owner 14 days in advance of meeting date.
D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. a. Contract documents b. Options c. Related Change Orders d. Purchases e. Deliveries f. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Quality Control Samples g. Possible Conflicts h. Compatibility Problems i. Time Schedules j. Weather Limitations k. Manufacturer's Recommendations l. Compatibility of Materials m. Acceptability of Substrates n. Temporary Facilities o. Space and Access Limitations
Administrative Requirements 01 30 00 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
p. Governing Regulations q. Safety r. Inspection and Testing Requirements s. Recording Requirements t. Protection
E. Record Minutes and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants, with copies to Architect/Engineer, Owner, and those affected by decisions made. 1. Do not proceed if the meeting cannot be successfully concluded. 2. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work and reconvene the meeting at the earliest feasible date.
1.8 COORDINATION MEETINGS
A. Conduct project coordination meetings at regularly scheduled times convenient for all parties involved. Project Coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as regular progress meetings and specific pre-installation conferences.
B. Request representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in coordination or planning for the construction activities involved.
C. Record meeting decisions or action and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by those decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
Administrative Requirements 01 30 00 - 5 This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Submittal procedures
B. Construction progress schedules
C. Proposed products list
D. Subcontractor List
E. Product data
F. Shop drawings
G. Samples
H. Design data
I. Test reports
J. Certificates
K. Manufacturer's instructions
L. Manufacturer's field reports
M. Project Warranty And Maintenance Manual
1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals once approved by TxDOT.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 1
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 21 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. 5. Schedule submissions at least 30 days before reviewed submittals will be needed, in accordance with the above review times noted above (the above allows for one resubmittal review and distribution) and approved submittal schedule.
D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. 1. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of Work of Contract Documents. 2. Contractor’s responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved by Architect’s review of submittals. 3. Contractor’s responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Architect’s review of submittals, unless Architect gives written acceptance of specific deviations. 4. Notify Architect, in writing at time of submission, of deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents.
E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name b. Date c. Name and address of Architect d. Name and address of Contractor e. Name and address of Subcontractor f. Name and address of Supplier g. Name of Manufacturer h. Submittal number i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section
Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 2
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate l. Other necessary identification
F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.
G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. 1. Transmittal Form: Use form acceptable to the Owner and Architect. Provide locations on form for the following information: a. Project name b. Date c. Destination (To) d. Source (from) e. Names of Subcontractor, Manufacturer, and Supplier f. Category and type of submittal g. Submittal purpose and description h. Specification Section number and title i. Drawing number and detail references j. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively k. Submittal and transmittal distribution record l. Remarks m. Signature of Transmitter
2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related submittal.
H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. When revised for resubmission, identify changes made since previous submission. 2. Mark revised submittals with original number and sequential alphabetic suffix. Note date and content of previous submittal. 3. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.
I. Allow space on submittals for Contractor and Architect/Engineer review stamps.
J. Resubmit submittals until they are marked ‘REVIEWED’.
K. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to Manufacturers, Subcontractors, Suppliers, Fabricators, Installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 3
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report inability to comply with requirements.
L. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating ‘REVIEWED’. 1. Begin no work which requires submittals until return of submittals with Architect’s stamp and initials or signature indicating review.
1.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
A. Submit preliminary outline Schedules within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement for coordination with Owner's requirements. After review, submit detailed schedules within 7 days modified to accommodate revisions recommended by Architect/Engineer and Owner.
B. Update schedules with each monthly Application for Payment.
C. Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to Project site file, Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other concerned parties.
D. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections indicated in schedules.
E. Submit computer generated horizontal bar chart or other approved form with separate line for each section of Work, identifying first work day of each week.
F. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Indicate early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration.
G. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission.
H. Submit separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples, including Owner furnished products and products identified under Allowances, and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect/Engineer. Indicate decision dates for selection of finishes.
I. Revisions To Schedules: 1. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion date of each activity. 2. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and other identifiable changes. 3. Prepare narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on Schedule. Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect including effect of changes on schedules of separate Contractors.
Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 4
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.4 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST
A. Within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement, submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of Manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.
B. For products specified only by reference standards, give Manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards.
1.5 SUBCONTRACTOR LIST
A. Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity perform subcontract or supplying products 2. Number and title of related Specification Sections(s) cover by Subcontractor 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract
B. Submit three copies of Subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. 1. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.
1.6 PRODUCT DATA
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Submit to Architect/Engineer for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
C. Submit three Contractor copies, plus two copies Architect/Engineer will retain.
D. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement Manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project.
E. Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.
F. Distribute copies after review.
1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Prior to submitting shop drawings, Contractor shall furnish Architect with complete Shop Drawing Submittal Log. No Submittals will be reviewed until a complete Submittal Log has been submitted to Architect.
Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 5
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1. Contractor shall submit all required shop drawings and product data to the Architect with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as to cause no delay in the work. 2. Prepare and submit, with construction schedule, a separate schedule listing dates for submission and lead dates for reviewed shop drawings, product data and samples for each item. 3. No extension of time shall be allowed because of failure to properly coordinate and sequence submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit to Architect/Engineer for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale, only where work varies from original design and installation. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions b. Identification of products c. Fabrication and installation drawings d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams e. Shopwork manufacturing instructions f. Templates and patterns g. Schedules h. Design calculations i. Compliance with specified standards j. Notation of coordination requirements k. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement l. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated m. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 22 by 24 inches.
3. Number of Copies: Submit electronic submittal, unless copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals, then submit 5 hard copies. Architect will retain three copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing.
D. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.
E. All work must ultimately comply with the contract documents unless Architect/Engineer gives specific written acceptance of specific deviations.
F. Distribute copies after review.
Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 6
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.8 SAMPLES
A. Samples: Submit to Architect/Engineer for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
B. Samples For Initial Selection as Specified in Product Sections: 1. Submit to Architect/Engineer for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. 2. Submit samples of finishes from full range of Manufacturers' standard colors, textures, and patterns for Architect/Engineer selection.
C. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of Products, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.
D. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information.
E. Submit number of samples specified in individual specification sections; Architect/Engineer will retain two samples. 1. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample. 2. Retain one sample on construction site for field comparison as needed.
F. Samples will not be used for testing purposes unless specifically stated in specification section.
G. Distribute samples after review.
1.9 DESIGN DATA
A. Submit for Architect/Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner.
B. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
1.10 TEST REPORTS
A. Submit for Architect/Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner.
B. Submit test reports for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
1.11 CERTIFICATES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by Manufacturer, installation/application Subcontractor, or Contractor to Architect/Engineer, in quantities specified for Product Data.
B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 7
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect/Engineer.
1.12 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to Architect/Engineer for delivery to Owner in quantities specified for Product Data.
B. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.
1.13 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD REPORTS
A. Submit reports for Architect/Engineer's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner.
B. Submit report within 10 days of observation to Architect/Engineer for information.
C. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
1.14 PROJECT WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL:
A. Prior to final payment, the Contractor shall furnish two complete sets, in tabbed standard size ring binders, of equipment data, maintenance information, operations instructions, and warranties for equipment and systems provided under this contract as well as .pdf format. See Section 01 70 00 for detailed requirements.
B. Provide warranties as specified. Warranties shall not limit length of time for remedy of damages Owner may have by legal statute. Contractor, Supplier, or Installer responsible for performance of warranty shall sign warranties, will need in.pdf format also.
C. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to TxDOT, in hard copy and .pdf format.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of
Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 8
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
PART 4 - ARCHITECT'S ACTION
4.1 General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.
A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken.
B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
C. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.
D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.
END OF SECTION
Submittal Procedures 01 33 00 - 9
This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Quality control and control of installation.
B. Tolerances.
C. References.
D. Labeling.
E. Mock-up requirements.
F. Testing and inspection services.
G. Manufacturers' field services.
H. Examination.
I. Preparation.
1.2 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence and secure Manufacturers certification as certified installer, when applicable.
C. When manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
D. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
E. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.
Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
F. Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. The Contractor shall comply with applicable local, state, and federal codes and regulations. 1. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 2. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 3. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 4. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or products that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. 5. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 6. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 7. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. 8. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of Manufacturer who is trained and approved by Manufacturer to inspect installation of Manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
G. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by manufacturer.
H. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement.
I. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site
Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
J. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
1.3 TOLERANCES
A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.
B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. When manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.
B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date for receiving bids, except where specific date is established by code.
C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.
D. When specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
E. Neither contractual relationships, duties, nor responsibilities of parties in Contract nor those of Architect/Engineer shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in reference documents.
1.5 LABELING
A. Attach label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction for products, assemblies, and systems required to be labeled by applicable code.
B. Label Information: Include manufacturer's or fabricator's identification, approved agency identification, and the following information, as applicable, on each label. 1. Model number. 2. Serial number. 3. Performance characteristics.
Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.6 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
A. Refer to Specifications Section 01 40 10 – Testing Laboratory Services.
B. Employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency or laboratory acceptable to Owner to perform specified testing. 1. Prior to start of Work, submit testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time specialist and responsible officer. 2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by Materials Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of deficiencies reported by inspection.
C. The independent firm will perform tests, inspections and other services specified in individual specification sections and as required by Architect/Engineer and / or Owner. 1. Laboratory: Authorized to operate at Project location. 2. Laboratory Staff: Maintain full time registered Engineer on staff to review services. 3. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants.
D. Testing, inspections and source quality control may occur on or off project site. Perform off-site testing as required by Architect/Engineer or Owner.
E. The work will be observed by the Architect/Engineer (Owner's Representative) or the Owners field observer and performed to his satisfaction in accordance with the Contract Plans and Specifications. The Owner's representative and Architect/Engineer will decide all questions which may arise as to the quality of acceptability of materials furnished and work performed; the manner of performance and rate of progress of the work; the interpretations of the contract plans and specifications; and the acceptable fulfillment of the contract on the part of the Contractor. The Owner's decisions will be final, and he will have executive authority to enforce and make effective such decisions and orders if the contractor fails to carry out the work promptly.
F. Reports will be submitted by independent firm to Architect/Engineer, TxDOT Project Manager (2 copies) and Contractor, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents.
G. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested. 1. Notify Architect/Engineer and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's use.
H. Testing and employment of testing agency or laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
I. Re-testing or re-inspection required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by same independent firm on instructions by Architect/Engineer. Payment for re-
Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
testing or re-inspection will be charged to Contractor by deducting testing charges from Contract Sum/Price.
J. Agency Responsibilities: 1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect/Engineer and Contractor in performance of services. 3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Promptly notify Architect/Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non- conformance of Work or products. 6. Perform additional tests required by Architect/Engineer. 7. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings.
K. Agency Reports: After each test, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect/Engineer and to Contractor. When requested by Architect/Engineer, provide interpretation of test results.
L. Limits On Testing Authority: 1. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency or laboratory may not assume duties of Contractor. 4. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.
M. Any materials and/or workmanship which are rejected by the Engineer by reason of failure to conform to the requirements of the plans or specifications shall be removed and replaced at Contractor's expense, including testing expense to correct faulty work.
N. Inspections and testing required by law, ordinances, rules and regulations or other public authorities are the responsibility of the Contractor. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to call for testing and any work not tested will be automatically rejected.
O. Contained in the various specification sections are requirements for certification of products, testing, adjusting, and balancing of equipment and other tests and standards. Testing is required for, but not limited to, the following items of work: 1. Cast-in-place concrete 2. Concrete reinforcement 3. Other items in the Scope of Work
1.7 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel; provide access to the work area.
B. Provide to laboratory, preliminary representative samples of materials to be tested in required quantities.
C. Furnish labor and equipment: 1. To provide access to the work to be tested.
Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2. To obtain and handle samples at the site. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For laboratory's exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples.
1.8 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment and as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.
B. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect/Engineer 30 days in advance of required observations. Observer subject to approval of Architect/Engineer or Owner. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.
C. Refer to Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures, MANUFACTURERS' FIELD REPORTS article.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Verify existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work being applied or attached.
C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
D. Verify utility services are available, of correct characteristics, and in correct locations.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying new material or substance in contact or bond.
3.3 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1. Date test or inspection was conducted 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
3.4 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. 2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION
Quality Requirements 01 40 00 - 7 This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083 SECTION 01 40 10 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Summary.
B. Selection and Payment.
C. Referenced Standards.
D. Quality Assurance.
E. Laboratory Responsibilities.
F. Laboratory Reports.
G. Limits on Testing Laboratory Authority.
H. Contractor Responsibilities.
I. Masonry.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The testing laboratory shall make all inspections and perform all tests in accordance with the building code, local authorities, state regulations, TxDOT Test Standards, and the ASTM specifications and the Contract Documents.
B. Materials and workmanship not meeting the required standards are to be removed and replaced. Replacement and subsequent testing shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
C. Testing, inspection and certifications specified in other sections of these Specifications shall be paid by the Contractor.
D. Inspection by the laboratory shall not relieve the Contractor or Fabricator of his responsibility to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.3 SELECTION AND PAYMENT:
A. The General Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory, to perform inspection and testing services specified in this section and noted in other specifications sections. The selected independent testing laboratory shall furnish unit or hourly costs for performing work as described in this section. The Owner reserves the right to determine which tests and the quantity of each herein described or elected.
Testing Laboratory Services 01 40 10 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083 1.4 REFERENCED STANDARDS:
A. The latest adopted edition of all standards referenced in the Section shall apply, unless noted otherwise. In case of conflict between these Contract Documents and a referenced standard, the Contract Documents shall govern. In case of conflict between these Contract Documents and the Building Code, the more stringent shall govern.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Testing Laboratory shall meet the requirements of ASTM E329 and ASTM E543.
B. Testing Laboratory shall be insured against errors and omissions by a professional liability insurance policy having a limit of liability not less than $500,000.
C. Testing Laboratory shall be under the direction of a Registered Engineer licensed in the State of Texas, having at least five years experience in inspection and testing of construction materials.
D. Laboratory staff monitoring concrete work shall be ACI certified inspectors.
E. Laboratory staff performing structural steel inspection shall be currently certified AWS Certified Welding Inspectors (CWI), in accordance with the provisions of AWS QCI, “Standard and Guide for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors”. The inspector may be supported by assistant inspectors who may perform specific inspection functions under the supervision of the inspector. Assistant inspectors shall be currently certified AWS Certified Associate Welding Inspectors (CAWI). The work of the assistant inspectors shall be regularly monitored by the inspector, generally on a daily basis.
F. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants.
1.6 LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES:
A. Attend pre-construction meetings and progress meetings when requested, to coordinate work with the Contractor and address quality control issues.
B. Test samples of design mixes submitted by Contractor.
C. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect/Engineer and Contractor in performance of services.
D. Perform specified inspecting, sampling, and testing of Products in accordance with specified standards.
E. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
F. Promptly notify Architect/Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or Materials.
Testing Laboratory Services 01 40 10 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083 G. Perform all inspections and tests in accordance with building code requirements for “Special Inspection” whether or not such inspections are specified in the Contract Documents.
1.7 LABORATORY REPORTS:
A. After each inspection and test, promptly submit copies of laboratory reports to Architect, Engineer, Owner and to Contractor.
B. Include: 1. Date issued 2. Project title and number 3. Name of inspector 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection 5. Identification of product and specifications section 6. Location in the Project 7. Type of inspection or test 8. Date of test 9. Results of tests 10. Conformance with Contract Documents.
1.8 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY:
A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge the requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work, except where such approval is specifically called for in these specifications.
C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor.
D. Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.
1.9 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES:
A. See technical sections of these specifications for specific requirements.
B. Advise laboratory sufficiently in advance of construction operations to allow laboratory to complete any required checks or tests and to assign personnel for field inspection and testing as specified.
C. Provide facilities for safe storage and proper curing of concrete test samples on project site for the first 24 hours and also for subsequent field curing as required by ASTM specifications C31.
D. Provide incidental labor and equipment as required to assist laboratory personnel in obtaining and handling samples at the site and in accessing work for inspection.
Testing Laboratory Services 01 40 10 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083 PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
Testing Laboratory Services 01 40 10 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 2. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents. C. Storage 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 3. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 4. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment. Coordinate location with Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Reference Section 01 63 00 – Substitutions and Product Options
Product Requirements 01 60 00 - 1
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable products when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract 2. Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 3. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 4. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 5. Samples, if requested.
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION
Product Requirements 01 60 00 - 2
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083 SECTION 01 63 00 SUBSTITUTION AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Substitutions B. Product Substitutions C. Substitution Request Forms 1.2 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. During Bidding, Architect will consider written requests from prime Bidders for substitutions. Approval of proposed substitutions will be set forth in an Addendum or letter of approval. Approval of a proposed substitution does not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the requirements of the plans and specifications for the item(s). B. Submit a copy of request for substitution. Include in substitution: 1. Data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract documents. 2. For products: a. Product identification, including manufacturer’s name and address. b. Manufacturer’s literature, including product description, performance and test data and reference standards. c. Samples, if applicable. 3. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified. C. In making request for substitution, Bidder/Contractor represents: 1. (S)He has personally investigated proposed product or method and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified. 2. (S)He waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which subsequently becomes apparent D. Substitutions will not be considered if: 1. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 15 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
Substitution and Product Options 01 63 00 - 1
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
COMPLETE SECTIONS 1 THROUGH 7, SIGN AND DATE.
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST PROJECT: ______PROJECT NO.:
TO: PM Name FROM (CONTRACTOR/BIDDER): Address
CONTRACTOR (BIDDER) HEREBY REQUESTS ACCEPTANCE OF THE FOLLOWING PRODUCT OR SYSTEMS AS A SUBSTITUTION IN ACCORD WITH THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATONS AND TERMS AND CONDITONS OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 1. SPECIFIED PRODUCT OR SYSTEM: Substitution request for (Generic Description): Specification Section No.: Article(s) Paragraph(s) 2. SUPPORTING DATA: and test data). Product data for proposed substitution is attached (description of product, reference standards, performance 3. QUALITY COMPARISON: SPECIFIED PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION Name brand: Catalog No. Manufacturer: Maintenance Service Available: Yes No 4. REASON FOR NOT GIVING PRIORITY TO SPECIFIED ITEMS:
6. EFFECT OF SUBSTITUTION: Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: [No] _____ [Yes] _____ (If yes, explain)
Change Contract Time: [No] ____ [Yes] ____ (If yes) Add _____ days, Deduct _____ days. Substitution requires dimensional revision or redesign of structure or M & E Work: [No] _____ [Yes] _____ (If yes, attach compete data). Saving or credit to Owner, if any, for accepting substitution: $ ______Extra cost to Owner, if any, for accepting substitution: $
Substitution and Product Options 01 63 00 - 2
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083 7. CONTRACTOR'S (BIDDER'S) STATEMENT OF CONFORMANCE OF PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION TO CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS. I/we have investigated the proposed substitution. I/we: believe that it is equal or superior in all respects to specified product, except as stated above. will provide the same warranty as specified for specified product. have included complete cost data and implications of the substitution. will pay redesign and special inspection costs caused by the use of this product. will pay all direct and indirect additional costs to other contractors caused by the substitution. will coordinate the incorporation of the proposed substitution in the Work. will modify other parts of the work as may be needed, to make all parts of the work complete and functioning. waive future claims for added cost to Contract caused by the substitution.
Contractor (Bidder): Date:
By:
Answer all questions and complete all blanks - use "N/A" if not applicable.
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER REVIEW AND ACTION Resubmit substitution request: Provide more information in following categories.
Sign Contractor's (Bidder's) Statement of Conformance. Substitution accepted. Substitution is accepted with the following comments.
Substitution not accepted. Substitution Request received too late.
Architect/Engineer of Record Date TxDOT
END OF SECTION
Substitution and Product Options 01 63 00 - 3
This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Installation B. Owner-Installed Products C. Progress Cleaning D. Final cleaning. E. Protecting installed construction. F. Project record documents. G. Spare parts and maintenance products. H. Product warranties and product bonds. I. Final Completion 1.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with Manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide and coordinate installation of anchorages, anchors, and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 1.3 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Not Applicable
Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.4 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of Manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. 1.5 FINAL CLEANING A. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Conduct the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Final Completion for entire, or a portion of, the Project: 1. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. 2. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. 3. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. 4. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. 5. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. 6. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. 7. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. 8. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. 9. Remove labels that are not permanent. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 11. Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. 12. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.
Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
13. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. 14. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. 15. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. 16. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. a. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency, if soiled by construction operations. b. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. 1.6 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. B. Protect finished floors and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. C. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. 7. Manufacturer’s certificates 8. Reviewed Submittals 1.8 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Furnish spare parts, maintenance, and extra products in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed by Owner. 1.9 PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND PRODUCT BONDS A. Obtain warranties, assemble transferable warranty documents and bonds executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of applicable item of work. B. Verify documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.10 FINAL COMPLETION A. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Final Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. 1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used
END OF SECTION
Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 70 00 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 01 73 10
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Summary
B. Definitions
C. Submittals
D. Quality Assurance
E. Warranty
F. Materials
G. Examination
H. Preparation
I. Performance
1.2 SUMMARY: This section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
A. Related Sections include the following: 1. Refer to each Division and Section for additional information for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Definitions contained in this Article are not necessarily complete, but are general to the extent that they are not defined more explicitly elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
B. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work.
C. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work including any assembly ratings required.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided.
Cutting and Patching 01 73 10 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083 2. Changes to Existing Conditions: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building’s appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted. 6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. 7. Architect’s Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch the following operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Fire-protection systems. 3. Control systems. 4. Communication systems. 5. Security systems. 6. Electrical wiring systems. 7. Operating systems classified as special construction.
C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that could result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that could result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Equipment supports. 4. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 5. Noise and vibration control elements and systems.
D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect’s opinion, reduce the building’s aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1. If possible, retain original Installer or fabricator to cut and patch exposed Work listed below. If it is impossible to engage original Installer or fabricator, engage another recognized, experienced, and specialized firm. a. Roof work: use an approved installer, using approved materials from the manufacturer to seal and secure the new light tubes per the manufacturer’s standard installation
Cutting and Patching 01 73 10 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083 method. Provide manufacturer’s standard installation method for review and approval before installation.
E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications and Contract Documents.
B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.
D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical/Plumbing Systems: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated or abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to avoid interruption of services to occupied areas.
Cutting and Patching 01 73 10 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083 3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. Use wet cutting methods when appropriate to minimize dust. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer’s written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering or chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete/Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Divisions / Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, supply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather tight condition.
D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putting, overspray, concrete splatter, and similar materials and restore any impacted areas or surfaces to original condition.
END OF SECTION
Cutting and Patching 01 73 10 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. Selective demolition work, complete, as indicated, specified, and required for new work, including removal and disposal of demolished materials and capping of existing utilities.
B. Removal, protection, and storage of items designated to be reused.
C. Removal, protection, and delivery of items designated as Owner' salvage to location on site as directed by Owner.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS:
A. Cutting of non-structural concrete floors and ceilings and masonry wall for piping, ducts, and conduit is included with work of respective mechanical and electrical specifications sections; Divisions 22, 23, and 26.
B. Relocation of pipes, ducts, conduits, other mechanical and electrical work; Divisions 22, 23, 26, and 33.
1.3 SUBMITTALS: Comply with Section 01 33 00.
A. Before commencing selective demolition work, submit for review and approval of the Architect, a schedule showing the commencement, order, and completion dates for the various parts of this work. Include coordination for shut-off, capping, and continuation of utility services as required, together with details for dust, noise and weathertight protection.
B. Before starting any work relating to existing utilities that will temporarily discontinue service to existing building, notify the Architect 72 hours in advance and obtain approval before proceeding with work. Do not disconnect or disrupt service without Architect's prior approval.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Salvageable Items: 1. Salvage items indicated. Store at location on-site as directed by Owner. 2. Items indicated to be removed, and not designated for Owner's salvage or for reuse, may be salvaged by the Contractor. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted. 3. Recycle as much unwanted demolished material as possible to divert from landfills.
Selective Demolition 02 41 19 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Protections: 1. Provide protective measures as required to protect personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work. 2. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, and support to prevent movement, settlement, and collapse of structure or element to be demolished, and adjacent facilities and work to remain. 3. Provide adequate fire protection in accordance with local Fire Department requirements. 4. Cover and protect existing floors, equipment, fixtures, and other items to remain from soiling or damage during demolition work.
C. Damages: Promptly repair, to the satisfaction of the Architect, damages caused to contents by demolition work or due to insufficiency of protection provided, at no cost to Owner. Replace damaged work, as directed by the Architect, if repair not satisfactory.
D. Traffic: Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal in a manner to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
E. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practicable level. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DEMOLITION: Refer to drawings and provide selective demolition as indicated and as required for new work.
A. Proceed in a systematic manner. Use such methods as required to complete work in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations.
B. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power driven impact tools.
C. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors and framing.
3.2 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS: Remove debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations as the work progresses. Transport and legally dispose of materials off site. Burning of debris will not be permitted on site.
3.3 CLEAN UP AND REPAIR:
A. Upon completion of selective demolition work, remove tools, equipment and demolished materials from site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean.
Selective Demolition 02 41 19 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return structures and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to commencement of selective demolition work. Repair construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work.
END OF SECTION
Selective Demolition 02 41 19 - 3 This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 02 82 00 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
Refer to attached report dated August 8, 2018 Prepared for Garver by Alpha Terra Engineering, Inc.
Project El Paso DHQ Warehouse Remodel Building 248015 13301 Gateway Boulevard West, El Paso, Texas Survey of the DHQ Warehouse Remodel Area
Asbestos Abatement 02 82 00 - 1
Asbestos Survey Report
El Paso DHQ Warehouse Remodel Building 248015 13301 Gateway Boulevard West, El Paso, Texas Survey of the DHQ Warehouse Remodel Area
Prepared for:
4701 Northshore Drive Little Rock, AR 72118 Project Number: 24-8083
August 8, 2018
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
On July 26th, 2018 ATEI, Inc. performed an asbestos survey at 13301 Gateway Boulevard West, El Paso, Texas, on the DHQ Warehouse Remodel Area, located on Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) El Paso Property. Inspection, bulk sampling, and analytical procedures were performed in general accordance with the Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) interpretations, and guidelines of the Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA), and in accordance to Texas Department of State Health Services, Texas Asbestos Health Protection Rules. A total of 30 bulk samples were collected, submitted to the laboratory, and analyzed. All suspect asbestos-containing materials (ACMs) observed during the inspection were in good to fair condition.
There was no asbestos detected in the following suspect materials collected on the DHQ Warehouse Remodel Area at 13301 Gateway Boulevard West, El Paso Texas:
Sheetrock Duct Mastic Joint Compound Carpet Mastic Vinyl Floor Tile Window and Door Caulk Floor Tile Mastic Roofing Material Ceiling Tile Exterior Wall Plaster Cove Base Mastic
ACM, as defined by the EPA and the State of Texas, are materials with an asbestos concentration of greater than 1% (>1%). A complete listing of suspect materials, sampled materials, and the analytical results can be found in the following text portions of this report and in the sample results from the laboratory. Pictures of suspect asbestos material sampled are provided in Appendix C. Floor plan diagrams depicting the locations of the samples are provided in Appendix B.
Laboratory analytical data sheets have been reviewed for potential asbestos content within individual layers of a sample for each material. Analysis of an individual layer of a material may exceed 1% while the composite analysis of the material as a whole is below 1%. Laboratory analytical data sheets are provided in Appendix A.
INTRODUCTION
On July 26, 2018, ATEI conducted a scope of work based AHERA survey for Garver, LLC, at the El Paso District Headquarters DHQ Warehouse Building East Wing, El Paso, Texas. This facility is located at 13301 Gateway Boulevard West, El Paso, Texas. The asbestos survey encompassed the project area and adjacent offices in the east wing of the DHQ Warehouse Building. The scope of work asbestos assessment included collecting bulk samples of suspected ACMs at numerous locations and confirming the asbestos content of the materials at each location. It is important to note that not all areas were sampled, as some areas may not have been accessible to the inspector, or would be destructive to the buildings finishes such as decorative floor tiles. All samples collected were collected from discreet locations.
The AHERA accredited and Texas State licensed inspector representing ATEI, Inc. who performed the asbestos survey was Alex Jackson (Texas Asbestos Inspection License #60-2759). His Texas Asbestos licenses were issued by the Texas Department of State Health Services, Austin, Texas. Copies of valid state licenses are presented in Appendix D.
Alpha Terra Engineering 2 S180522-259
PROPERTY DESCRIPTION
Relevant description according to the ATEI, Inc. asbestos inspector who conducted the survey on the DHQ Warehouse Remodel Area located at the referenced site:
DHQ Warehouse Building: Building 248015 is located on the back of 13301 Gateway Boulevard West and is a single story multi-purpose building with offices, maintenance warehouse, and garage facility. The building is concrete slab on grade foundation with concrete walls, and CMU brick construction. The roof is finished with a PVC membrane roofing system. The specific project area is located in the maintenance warehouse which is located on the east wing of the building. This area of the building has bare finished concrete floors, concrete or CMU brick walls and no drop ceiling. Located on the east and west end of the building are office. These offices are finished out with 12x12 vinyl floor tile, carpet, cove base, ceiling tiles, and sheetrock.
SAMPLED SUSPECT MATERIALS
During the survey bulk samples of the following suspect materials were collected:
Ceiling Tile Cove Base Mastic Carpet Mastic Door/Window Caulk Sheetrock and Joint Compound Duct Mastic White 12x12 Floor Tile and Mastic Off White 12x12 Floor Tile and Mastic Vinyl Roofing Membrane Roofing Caulk Exterior Stucco/Plaster
ASBESTOS SAMPLING AND ANALYTICAL PROCEDURES
Sampling Procedures
Representative bulk samples of suspect asbestos containing building materials were randomly collected from each of the homogeneous areas that were considered to have the potential to contain ACMs. Sampling equipment was decontaminated before and after sample collection to avoid cross-contamination of samples. For the purpose of this survey each space was inspected and sampled as separate functional areas with separate and distinct homogenous materials. Homogenous material determination was based on the following criteria:
Similar physical characteristics (same color and texture, etc.) Application (sprayed-on, troweled-on, assembly into a system etc.) Material function (Thermal insulation, floor tile, wallboard system etc.)
Alpha Terra Engineering 3 S180522-259
The survey is designed to be used as a basis for identifying and quantifying ACMs prior to the removal of ACMs from the building and prior to any demolition or a major refurbishment. Therefore, the survey does not assess the condition of the asbestos, other than to note areas of damage or identify locations where additional asbestos debris may be expected to be present. The scope of the survey was confined to areas which were accessible to the inspectors on the day of the survey. Areas of the building that were not included in the survey were the areas that were not within the scope of work, or were areas that were inaccessible for reasons of safety. The inspectors were provided access to all areas of the building where suspect ACM had the potential to be found, however, the inspectors collected bulk samples only in readily accessible areas. It was not possible to collect samples and inspect all spaces within the building.
The bulk samples were only collected during the date when the inspectors were on-site performing the survey. Evaluation of the condition of the suspect ACMs were performed by the accredited inspector during the inspection.
Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) Analysis Methodology
Laboratory analytical services were provided by Crisp Analytical, L.L.C., located in Carrollton, Texas, a National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) certified laboratory (NVLAP code # 200349-0).
PLM samples were analyzed utilizing the Environmental Protection Agency’s Test Methods: Methods for the determination of Asbestos in Bulk Building Materials (EPA 600/R-93/116, July 1993) and the McCrone Research Institute’s The Asbestos Particle Atlas as method references. Additional treatment and tests may be required to accurately define composition (i.e. ashing, extraction, acetone treatment, and TEM).
Analysis was performed by using the bulk sample for visual observation and slide preparation(s) for microscopic examination and identification. The laboratory analyzed the bulk samples for asbestos (chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite, anthophyllite, and actinolite/tremolite), fibrous non-asbestos constituents (mineral wool, cellulose, etc.), and non-fibrous constituents. Using a stereoscope, the microscopist visually estimated relative amounts of each constituent by determining the volume of each constituent in proportion to the total volume of the sample. Samples reported to contain less than 1% asbestos were point counted in order to quantify trace asbestos for compliance with NESHAP techniques.
FINDINGS
Interpretation of Laboratory Asbestos Results
A material is considered by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and the State of Texas to be asbestos-containing if at least one sample collected from the homogenous material contains asbestos in a concentration greater than one percent (>1 %). Asbestos was not detected in concentrations exceeding 1% in the materials sampled.
CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
Results of analysis confirmed asbestos was not detected in any of the 30 bulk samples collected at the DHQ Warehouse Remodel Area. However, if the remodel area extends further into the building than the East wing, or out of scope of the remodel project, then an additional asbestos inspection of these areas is recommended.
Alpha Terra Engineering 4 S180522-259
SUMMARY OF PLM ANALYTICAL DATA
SAMPLE MATERIAL MATERIAL ASBESTOS NUMBER TYPE LOCATION CONTENT 259-001 Ceiling Tile 2x4 Hallway ND 259-002 Ceiling Tile 2x4 Security Room ND 259-003 Ceiling Tile 2x4 Break Area ND 259-004 Decorative Ceiling Tile Conference Room ND 259-005 Decorative Ceiling Tile Conference Room ND 259-006 Decorative Ceiling Tile Conference Room ND 259-007 Cove Base Mastic Break Room ND 259-008 Cove Base Mastic Hallway ND 259-009 Cove Base Mastic Entry ND 259-010 Carpet Mastic Conference Room ND 259-011 Carpet Mastic Conference Room ND 259-012 Carpet Mastic Open Ship Office ND 259-013 Caulk Around Doors/Windows Warehouse Remodel Area ND 259-014 Caulk Around Doors/Windows Warehouse Remodel Area ND 259-015 Caulk Around Doors/Windows Bay Doors ND 259-016 Sheetrock and Joint Compound Break Room ND 259-017 Sheetrock and Joint Compound Hallway ND 259-018 Sheetrock and Joint Compound Conference Room ND 259-019 Duct Mastic Break Room ND 259-020 Duct Mastic Hallway ND 259-021 Duct Mastic Hallway ND 259-022 White 12x12 Floor Tile/Mastic Break Rom By Door ND 259-023 White 12x12 Floor Tile/Mastic Break Room By Cabinet ND 259-024 White 12x12 Floor Tile/Mastic Mechanical Room Door ND 259-025 Off White 12x12 Floor Tile/Mastic Hallway ND 259-026 Off White 12x12 Floor Tile/Mastic By Offices ND 259-027 Off White 12x12 Floor Tile/Mastic Back Hallway ND 259-028 Sheet Vinyl Roofing Membrane Middle of Roof ND 259-029 Roofing Caulk Perimeter of Roof Edge of Roof ND 259-030 Exterior Stucco/Plaster Side of Warehouse ND ND= None Detected ST= Stop at First Positive Sample
*Laboratory analytical data sheets were reviewed for potential asbestos content within individual layers of a sample for each material. Analysis of an individual layer of a material may exceed 1% while the composite analysis of the material as a whole is below 1%. Laboratory analytical data sheets are presented within Appendix A.
Earl McIntosh Alexander H. Jackson Individual Asbestos Consultant Asbestos Inspector IAC TDSHS Lic#10-5518 TDSHS Lic#60-2759
Alpha Terra Engineering 5 S180522-259
APPENDIX A LABORATORY RESULTS
CA Labs Crisp Analytical, L.L.C. C CA Labs, L.L.C. 1929 Old Denton Road A 12232 Industriplex, Suite 32 Dedicated to Carrollton, TX 75006 Labs Baton Rouge, LA 70809 Quality Phone 972-242-2754 Phone 225-751-5632 Fax 972-242-2798 Fax 225-751-5634
Materials Characterization - Bulk Asbestos Analysis Laboratory Analysis Report - Polarized Light Alpha Terra Engineering Inc 8626 Tesoro Dr, Suite 810 Customer Project: S180522-259, TxDOT El Paso DHO Warehouse Remodel San Antonio, TX 78217 Reference #:CAL18075062AG Date: 8/2/2018
Analysis and Method Summary of polarized light microscopy (PLM / Stereomicroscopy bulk asbestos analysis) using the methods described in 40CFR Part 763 Appendix E to Subpart E (Interim and EPA 600 / R-93 / 116 (Improved). The sample is first viewed with the aid of a stereomicroscope. Numerous liquid slide preparations are created for analysis under the polarized microscope where identifications and quantifications are preformed. Calibrated liquid refractive oils are used as liquid mouting medium. These oils are used for identification (dispersion staining). A calibrated visual estimation is reported, should any asbestiform mineral be present. Other techniques such as acid washing are used in conjugation with refractive oils for detection of smaller quantities of asbestos. All asbestos percentages are based on calibrated visual estimation traceable to NIST standards for regulated asbestos. Traceability to measurement and calibration is achieved by using known amounts and types of asbestos from standards where analyst and laboratory accuracy are measured. As little as 0.001% asbestos can be detected in favorable samples, while detection in unfavorable samples may approach the detection limit of 0.50% (well above the laboratory definition of trace).
Discussion Vermiculite containing samples may contain trace amounts of actinolite/tremolite. When not detected by PLM, these samples should be analyzed using TEM methods and / or water separation techniques. Suspected actinolite/vermiculite presence will be indicated through the sample comment section of this report.
Fibrous talc containing samples may contain a regulated asbestos fiber known as anthophyllite. Under certain conditions the same fiber may actually contain both talc and anthophyllite (a phenomenon called intergrowth). Again, TEM detection methods are recommended. CA Labs PLM report comments will denote suspected amounts of asbestiform anthophyllite with talc, where further analysis is recommended.
Some samples (floor tiles, surfacings, etc.) may contain fibers too small to be delectable by PLM analysis and should be analyzed by TEM bulk protocols.
A "trace asbestos" will be reported if the analyst observes far less than 1% asbestos. CA Labs defines "trace asbestos" as a few fibers detected by the analyst in several preparations and will indicate as such under these circumstances.
Since allowable variation in quantification of samples close to 1% is high, <1% may be reported. Such results are ideal for point counting, and the technique is mandatory for friable samples (NESHAP, Nov. 1990 and clarification letter 8 May 1991) under 1% percent asbestos or "trace asbestos". In order to make all initial PLM reports issued from CA Labs NESHAP compliant, all <1% asbestos results (except floor tiles) will be point counted at no additional charge.
Qualifications CA Labs is accredited by the National Voluntary Accreditation Program (NVLAP) for selected test methods for airborne fiber analysis (TEM), and for bulk asbestos fiber analysis (PLM). CA Labs is also accredited by AIHA LAP, LLC. in the PLM asbestos field of testing for Industrial Hygiene. All analysts have completed college courses or hold a degree in a natural science (geology, biology, or environmental science). Recognition by a state professional board in one these disciplines is preferred, but not required. Extensive in-house training programs are used to augment the educational background of the analyst. The Laboratory Director and Quality Manager have received supplemental McCrone Research training for asbestos identification. Analysis performed at Crisp Analytical Labs, LLC 1929 Old Denton Road Carrollton, TX 75006
Dallas NVLAP Lab Code 200349-0 TEM/PLM TCEQ# T104704513-15-3 TDH 30-0235 AIHA LAP, LLC Laboratory #102929
/data/wordandspreadsheets/templates/asbestos/PLMReport.xls (Revision 3 3/7/17) Page 1 of 8 CA Labs Crisp Analytical, L.L.C. CA Labs, L.L.C. 1929 Old Denton Road 12232 Industriplex, Suite 32 Dedicated to Carrollton, TX 75006 Baton Rouge, LA 70809 Quality Phone 972-242-2754 Phone 225-751-5632 Fax 972-242-2798 Fax 225-751-5634
Overview of Project Sample Material Containing Asbestos
Customer Project: S180522-259, TxDOT El Paso DHO Warehouse RemodelCA Labs Project #: CAL18075062AG Sample # Layer Analysts Physical Description of Asbestos type / # Subsample calibrated visual List of Affected Building estimate percent Material Types
No Asbestos Detected.
Dallas NVLAP Lab Code 200349-0 TEM/PLM TCEQ# T104704513-15-3 TDH 30-0235 AIHA LAP, LLC Laboratory #102929
Glossary of abbreviations (non-asbestos fibers and non-fibrous minerals): ca - carbonate pe - perlite fg - fiberglass pa - palygorskite (clay) gypsum - gypsum qu - quartz mw - mineral wool bi - binder wo - wollastinite or - organic ta - talc ma - matrix sy - synthetic mi - mica ce - cellulose ve - vermiculite br - brucite ot - other ka - kaolin (clay)
This report relates to the items tested. This report is not to be used by the customer to claim product certification, approval or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST, AIHA LAP, LLC, or any other agency of the federal government. This report may not be reproduced except in full without written permission from CA Labs. These results are submitted pursuant to CA Labs' current terms and sale, condition of sale, including the company's standard warranty and limitations of liability provisions and no responsibility or liability is assumed for the manner in which the results are used or interpreted. Unless notified in writing to return the samples covered by this report, CA Labs will store the samples for a period of ninety (90) days before discarding. A shipping or handling fee may be assessed for the return of any samples.
/data/wordandspreadsheets/templates/asbestos/PLMReport.xls (Revision 3 3/7/17) Page 2 of 8 CA Labs Crisp Analytical, L.L.C. CA Labs, L.L.C. 1929 Old Denton Road 12232 Industriplex, Suite 32 Dedicated to Carrollton, TX 75006 Baton Rouge, LA 70809 Quality Phone 972-242-2754 Phone 225-751-5632 Fax 972-242-2798 Fax 225-751-5634
Polarized Light Asbestiform Materials Characterization
Customer Info : Attn: Customer Project: CA Labs Project #: Alpha Terra Engineering Inc CAL18075062AG 8626 Tesoro Dr, Suite 810 S180522-259, TxDOT El Paso San Antonio, TX 78217 DHO Warehouse Remodel Date: 8/2/2018 Turnaround Time: Samples Received: 7/30/18 10:00AM Phone # 210-325-3641 3 days Date Of Sampling: 7/26/2018 Fax # 210-654-3802 Purchase Order #: Sample # Com Layer Analysts Physical Description of Homo- Asbestos type / Non-asbestos fiber Non-fibrous type ment # Subsample geneo calibrated visual type / percent / percent us estimate percent (Y/N)
42% ce 259-001 1-1 Ceiling Tile 2x4/ tan ceiling tile y None Detected 30% fg 28% qu,pe,ca
41% ce 259-002 2-1 Ceiling Tile 2x4/ tan ceiling tile y None Detected 31% fg 28% qu,pe,ca
40% ce 259-003 3-1 Ceiling Tile 2x4/ tan ceiling tile y None Detected 30% fg 30% qu,pe,ca
Ceiling Tile 2x2 Decorative/ 259-004 4-1 white surfacing y None Detected 100% qu,bi
42% ce 4-2 tan ceiling tile y None Detected 30% fg 28% qu,pe,ca
Ceiling Tile 2x2 Decorative/ 259-005 5-1 white surfacing y None Detected 100% qu,bi
41% ce 5-2 tan ceiling tile y None Detected 31% fg 28% qu,pe,ca Dallas NVLAP Lab Code 200349-0 TEM/PLM TCEQ# T104704513-15-3 TDH 30-0235 AIHA LAP, LLC Laboratory #102929 Analysis Method: Interim (40CFR Part 763 Appendix E to Subpart E) / Improved (EPA-600 / R-93/116). All samples received in good condition unless noted. Preparation Method: HCL acid washing for carbonate based samples, chemical reduction for organically bound components, oil immersion for identification of asbestos types by dispersion attaining / becke line method. ca - carbonate mi - mica fg - fiberglass ce - cellulose gy - gypsum ve - vermiculite mw - mineral wool br - brucite bi - binder ot -other wo - wollastonite ka - kaolin (clay) or - organic pe - perlite ta - talc pa - palygorskite (clay) Approved Signatories: ma - matrix qu - quartz sy - synthetic
______Julio Robles Technical Manager Senior Analyst Analyst Tanner Rasmussen Julio Robles 1. Fire Damage significant fiber damage - reported percentages reflect unaltered fibers 6. Anthophyllite in association with Fibrous Talc 2. Fire Damage no significant fiber damages effecting fibrous percentages 7. Contamination suspected from other building materials 3. Actinolite in association with Vermiculite 8. Favorable scenario for water separation on vermiculite for possible analysis by another method 4. Layer not analyzed - attached to previous positive layer and contamination is suspected 9. < 1% Result point counted positive 5. Not enough sample to analyze 10. TEM analysis suggested
/data/wordandspreadsheets/templates/asbestos/PLMReport.xls (Revision 3 3/7/17) Page 3 of 8 CA Labs Crisp Analytical, L.L.C. CA Labs, L.L.C. 1929 Old Denton Road 12232 Industriplex, Suite 32 Dedicated to Carrollton, TX 75006 Baton Rouge, LA 70809 Quality Phone 972-242-2754 Phone 225-751-5632 Fax 972-242-2798 Fax 225-751-5634
Polarized Light Asbestiform Materials Characterization
Customer Info : Attn: Customer Project: CA Labs Project #: Alpha Terra Engineering Inc CAL18075062AG 8626 Tesoro Dr, Suite 810 S180522-259, TxDOT El Paso San Antonio, TX 78217 DHO Warehouse Remodel Date: 8/2/2018 Turnaround Time: Samples Received: 7/30/18 10:00AM Phone # 210-325-3641 3 days Date Of Sampling: 7/26/2018 Fax # 210-654-3802 Purchase Order #: Sample # Com Layer Analysts Physical Description of Homo- Asbestos type / Non-asbestos fiber Non-fibrous type ment # Subsample geneo calibrated visual type / percent / percent us estimate percent (Y/N)
Ceiling Tile 2x2 Decorative/ 259-006 6-1 white surfacing y None Detected 100% qu,bi
40% ce 6-2 tan ceiling tile y None Detected 30% fg 30% qu,pe,ca
259-007 7-1 Cove Base Mastic/ tan mastic y None Detected 100% gy,bi
259-008 8-1 Cove Base Mastic/ tan mastic y None Detected 100% gy,bi
259-009 9-1 Cove Base Mastic/ tan mastic y None Detected 100% gy,bi
259-010 10-1 Carpet Mastic/ tan mastic y None Detected 100% gy,bi
259-011 11-1 Carpet Mastic/ tan mastic y None Detected 100% gy,bi Dallas NVLAP Lab Code 200349-0 TEM/PLM TCEQ# T104704513-15-3 TDH 30-0235 AIHA LAP, LLC Laboratory #102929 Analysis Method: Interim (40CFR Part 763 Appendix E to Subpart E) / Improved (EPA-600 / R-93/116). All samples received in good condition unless noted. Preparation Method: HCL acid washing for carbonate based samples, chemical reduction for organically bound components, oil immersion for identification of asbestos types by dispersion attaining / becke line method. ca - carbonate mi - mica fg - fiberglass ce - cellulose gy - gypsum ve - vermiculite mw - mineral wool br - brucite bi - binder ot -other wo - wollastonite ka - kaolin (clay) or - organic pe - perlite ta - talc pa - palygorskite (clay) Approved Signatories: ma - matrix qu - quartz sy - synthetic
______Julio Robles Technical Manager Senior Analyst Analyst Tanner Rasmussen Julio Robles 1. Fire Damage significant fiber damage - reported percentages reflect unaltered fibers 6. Anthophyllite in association with Fibrous Talc 2. Fire Damage no significant fiber damages effecting fibrous percentages 7. Contamination suspected from other building materials 3. Actinolite in association with Vermiculite 8. Favorable scenario for water separation on vermiculite for possible analysis by another method 4. Layer not analyzed - attached to previous positive layer and contamination is suspected 9. < 1% Result point counted positive 5. Not enough sample to analyze 10. TEM analysis suggested
/data/wordandspreadsheets/templates/asbestos/PLMReport.xls (Revision 3 3/7/17) Page 4 of 8 CA Labs Crisp Analytical, L.L.C. CA Labs, L.L.C. 1929 Old Denton Road 12232 Industriplex, Suite 32 Dedicated to Carrollton, TX 75006 Baton Rouge, LA 70809 Quality Phone 972-242-2754 Phone 225-751-5632 Fax 972-242-2798 Fax 225-751-5634
Polarized Light Asbestiform Materials Characterization
Customer Info : Attn: Customer Project: CA Labs Project #: Alpha Terra Engineering Inc CAL18075062AG 8626 Tesoro Dr, Suite 810 S180522-259, TxDOT El Paso San Antonio, TX 78217 DHO Warehouse Remodel Date: 8/2/2018 Turnaround Time: Samples Received: 7/30/18 10:00AM Phone # 210-325-3641 3 days Date Of Sampling: 7/26/2018 Fax # 210-654-3802 Purchase Order #: Sample # Com Layer Analysts Physical Description of Homo- Asbestos type / Non-asbestos fiber Non-fibrous type ment # Subsample geneo calibrated visual type / percent / percent us estimate percent (Y/N)
259-012 12-1 Carpet Mastic/ tan mastic y None Detected 100% gy,bi
Perimeter Caulk on 259-013 13-1 Doors/Openings/ gray sealant y None Detected 100% qu,gy,bi
Perimeter Caulk on 259-014 14-1 Doors/Openings/ gray sealant y None Detected 100% qu,gy,bi
Perimeter Caulk on 259-015 15-1 Doors/Openings/ gray sealant y None Detected 100% qu,gy,bi
Sheetrock/Joint Compound/ 259-016 16-1 white compound y None Detected 100% qu,ca
off-white compound (beneath 16-2 tape) y None Detected 100% qu,mi,ca
Sheetrock/Joint Compound/ 259-017 17-1 white compound y None Detected 100% qu,ca Dallas NVLAP Lab Code 200349-0 TEM/PLM TCEQ# T104704513-15-3 TDH 30-0235 AIHA LAP, LLC Laboratory #102929 Analysis Method: Interim (40CFR Part 763 Appendix E to Subpart E) / Improved (EPA-600 / R-93/116). All samples received in good condition unless noted. Preparation Method: HCL acid washing for carbonate based samples, chemical reduction for organically bound components, oil immersion for identification of asbestos types by dispersion attaining / becke line method. ca - carbonate mi - mica fg - fiberglass ce - cellulose gy - gypsum ve - vermiculite mw - mineral wool br - brucite bi - binder ot -other wo - wollastonite ka - kaolin (clay) or - organic pe - perlite ta - talc pa - palygorskite (clay) Approved Signatories: ma - matrix qu - quartz sy - synthetic
______Julio Robles Technical Manager Senior Analyst Analyst Tanner Rasmussen Julio Robles 1. Fire Damage significant fiber damage - reported percentages reflect unaltered fibers 6. Anthophyllite in association with Fibrous Talc 2. Fire Damage no significant fiber damages effecting fibrous percentages 7. Contamination suspected from other building materials 3. Actinolite in association with Vermiculite 8. Favorable scenario for water separation on vermiculite for possible analysis by another method 4. Layer not analyzed - attached to previous positive layer and contamination is suspected 9. < 1% Result point counted positive 5. Not enough sample to analyze 10. TEM analysis suggested
/data/wordandspreadsheets/templates/asbestos/PLMReport.xls (Revision 3 3/7/17) Page 5 of 8 CA Labs Crisp Analytical, L.L.C. CA Labs, L.L.C. 1929 Old Denton Road 12232 Industriplex, Suite 32 Dedicated to Carrollton, TX 75006 Baton Rouge, LA 70809 Quality Phone 972-242-2754 Phone 225-751-5632 Fax 972-242-2798 Fax 225-751-5634
Polarized Light Asbestiform Materials Characterization
Customer Info : Attn: Customer Project: CA Labs Project #: Alpha Terra Engineering Inc CAL18075062AG 8626 Tesoro Dr, Suite 810 S180522-259, TxDOT El Paso San Antonio, TX 78217 DHO Warehouse Remodel Date: 8/2/2018 Turnaround Time: Samples Received: 7/30/18 10:00AM Phone # 210-325-3641 3 days Date Of Sampling: 7/26/2018 Fax # 210-654-3802 Purchase Order #: Sample # Com Layer Analysts Physical Description of Homo- Asbestos type / Non-asbestos fiber Non-fibrous type ment # Subsample geneo calibrated visual type / percent / percent us estimate percent (Y/N)
off-white compound (beneath 17-2 tape) y None Detected 100% qu,mi,ca
Sheetrock/Joint Compound/ 259-018 18-1 off-white compound y None Detected 100% qu,mi,ca
Duct Mastic/ gray and tan 259-019 19-1 sealant n None Detected 100% qu,gy,bi
Duct Mastic/ gray and tan 259-020 20-1 sealant n None Detected 100% qu,gy,bi
Duct Mastic/ gray and tan 259-021 21-1 sealant n None Detected 100% qu,gy,bi
White 12x12 Floor Tile and 259-022 22-1 Mastic/ white floor tile y None Detected 100% qu,ca
22-2 tan mastic y None Detected 100% gy,bi Dallas NVLAP Lab Code 200349-0 TEM/PLM TCEQ# T104704513-15-3 TDH 30-0235 AIHA LAP, LLC Laboratory #102929 Analysis Method: Interim (40CFR Part 763 Appendix E to Subpart E) / Improved (EPA-600 / R-93/116). All samples received in good condition unless noted. Preparation Method: HCL acid washing for carbonate based samples, chemical reduction for organically bound components, oil immersion for identification of asbestos types by dispersion attaining / becke line method. ca - carbonate mi - mica fg - fiberglass ce - cellulose gy - gypsum ve - vermiculite mw - mineral wool br - brucite bi - binder ot -other wo - wollastonite ka - kaolin (clay) or - organic pe - perlite ta - talc pa - palygorskite (clay) Approved Signatories: ma - matrix qu - quartz sy - synthetic
______Julio Robles Technical Manager Senior Analyst Analyst Tanner Rasmussen Julio Robles 1. Fire Damage significant fiber damage - reported percentages reflect unaltered fibers 6. Anthophyllite in association with Fibrous Talc 2. Fire Damage no significant fiber damages effecting fibrous percentages 7. Contamination suspected from other building materials 3. Actinolite in association with Vermiculite 8. Favorable scenario for water separation on vermiculite for possible analysis by another method 4. Layer not analyzed - attached to previous positive layer and contamination is suspected 9. < 1% Result point counted positive 5. Not enough sample to analyze 10. TEM analysis suggested
/data/wordandspreadsheets/templates/asbestos/PLMReport.xls (Revision 3 3/7/17) Page 6 of 8 CA Labs Crisp Analytical, L.L.C. CA Labs, L.L.C. 1929 Old Denton Road 12232 Industriplex, Suite 32 Dedicated to Carrollton, TX 75006 Baton Rouge, LA 70809 Quality Phone 972-242-2754 Phone 225-751-5632 Fax 972-242-2798 Fax 225-751-5634
Polarized Light Asbestiform Materials Characterization
Customer Info : Attn: Customer Project: CA Labs Project #: Alpha Terra Engineering Inc CAL18075062AG 8626 Tesoro Dr, Suite 810 S180522-259, TxDOT El Paso San Antonio, TX 78217 DHO Warehouse Remodel Date: 8/2/2018 Turnaround Time: Samples Received: 7/30/18 10:00AM Phone # 210-325-3641 3 days Date Of Sampling: 7/26/2018 Fax # 210-654-3802 Purchase Order #: Sample # Com Layer Analysts Physical Description of Homo- Asbestos type / Non-asbestos fiber Non-fibrous type ment # Subsample geneo calibrated visual type / percent / percent us estimate percent (Y/N)
White 12x12 Floor Tile and 259-023 23-1 Mastic/ white floor tile y None Detected 100% qu,ca
23-2 tan mastic y None Detected 100% gy,bi
White 12x12 Floor Tile and 259-024 24-1 Mastic/ white floor tile y None Detected 100% qu,ca
24-2 tan mastic y None Detected 100% gy,bi
Off-White 12x12 Floor Tile 259-025 25-1 and Mastic/ tan floor tile y None Detected 100% qu,ca
25-2 tan mastic y None Detected 100% gy,bi
Off-White 12x12 Floor Tile 259-026 26-1 and Mastic/ tan floor tile y None Detected 100% qu,ca Dallas NVLAP Lab Code 200349-0 TEM/PLM TCEQ# T104704513-15-3 TDH 30-0235 AIHA LAP, LLC Laboratory #102929 Analysis Method: Interim (40CFR Part 763 Appendix E to Subpart E) / Improved (EPA-600 / R-93/116). All samples received in good condition unless noted. Preparation Method: HCL acid washing for carbonate based samples, chemical reduction for organically bound components, oil immersion for identification of asbestos types by dispersion attaining / becke line method. ca - carbonate mi - mica fg - fiberglass ce - cellulose gy - gypsum ve - vermiculite mw - mineral wool br - brucite bi - binder ot -other wo - wollastonite ka - kaolin (clay) or - organic pe - perlite ta - talc pa - palygorskite (clay) Approved Signatories: ma - matrix qu - quartz sy - synthetic
______Julio Robles Technical Manager Senior Analyst Analyst Tanner Rasmussen Julio Robles 1. Fire Damage significant fiber damage - reported percentages reflect unaltered fibers 6. Anthophyllite in association with Fibrous Talc 2. Fire Damage no significant fiber damages effecting fibrous percentages 7. Contamination suspected from other building materials 3. Actinolite in association with Vermiculite 8. Favorable scenario for water separation on vermiculite for possible analysis by another method 4. Layer not analyzed - attached to previous positive layer and contamination is suspected 9. < 1% Result point counted positive 5. Not enough sample to analyze 10. TEM analysis suggested
/data/wordandspreadsheets/templates/asbestos/PLMReport.xls (Revision 3 3/7/17) Page 7 of 8 CA Labs Crisp Analytical, L.L.C. CA Labs, L.L.C. 1929 Old Denton Road 12232 Industriplex, Suite 32 Dedicated to Carrollton, TX 75006 Baton Rouge, LA 70809 Quality Phone 972-242-2754 Phone 225-751-5632 Fax 972-242-2798 Fax 225-751-5634
Polarized Light Asbestiform Materials Characterization
Customer Info : Attn: Customer Project: CA Labs Project #: Alpha Terra Engineering Inc CAL18075062AG 8626 Tesoro Dr, Suite 810 S180522-259, TxDOT El Paso San Antonio, TX 78217 DHO Warehouse Remodel Date: 8/2/2018 Turnaround Time: Samples Received: 7/30/18 10:00AM Phone # 210-325-3641 3 days Date Of Sampling: 7/26/2018 Fax # 210-654-3802 Purchase Order #: Sample # Com Layer Analysts Physical Description of Homo- Asbestos type / Non-asbestos fiber Non-fibrous type ment # Subsample geneo calibrated visual type / percent / percent us estimate percent (Y/N)
26-2 tan mastic y None Detected 100% gy,bi
Off-White 12x12 Floor Tile 259-027 27-1 and Mastic/ tan floor tile y None Detected 100% qu,ca
27-2 tan mastic y None Detected 100% gy,bi Sheet Vinyl Roofing Membrane/ black and white 259-028 28-1 sealant n None Detected 5% sy 95% qu,gy,bi
Roofing Caulk Perimeter of 259-029 29-1 Roof/ gray sealant y None Detected 100% qu,gy,bi
Exterior Stucco/ white 259-030 30-1 surfaced white finishing plaster n None Detected 100% qu,bi,ca
30-2 gray plaster y None Detected 100% qu,ca Dallas NVLAP Lab Code 200349-0 TEM/PLM TCEQ# T104704513-15-3 TDH 30-0235 AIHA LAP, LLC Laboratory #102929 Analysis Method: Interim (40CFR Part 763 Appendix E to Subpart E) / Improved (EPA-600 / R-93/116). All samples received in good condition unless noted. Preparation Method: HCL acid washing for carbonate based samples, chemical reduction for organically bound components, oil immersion for identification of asbestos types by dispersion attaining / becke line method. ca - carbonate mi - mica fg - fiberglass ce - cellulose gy - gypsum ve - vermiculite mw - mineral wool br - brucite bi - binder ot -other wo - wollastonite ka - kaolin (clay) or - organic pe - perlite ta - talc pa - palygorskite (clay) Approved Signatories: ma - matrix qu - quartz sy - synthetic
______Julio Robles Technical Manager Senior Analyst Analyst Tanner Rasmussen Julio Robles 1. Fire Damage significant fiber damage - reported percentages reflect unaltered fibers 6. Anthophyllite in association with Fibrous Talc 2. Fire Damage no significant fiber damages effecting fibrous percentages 7. Contamination suspected from other building materials 3. Actinolite in association with Vermiculite 8. Favorable scenario for water separation on vermiculite for possible analysis by another method 4. Layer not analyzed - attached to previous positive layer and contamination is suspected 9. < 1% Result point counted positive 5. Not enough sample to analyze 10. TEM analysis suggested
/data/wordandspreadsheets/templates/asbestos/PLMReport.xls (Revision 3 3/7/17) Page 8 of 8
APPENDIX B DRAWINGS
Company: Facility: Project # El Paso District Headquarters 38-7IDP8071 WA#4
DHQ WAREHOUSE BUILDING EAST WING PROJECT AREA BUILDING NUMBER 248015
Garage Area 030
029 015 025 003 026 027 008 028 020 017 024 012 West 001 Wing 021 009 002 007 016 018 019 023 022 011 Remodel Area 013 014
004 005 006 010
000 = Negative For Asbestos 000 = Positive For Asbestos 000 = Roofing Samples
Alpha Terra Engineering, Inc.
Design: AJ Sheet: 1 Asbestos Inspection Sample Locations Dwg: AJ Scale Dwg#: A Ck: RM NTS Date: 08-03-18 Appr: RM Facility Layout Diagram
APPENDIX C PHOTOS OF SAMPLES TAKEN
APPENDIX D STATE LICENCES
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work includes, but not limited to the following: 1. New cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. 2. Provide concrete repair work at existing areas to receive new work. 3. Refer to drawings for locations.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS: Comply with Section 01 33 00.
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems, curing compounds, sealers, and other as requested by Architect.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit, prior to installation, shop drawings of reinforcing steel, including bar cutting list, typical bar bend diagrams, construction of forms including jointing, reveals, location and pattern of form tie placement, and construction joint schedule with details. Show extent of concrete repair work on shop drawings.
C. Design Mixtures: Prior to placement of concrete, submit concrete mix designs proposed by the concrete supplier, for class of concrete, including recent test results substantiating the quality of concrete produced by each mix.
D. Reports: Weekly reports of all compression, slump, and air content tests from the testing laboratory.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes And Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are indicated or specified, and except as accepted or directed by Architect during unusual climatic conditions. 1. ACI 117 "Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 2. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings." 3. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 4. CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice."
B. Local Codes and Ordinances: Wherever provisions of the International Building Code or the local current ordinances are more stringent than the above specifications and standards, the local codes and ordinances shall govern.
C. Concrete Testing Service: Perform material evaluation tests and design of concrete mixes; refer to Section 01 40 10 for procedures. 1. Testing requirements are specified in FIELD SAMPLING AND TESTING paragraph.
Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REINFORCING MATERIALS:
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615(S1), Grade 60, deformed billet steel bars of grades indicated on drawings, free from loose rust, scale and other coatings that may reduce bond.
B. Supports For Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices necessary for properly spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement in place. 1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.
2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. Slag is not acceptable.
B. Normal Weight Concrete Aggregates: ASTM C 33, and as specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. 1. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural or manufactured sand, free from loam, clay, lumps, or other deleterious substances. 2. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, uncoated, processed, locally available aggregate, containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter; maximum size of 1-1/2" at foundations and 1" at slabs.
C. Water: ASTM C 94. Clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, organic materials, or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or reinforcing.
D. Admixtures: 1. Air Entrained Admixture: ASTM C 260.
E. Other Admixtures: Do not use other admixtures unless accepted by Architect; added chlorides will not be accepted.
F. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Connectors: Provide metal connectors required for placement in cast-in-place concrete, for the attachment of structural and non-structural members. 2. Vapor Barrier: Polyethylene film, minimum 0.010" thick; Visqueen, or approved equal. 3. Expansion Joint Filler: ASTM D 1751, non-extruding premoulded material, 1/2" thick, unless otherwise noted, composed of fiberboard impregnated with asphalt. 4. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd. when dry. 5. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171; polyethylene film or white burlap- polyethylene sheet. 6. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. a. Euclid "Kurez DR VOX", W. R. Meadows "1100", Laticrete International, Inc. L&M "L&M Cure R", or approved equal.
Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
7. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering. a. Euclid "Aqua Cure VOX", W. R. Meadows "Vocomp-20", Laticrete International, Inc. L & M "Dress & Seal WB", or approved equal. 8. Clear, Water-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing And Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. a. Euclid "Super Diamond Clear VOX", W. R. Meadows "Vocomp 30", Master Builders Solutions by BASF "MasterKure CC 250SB", Laticrete International, Inc. L&M "Lumiseal WB Plus", or approved equal. 9. Non-Shrink, Non-Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. Master Builders Solutions by BASF "Masterflow 713", Euclid "Euco NS Grout", or W. R. Meadows "Sealtight 588 Grout". 10. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. 11. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces. Provide material, type (non-load bearing or load bearing), grade, and class as required to suit project requirements. 12. Two-Component Concrete Patching System (Concrete Repair Areas): Lyons Manufacturing “Patchcrete”, or approved equal. Two component, modified liquid acrylic polymer No. 1003 and Powder No. 1005 Portland cement based mix with graded silica and chemical additives. a. Product Characteristics: 1) Working Time: 25 minutes approximately. 2) Color: Gray or White; as approved by Architect. 3) Initial Set: 4 hours. 4) Screedable Consistency (1 bag to 1 gallon): a) Compressive Strength 7 days at 4120 PSI b) (ASTM C 109, Air cured): 28 days at 5500 PSI c) Flexural Strength 7 days at 1260 PSI (ASTM C 348, Air Cured): 28 days at 1535 PSI d) Slant Shear Bond (ASTM C 1042, Air Cured): 28 days at 1250 PSI 5) Trowelable Consistency (1 bag to 0.8 gallon): a) Compressive Strength 7 days at 4550 PSI (ASTM C 109, Air cured): 28 days at 6000 PSI b) Flexural Strength 7 days at 1360 PSI (ASTM C 348, Air Cured): 28 days at 1720 PSI c) Slant Shear Bond (ASTM C 1042, Air Cured): 28 days at 1550 PSI 13. Aggregate for Deeper Fills: 3/8” pea gravel. 14. Primer: Patchcrete P-100 primer. 15. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide miscellaneous accessories as required to complete installation of concrete repair work. 16. Strength: 3000 psi, 28 day-compressive strength for slabs on grade repair.
Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.3 PROPORTIONING OF MIXES:
A. Proportion normal-weight strength, water-cement ratio, and air content as indicated on structural drawings.
B. Mix Designs: 1. Prepare design mixes for each type of concrete, in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. 2. Proportion design mixes by weight for class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.
C. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as approved by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and approved by Architect before using in work.
D. Provide test results from the concrete supplier for proposed design mix, to establish the following: 1. Gross weight and yield per cu. yd of trial mixtures. 2. Measured slump. 3. Measured air content. 4. Compressive strength developed at 7 days and 28 days, from not less than 3 test cylinders cast for each 7- and 28-day test, and for each design mix.
E. Submit written reports to Architect for design mixes at least 15 calendar days prior to the start of work.
2.4 ADMIXTURES: Use air-entrained admixture in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions at all concrete exposed to weather.
2.5 SLUMP LIMITS: 4" ±1".
2.6 BATCHING AND MIXING: Concrete may be ready-mixed or job-mixed at the Contractor's option, in accordance with the governing building code and with the referenced ACI 318. No hand mixing allowed.
A. Job-Site Mixing: 1. Mix materials for concrete in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer. For mixers of one cu. yd. or smaller capacity, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. For mixers of capacity larger than one cu. yd., increase minimum 1-1/2 minutes of mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 2. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in work, indicating project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water introduced.
Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Ready-Mix Concrete: 1. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified. 2. When air temperature is between 85°F and 90°F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90°F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
C. Addition Of Water At Job Site: Water shall not be added at the job site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION:
A. Following leveling and tamping of granular base for slabs-on grade, place vapor barrier in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.
B. Lap joints 6" and seal with manufacturer's recommended mastic or pressure-sensitive tape.
3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT:
A. Comply with the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. 1. Avoid cutting or puncturing vapor barriers during reinforcement placement and concreting operations.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, dirt, and other materials or coatings which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers as required.
D. Place reinforcement to obtain minimum coverages indicated, or if not indicated, in compliance with CRSI. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
3.3 JOINTS AND INSERTS:
A. Joints: Provide construction and expansion joints. Locate and install joints, which are not shown on the drawings, so as not to impair the strength and appearance of structure. Submit joint schedule and details to Architect.
B. Inserts: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, concrete. Properly locate embedded items in cooperation with other trades, and secure in position before concrete is poured. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto.
Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT:
A. Comply with ACI 304, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete", and as herein specified.
B. Pre-Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, clean and inspect formwork, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast-in. Notify other crafts in ample time to permit the installation of their work, and cooperate with them in setting such work, as required. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and vapor barriers with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.
C. Notify Architect 48 hours before placing any concrete.
D. Conveying: Convey concrete from the mixer to the place of final deposit by methods which will prevent the separation or loss of materials. Provide equipment for chuting, pumping, and pneumatically conveying concrete of proper size and design as to insure a practically continuous flow of concrete at the point of delivery and without segregation of the materials. Keep open troughs and chutes clean and free from coatings of hardened concrete. Do not allow concrete to drop freely more than 10 feet. All equipment and methods used for conveying are subject to the approval of Architect.
E. Depositing: Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on hardened concrete so as to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete near or in its final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing, and displacement of the reinforcement.
F. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. 1. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps and hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement.
G. Cold Weather Placing: Comply with the requirements of ACI 306 and as follows: 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage and reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, and low temperatures. 2. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40°F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50°F and not more than 80°F at point of placement. a. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. b. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted for mix designs.
Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
H. Hot Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with the requirements of ACI 305 and as follows: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Use of liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before concrete is placed. 3. When acceptable to Architect, and when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, use an approved water-reducing retarding admixture.
3.5 SLAB FINISHES: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
A. Float Finish: 1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. 2. Apply float finish to slab surfaces indicated to receive trowel finish and surfaces to be covered with membrane or sheet waterproofing.
B. Trowel Finish: 1. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering. 2. Apply to surfaces indicated, and to slab surfaces exposed-to-view or to received paint or other thin film finish coating system. 3. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface.
3.6 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION:
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot weather protection during curing.
B. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toopings, and other surfaces.
Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 7 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1 by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than even days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moist-Retaining Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12", and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture- retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding or floor covering used on project. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. After curing period has elapsed remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer, unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of flooring used on project. 4. Curing And Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floor and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.7 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS:
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete for the passage of work by other trades after their work is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete to blend with in-place construction. Provide all other miscellaneous concrete filling required to complete work.
3.8 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS (AT NEW WORK):
A. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar of the same type and class as the original concrete, immediately after removal of forms. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/2" diameter, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less than 1". Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface, before placing cement mortar in the same manner as adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to Architect. 1. Smooth, Exposed-To-View Surfaces: Blend cements so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color of surrounding concrete. Provide test areas at
Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 8 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 2. Concealed Formed Surfaces: Repair defects that adversely affect the durability of the concrete. If defects cannot be repaired remove and replace the concrete. 3. Other repair methods may be used, subject to acceptance by Architect.
3.9 CONCRETE REPAIRS (AT EXISTING SLABS TO RECEIVE NEW WORK):
A. Examine existing surfaces to receive concrete repair work. Notify Contractor when surfaces are not acceptable. Do not begin surface preparation or application until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
B. Shotblast, scarify, sandblast, acid etch existing surfaces to receive work as recommended by manufacturer for project conditions.
C. Ensure existing concrete surface is clean, dry, structurally sound, and free from dirt, dust, oil, grease, solvents, paint, wax, concrete curing compounds, sealing compounds, surface hardeners, bond breakers, adhesive residue, and other surface contaminants in compliance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
D. Protect areas not receiving concrete repair work.
E. Mixing Concrete Patching System: Mix concrete patching materials in compliance with manufacturer’s written instructions. DO NOT ADD WATER.
F. Mixing Grout: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Apply primer in areas to receive concrete repair work to ensure proper bond. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions.
H. Apply concrete repair work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at locations indicated on the drawings and as required by project conditions.
I. Underlayment Areas: Apply from featheredge to 2-1/2”. Screed material for low places or spread into place with squeegee.
J. When using for deeper fills, mix to stiffer consistency as recommended by manufacturer and apply a minimum of 3/8” thick.
K. For areas over 1/2” in depth use specified aggregate, comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and as indicated on shop drawings.
L. Allow concrete repair work to cure a minimum of 24 hours. For deeper fills, follow manufacturer’s recommendations for curing; do not allow heavy traffic on concrete repair work for a minimum of 4 days.
Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 9 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.10 FIELD SAMPLING AND TESTING:
A. The following samples and tests will be performed by an independent testing laboratory; refer to paragraph 1.3 C. and Section 01 40 10.
B. Samples: 1. Field samples shall be made and cured in accordance with ASTM C 31, for each concrete strength, at the rate of 4 test cylinders and one slump test for each 50 cubic yards of concrete from each day's pour. In accordance with ASTM C 173 Volumetric Method, or ASTM C 231 Pressure Method, make air content check for each set of test cylinders. Air content and slump shall be checked and recorded at both truck discharge and point of placement for pumped concrete from the first load each day. 2. Test cylinders as follows: One at 7 days, two at 28 days, and reserve the remaining for testing after a longer period as required by Architect, if the 28 day tests do not meet the required strength. 3. The taking of samples from small pours of 10 cubic yards or less may be omitted at the discretion of the Architect. 4. Additionally, test slump every 25 cu. yd., recording location for report. 5. When early form removal is requested, field cure cylinders tested at 7 or less days to determine sufficient strength.
C. Testing: 1. Where average strength of any group of 3 cylinders falls below the minimum compressive strength or if individual cylinder falls more than 500 psi below minimum compressive strength specified, the 2. Architect shall have the right to require that test specimens be cut from the structure. Specimens shall be selected by Architect from location in structure represented by test specimen or specimens which failed. 3. Specimens shall be secured, prepared, and tested in accordance with ASTM C 42, within a period of 60 days after placing concrete. 4. Concrete shall be considered to meet the strength requirement of this specification if it meets the strength requirements of paragraph 5.6.4 of ACI 318. 5. Should laboratory analysis indicate that the proper concrete mix has not been used by the Contractor, all such concrete poured using the improper mix shall be subject to rejection. 6. The cost of cutting specimens from the structure, patching the resulting holes, and making the laboratory analysis shall be borne by the Contractor. 7. The holes from which the cored samples are taken shall be packed solid with no slump concrete proportioned in accordance with the ACI 211 "Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions of No-Slump Concrete". The patching concrete shall have the same design strength as the specified concrete. 8. If any of the specimens cut from the structure fail to meet the requirements outlined in paragraph 5.6.4 of ACI 318, the Architect shall have the right to require any and all defective concrete to be replaced, and all costs resulting therefrom shall be borne by the Contractor.
D. Contractor Sampling: In addition to the slump tests specified above, the contractor shall keep a cone (mold) and rod apparatus on the job site for random testing of batches. When
Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 10 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
concrete does not meet the specified slump requirements, and when directed by the Architect, immediately perform a slump test in accordance with ASTM C 143. Concrete not meeting the slump requirements shall be removed from the job site.
3.11 PROTECTION:
A. No wheeling, working, or walking on finished surfaces will be allowed for 16 hours after the concrete is placed.
B. Provide plywood or other acceptable protective cover at all traffic areas throughout the job.
C. Protect exposed concrete floors and steps, and walks from materials or equipment which may mar or damage these surfaces.
3.12 CLEAN-UP: Do not allow debris to accumulate. Clean up all concrete and cement materials, equipment and debris upon completion of any portion of the concrete work, and upon completion of entire cast-in-place concrete work.
END OF SECTION
Miscellaneous Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 11 This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Masonry-joint reinforcement. 4. Ties and anchors. 5. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS: Comply with Section 01 33 00.
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315. 3. Retain "Fabricated Flashing" Subparagraph below for flashing material that is specially fabricated for corners, end dams, etc. 4. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Non-color mortar.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates. 1. Submittal is for information only. Receipt of list does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.
B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
Unit Masonry 04 20 00 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units. a. Include data on material properties. b. For masonry units, include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units. 2. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type. 3. Mortar admixtures. 4. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 6. Reinforcing bars. 7. Joint reinforcement.
D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91M for air content. 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.
E. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
F. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.
D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.
Unit Masonry 04 20 00 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover and protect walls from damage.
B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.
C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.
D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.
B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days. 1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. 2. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314.
2.3 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL
A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.
Unit Masonry 04 20 00 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work.
C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated. 1. Where fire-resistance-rated construction is indicated, units shall be listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.4 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
B. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2800 psi. 2. Density Classification: Normal weight, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 4. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's sample. 5. Faces to Receive Plaster: Where units are indicated to receive a direct application of plaster, provide textured-face units made with gap-graded aggregates.
2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold- weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. 1. Alkali content shall not be more than 0.1 percent when tested according to ASTM C 114.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.
D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.
F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
G. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
Unit Masonry 04 20 00 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.
H. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
I. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: ASTM C 395, epoxy-resin-based material formulated for use as pointing mortar for glazed or pre-faced masonry units (and approved for such use by manufacturer of units); in color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's colors.
J. Refractory Mortar Mix: Ground fireclay or nonwater-soluble, calcium aluminate, medium-duty refractory mortar that passes ASTM C 199 test; or an equivalent product acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
K. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.
L. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent from same manufacturer.
M. Water: Potable.
2.6 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.
B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.
C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. Interior Walls: Mill galvanized carbon steel. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 4. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 5. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet with prefabricated corner and tee units.
D. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Turss type with single pair of side rods.
2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches into veneer but with at least a 5/8-inch cover on outside face.
Unit Masonry 04 20 00 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, with ASTM A 641, Class 1 coating. 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating. 3. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580, Type 316. 4. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel, G60 zinc coating. 5. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153, Class B coating. 6. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240 or ASTM A 666, Type 316. 7. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. 8. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304. 9. TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5 requires that corrugated-metal veneer ties be at least 0.030 inch (0.8 mm) thick and requires closer spacing for veneer ties less than 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) thick.
C. Partition Top Anchors: 0.105-inch-thick metal plate with a 3/8-inch-diameter metal rod 6 inches long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from stainless steel.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene.
2.9 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use mortar cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.
Unit Masonry 04 20 00 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry.
1. For interior nonload-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.
D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi. 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143.
E. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: Mix epoxy pointing mortar to comply with mortar manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair mortar bond.
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening.
D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of
Unit Masonry 04 20 00 - 7 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
F. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.
G. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested according to ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.
B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2- inch maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum. 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet or 1/2-inch maximum. 7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.
C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. 2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.
Unit Masonry 04 20 00 - 8 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. 5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.
3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.
D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
E. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.
F. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Wedge nonload-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position. 4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Section 078443 "Joint Firestopping."
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay CMUs as follows: 1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.
Unit Masonry 04 20 00 - 9 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. 5. Fully bed units and fill cells with mortar at anchors and ties as needed to fully embed anchors and ties in mortar.
B. Rake out mortar joints at to a uniform depth of 1/4 inch and point with epoxy mortar to comply with epoxy-mortar manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. 1. For glazed masonry units, use a nonmetallic jointer 3/4 inch or more in width.
D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at[ corners,] returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
F. Provide [concrete] [or] [masonry] lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick-size units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.
G. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
Unit Masonry 04 20 00 - 10 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Inspections: Special inspections according to Section 01 40 10. 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.
C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.
E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.
F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.
G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for compressive strength.
H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.
I. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 28 days.
3.8 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.
Unit Masonry 04 20 00 - 11 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A. 6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.9 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.
C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
Unit Masonry 04 20 00 - 12 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. Metal fabrications and miscellaneous metal work, complete, including: 1. Overhead metal canopies. 2. Steel supports for work of other trades. 3. Miscellaneous steel attachments, anchors, plates, angles, etc. 4. Anchors, angles, bolts, expansion shields for items in this section and other accessories shown in details and or required for the complete installation of all work.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS:
A. Sheet Metal Flashings and Trim; Section 07 62 00.
B. Painting; Section 09 90 00.
1.3 SUBMITTALS: Comply with 01 33 00.
A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each product used in miscellaneous metal items and fabrications, including paint products and grout. 2. Shop Drawings: Miscellaneous metal items and fabrication and erection of all assemblies of metal fabrications and miscellaneous metal work. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of items and fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other sections.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Field Measurements: 1. Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work. 2. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabrication of products without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.
Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.5 COORDINATION:
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. 1. Steel Plates, Shapes, Bars: ASTM A 36.
2.2 FASTENERS:
A. Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade and class required. 1. Bolts And Nuts: a. Steel: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A with hex nuts; High strength bolts; ASTM A 325, Type 3 with hex nuts; and, where indicated with flat washers. Hot-dip galvanize all items in accordance with ASTM A 153. b. Stainless Steel: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless steel bolts, ASTM F 593, with hex nuts; and where indicated, with flat washers. 2. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and where indicated flat washers. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where items being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. Provide necessary shop details and diagrams for concrete forms and, if required, provide templates to insure proper and accurate locations and setting of anchor bolts. 3. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489. 4. Machine Screws: ASME B18.18.6.3. 5. Lag Screws: ASME B1818.2.1. 6. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASMEB18.18.6.1. 7. Plain Washers: Round, ASMEB18.22.1. 8. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.
Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.3 OVERHEAD METAL CANOPIES: Refer to drawings for locations.
A. Steel Components: 1. Corrugated Roof Panel: Basis of Design is Atas International, Inc. or approved equal. a. Material: 24 gage prefinished aluminum. b. Panel Width: 37-1/2”. c. Length: As required. d. Height: 7/8”. e. Texture: Smooth. 1) Finish: As selected by TxDOT/Architect from manufacturer’s standard color palette. 2. Steel Tube, Angles, and Columns: Types as indicated; refer to drawings. 3. Continuous flashing, counterflashing, surface mounted reglets, brackets, straps, closures, reinforcement; Corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding; types as indicated and required for project conditions; refer to drawings and Section 07 62 00.
B. Fasteners and Accessories: Corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, and nonbleeding fasteners and accessories; compatible with adjacent materials.
C. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 requirements.
D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A, galvanized steel.
2.4 WELDING RODS AND ELECTRODES:
A. Select in accordance with AWS specifications for metal alloy to be welded.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS:
A. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated angles, bolts, plates, z-clips, anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel shapes as required for framing and supporting work and for anchoring or securing work to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in Section 06 10 00.
2.6 PAINT:
A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79, and compatible with topcoat.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel work, complying with SSPC- Paint 20, and compatible with topcoat.
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 11887.
Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.7 GALVANIZING:
A. Apply zinc coating by hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123. Fill vent holes and grind smooth after galvanizing. 1. Apply to exposed miscellaneous metal at exterior and as indicated on drawings.
2.8 NON-SHRINK NONMETALLIC GROUT:
A. Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacture for interior and exterior applications. Master Builders Solutions by BASF "Masterflow 713", Euclid "Euco N.S. Grout", or W. R. Meadows "Sealtight 588 Grout".
2.9 FABRICATION, GENERAL:
A. Workmanship: Use materials of size and thickness shown or, if not shown, of required size and thickness to produce strength and durability in finished product. Work to dimensions shown or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials shown or specified for various components of work.
B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32" unless otherwise shown. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
C. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS recommendations. At exposed connections, grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces.
D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type shown or, if not shown, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use. Cut reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware and similar items.
E. Shop Painting: 1. Shop paint miscellaneous metal work, except concealed metal work, members or portion of members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces and edges to be field welded, anodized aluminum, and galvanized surfaces, unless otherwise specified. 2. Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before applying shop coat. Clean off heavy rust and loose mill scale in accordance with SSPC SP-2 or SSPC SP-3. 3. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-1. 4. Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and at rate to provide uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils for each coat. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.10 STEEL SUPPORTS:
A. Provide structural steel channels, braces, angles, etc., as indicated and assemble as detailed. Secure all connections to provide rigid supports for all items required including supports not specifically specified in other sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION:
A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to site.
B. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations; protect sleeves from water and concrete entry.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. Fastening To In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required.
B. Cutting, Fitting, Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; measured from established lines and levels.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.
D. Setting Loose Plates: 1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom of surface of bearing plates. 2. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.3 OVERHEAD METAL CANOPIES:
A. Install components in strict accordance with approved final shop drawings. Use proper fasteners and hardware for material attachments as specified.
B. Use methods of attachment to structure allowing sufficient adjustment to accommodate tolerances.
C. Remove all protective coverings on panels immediately after installation.
3.4 TOUCH-UP SHOP PAINTING:
A. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. Use galvanizing repair paint on damaged galvanized surfaces.
END OF SECTION
Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY: Rough and finish carpentry work, and installation of items specified in other sections which are normally installed by the carpenters. In general, this work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
A. Concealed framing, furring, etc.
B. Interior plywood wall sheathing.
C. Braces, stripping, backing, blocking, cants, grounds, equipment curbs, and nailers indicated or necessary to install roofing and to receive or back work of other trades.
1.2 SUBMITTALS: Comply with Section 01 33 00.
A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application detail. a. Include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to project site.
B. Informational Submittals: 1. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by ALSC Board of Review. 2. Reports: Submit research/evaluation reports for engineered wood products.
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS:
A. Painting; Section 09 90 00.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Grading Marks: Factory-mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency identification; and submit mill certificate that material has been inspected and graded in accordance with requirements if it cannot be marked on a concealed surface.
B. Wood Preservative Treatment: Label each piece of pressure treated lumber with the Quality Control mark of the American Wood Preservers Bureau showing compliance with the appropriate standard.
C. Fire Retardant Treatment: Label each piece of lumber and plywood with Quality Control mark of the American Wood Preservers Bureau showing compliance with the appropriate standard.
Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials under cover and dry during delivery, storage, and handling. Store lumber in stacks for air circulation within stacks. Protect bottom of stacks against contact with damp surface. Protect exposed materials against weather. Do not store dressed or treated materials outdoors.
1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING: Keep carpentry materials dry during delivery, storage and handling. Store lumber in stacks for air circulation within stacks. Protect bottom of stacks against contact with damp surface. Protect exposed materials against weather. Do not store dressed or treated lumber or plywood outdoors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOFTWOOD: Comply with the standards of SPIB “Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber”; KD, S4S.
A. Note: Refer to roof plan drawings and details.
2.2 SOFTWOOD PLYWOOD: Comply with PS-1, Exposure 1 (exterior glue), Group 1, Southern Pine.
A. Wall Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing, Structural I, C-C or C-D Grade; 3/4” thick.
2.3 ROUGH HARDWARE: Nails, metal connectors, bolts, nuts, screws, washers, staples, and other fasteners (except as specified or noted otherwise); hot-dip galvanized steel, except stainless steel at treated lumber and plywood.
2.4 WOOD PRESERVATIVE TREATMENTS:
A. Pressure treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives comply with AWPA C2 lumber and AWPA C9 plywood. After treatment, kiln-dry lumber to maximum moisture content, of 19 percent. Treat indicated items and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry and concrete. 3. Wood framing members less than 18" above grade. 4. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.
B. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment and to comply with AWPA M4.
2.5 FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS:
A. Treat all lumber and plywood with fire retardant treatment process to comply with AWPA C20 and C27, respectively, for treatment type indicated.
Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1. Interior Type A: Hickson Corp. "Dricon", Hoover Treated Wood Products "Pyro- Guard", or Osmose "Flameproof LHC-HTT".
B. Dry fire retardant wood to moisture content of 19% or less for lumber and 15% or less for plywood before use.
C. Identify "fire retardant treated wood" with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
A. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B. Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted.
C. Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated or specified. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required.
D. Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated or specified. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required.
E. Anchor carpentry work to anchorage devices or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, strips, backing, and blocking, of thickness and shape required to secure work and equipment in place, as indicated on the drawings or required by conditions. Fasten wood grounds, furring and other engaging woodwork to various types of walls with approved types and sizes of nails, ties, and inserts, spaced to provide rigid secure supports.
3.2 WALL SHEATHING: 3/4” thick plywood; install with face grain across supports; locate and stagger joints over supports. Fasten 6” o.c. at panel ends and 12” o.c. at intermediate supports with fasteners. Refer to drawings.
3.3 ROUGH CARPENTRY: Provide wood grounds, strips, bucks, plates, backing, and blocking, of thickness and shape required to secure work and equipment in place, as indicated on drawings or required by conditions. Fasten with approve types and sizes of nails, ties, and inserts, spaced to provide rigid secure supports.
Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.4 ROUGH HARDWARE: Provide rough hardware necessary or required for installation of work specified. Use sufficient size and number of spikes, nails, screws, bolts, etc., to insure rigidity, security, and permanence.
3.5 CLEAN-UP: Remove from the premises all rubbish, debris, and unused materials which may be accumulated during the progress of the work.
END OF SECTION
Rough Carpentry 06 10 00 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY: Building insulation, complete.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS:
A. Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing; Section 07 54 23 for roofing insulation.
B. Tubular Skylights; Section 08 62 00.
1.3 SUBMITTALS: Comply with Section 01 33 00.
A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions for each type of insulation. Include data substantiating that materials comply with physical and thermal properties, and other requirements of specified insulation. 2. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions for specified insulation adhesive. Include test reports demonstrating compliance with specified design and performance criteria.
1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING: Do not allow insulation materials to become wet or soiled. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for handling, storage, and protection during installation.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS: Do not proceed with the installation of insulation until the work which follows (and which conceals the insulation) is scheduled to follow immediately.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Concealed insulation shall have flamespread rating of not more than 75 and smoke developed rating not more than 450.
B. Exposed insulation shall have flamespread rating of not more than 25 and smoke developed rating not more than 450.
C. Foam Insulation: Edge or face of each piece of insulation shall bear label of an approved agency. Label shall contain manufacturer's or distributor's identification, model number, serial number of definitive information describing the products or materials performance characteristics and approved agency's identification.
Thermal Insulation 07 21 00 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.7 COORDINATION: Coordinate work with work of other trades.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BATT INSULATION: 6” (R=19), and as indicated, unfaced fiberglass batts; OCF, Manville, or Certainteed; or approved equal.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: Provide adhesive for bonding insulation, mechanical anchors and fasteners, poultry netting, retainer strips, tape, and other items indicated or required by project conditions as recommended by insulation manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Extend insulation full thickness over entire surface to be insulated.
B. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and completely fill voids with insulation.
C. Tape joint where required by project conditions.
END OF SECTION
Thermal Insulation 07 21 00 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 07 21 30 SPRAYED FOAM INSULATION – CLOSED CELL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY: Closed cell spray foam insulation with intumescent coating, complete.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS:
A. Insulation; Section 07 21 00 for building insulation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS: Comply with Section 01 33 00.
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Qualification Data: For installer.
C. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
D. Evaluation Reports: For sprayed applied foam insulation, from ICC-ES.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver materials to site in original sealed wrapping bearing manufacturer name and brand designation, type, grade, R-Value, and class.
B. Store and handle to protect from damage in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: Two-Component Closed Cell Sprayed Foam insulation system with intumescent coating complying with ICC-ES Evaluation Report ESR-2072; or approved equal.
A. “Bayseal” manufactured by Bayer Material Science LLC, 100 Bayer Road, Pittsburgh, PA 15205-9741, 1-800-662-2927, www.spf.bayermaterialscience.com
B. “TPR Fireshell BMS-TC Intumescent Coating” manufactured by TPR Corporation. TPR2 Corp. (Thermal Product Research), 161 Interstate Ln., Waterbury, CT 06705, 203-756- TPR2, www.tpr2.com
Foamed-In-Place Insulation 07 21 30 - 1
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.2 CLOSED CELL SPRAYED FOAM INSULATION:
A. Bayseal closed-cell (CC) spray-applied polyurethane foam insulation is a two component, HFC-245fa blown, medium density, insulation application system.
B. The Bayseal CC foam-forming system aromatic diisocyanate, and a blended component which included polyols, fire retarding materials, and additives. 1. Apply to achieve thermal resistance R-Value of as indicated on drawings. 2. Products must be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ICC-ES Evaluation Report ESR-2072.
C. Physical Properties Properties Test Method Value 1. Fungi Resistance: ASTM G 21 Zero Rating 2. R Value (aged): ASTM C518 6.9 at 1 inch 24 at 3.5 inches 38 at 5.5 inches 54 at 7.9 inchesa 3. Compressive Strength: ASTM D 1621 25 psi (nominal) 4. Core Density: ASTM D 1622 2.0 lbs./ft3 (nominal) 5. Closed Cell Content: ASTM D 6226 > 90% 6. Tensile Strength: ASTM D 2126 60 psi (nominal) 7. Moisture Vapor Transmission (Permeance): ASTM E 96/E 96 0.80 Perms at 1” 0.23 Perms at 3.5” 0.14 Perms at 5.5” 0.10 Perms at 7.9” 8. Water Absorption ASTM D 2842 < 2% 9. Dimensional Stability: ASTM D 2126 < 10% 158ºF & 97% R.H.) % Change in Volume 10. Air Leakage Rate: ASTM E 2178 < 0.02 L s-1 m-1 11. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84 Flame Spread Index < 25 4-inches Smoke Developed Index < 450
2.3 VAPOR PERMANENCE INTEGRAL WITH SPRAY FOAM:
A. Vapor retarder integral with spray foam, Class II vapor retarder per ESR-1655.
2.4 INTUMESCENT COATING:
A. Intumescent Coating required in areas not separated from the interior of the building by an approved thermal barrier or 1/2-inch thick gypsum wall board.
B. TPR Fireshell BMS-TC Intumescent Coating, one-component, water based polymer coating. Intumescent coating shall cover insulation with 12 dry mils at a minimum rate of 1.24 gallons per 100 square feet.
Foamed-In-Place Insulation 07 21 30 - 2
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION:
A. Verify that substrates are clean, dry, and free of substances that are harmful to insulation.
B. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. Verify that all substrates are ready to receive closed cell sprayed foam insulation. Verify substrates are dry and free of foreign materials that will impede application.
C. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation, in compliance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
D. Mask and protect adjacent surfaces from overspray or dusting.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications.
B. Spray insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated and fill voids.
C. Apply in multiple passes to not exceed maximum thicknesses recommended by manufacturer. Do not spray into rising foam. 1. Framed Construction: Install into cavities formed by framing members to achieve thickness indicated on Drawings. 2. Cavity Walls: Install into cavities to thickness indicated on Drawings. 3. Miscellaneous Voids: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 PROTECTION:
A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes.
END OF SECTION
Foamed-In-Place Insulation 07 21 30 - 3
This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083 SECTION 07 54 23 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. Provide new TPO roofing at areas indicated to receive new work, work includes, but not limited to the following: 1. Tear off of existing roofing membrane down to existing insulation substrate; removal off site. 2. Preparation of existing insulation substrate to receive new work. 3. New mechanically fastened thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) membrane sheet roofing system, complete, including roof insulation, cover board, roofing membrane sheet, adhesives, membrane flashing system, pipe flashing boots, roof vents, and other roofing accessories as indicated for new roofing system. 4. New sheet metal flashing and counterflashing. Protect existing sheet metal flashing indicated to remain.
B. Protection of building and building interiors during tear off, substrate preparation and until new roofing is installed. 1. Roofing contractor shall survey building with Architect and Owner’s Representative and record signs of roof leakage or ceiling damage. 2. Contractor shall keep roof watertight during course of work and promptly repair any damage to existing roof.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS:
A. Carpentry; Section 06 10 00.
B. Sheet metal counterflashing requirements and other sheet metal work; Section 07 62 00.
C. Tubular Skylights; Section 08 62 00.
1.3 SUBMITTALS: Comply with Section 01 33 00.
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, materials list, installation instructions, and recommendations for each type of roofing product required.
B. Certification: 1. Submit data substantiating that materials comply with requirements. 2. Submit letter from manufacturer agreeing to provide a manufacturer's warranty on installer's work in agreement with project specifications and drawings.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing roof configurations, membrane sheet and insulation layout, details at perimeter and penetrations, locations of fasteners, and special conditions.
D. Warranty: Submit executed copy.
Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing 07 54 23 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. U.L. RATING: Provide materials and roofing systems which have been tested, listed, and labeled by U.L. for Class A Rating.
B. Roofing Contractors: Use only experienced roofing applicators approved or licensed by the roofing manufacturer prior to bidding of project.
C. Materials: Materials shall be supplied by one manufacturer unless otherwise specified or approved by manufacturer furnishing warranty.
D. Use an approved installer, using approved materials from the manufacturer to seal and secure the new light tubes per the manufacturer’s standard installation method. Provide manufacturer’s standard installation method for review and approval before installation.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver roofing materials, insulation and accessories in manufacturer's protective containers with labels intact and legible and comply with manufacturer's instructions for storage and handling.
B. Handle rolled goods to prevent damage.
C. Store materials on clean, raised platforms with weather-protective covering.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Weather: Proceed with roofing work when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements.
B. Substrate: Do not begin roofing installation until substrates have been examined and are determined to be in satisfactory condition.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE:
A. Prior to installation of roofing and associated work, and after submission and receipt of approved materials submittal, coordinate and schedule a pre-installation conference. Meet at project site, or other mutually agreed location, with installer, installer's representative, roofing manufacturer, and other entities concerned with roofing performance, Owner's representative and Owner. Record discussions and agreements and furnish copy to each participant. Provide 72 hours notice to participants prior to convening pre-installation conference.
Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing 07 54 23 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083 1.8 WARRANTY: Manufacturer's standard 20-year warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOFING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: Provide new TPO roofing at areas indicated to receive new work, work includes, but not limited to the following:
A. Tear off of existing roofing membrane (within minimal work area to perform work) down to existing insulation substrate; removal off site.
B. Preparation of existing insulation substrate to receive new work. 1. New mechanically fastened thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) membrane sheet roofing system, complete, including roof insulation, cover board, roofing membrane sheet, adhesives, membrane flashing system, pipe flashing boots, roof vents, and other roofing accessories as indicated for new roofing system. 2. New sheet metal flashing and counterflashing. Protect existing sheet metal flashing indicated to remain.
C. Protection of building and building interiors during tear off, substrate preparation and until new roofing is installed. 1. Roofing contractor shall survey building with Architect and Owner’s Representative and record signs of roof leakage or ceiling damage. 2. Contractor shall keep roof watertight during course of work and promptly repair any damage to existing roof.
2.2 MATERIALS:
A. TPO Sheet Membrane: mils thickness to match existing.
B. Rigid Insulation: Closed cell polyisocyanurate foam core with facer sheets, (total thickness 2-1/2"); GenFlex ISO, Atlas ACFoam II, Rmax, or approved equal.
C. Cover Board: 1/2" X 4' X 8' perlite insulation board.
D. Auxiliary Materials: Provide materials indicated, specified, and required by project conditions for complete installation. 1. Adhesives: Type recommended by membrane manufacturer for membrane flashing substrate and project conditions. 2. Sheet Seaming System: Manufacturer's standard automatic and hand held heat welders for sealing lapped joints, including rollers to seam spliced edges. 3. Membrane Flashing: Manufacturer's standard system for conditions indicated. 4. Mechanical Barbed Seamed Plates and Fasteners: As appropriate to substrate and as recommended by manufacturer of membrane material. 5. Pipe Boots: Manufacturer's standard pre-molded, black, sizes to fit penetrations. 6. Flashing Accessories: Types recommended by manufacturer of membrane material, provided at locations indicated, and at locations recommended by manufacturer, and including neoprene backer rods, adhesive tapes, flashing cements, and sealants. 7. Metal Counterflashing: Specified in Section 07 62 00.
Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing 07 54 23 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083 8. Wood Blocking and Nailers: Preservative treated wood as specified in Section 06 10 00; sizes and profiles as indicated. 9. Roof Vents: Manufacturer’s standard; as indicated, and as required by project conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION: Examine new and existing substrates to receive roofing system. Verify proper placement of openings, pipes, curbs, sleeves, vents and drains. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning of installation means acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
3.2 REMOVAL OF EXISTING ROOFING AND FLASHING:
A. Remove existing roofing membrane down to existing insulation substrates indicated to remain; refer to drawings.
B. Protect existing sheetmetal flashing and trim indicated to remain.
3.3 DECK PREPARATION:
A. Clean deck of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to roofing system work.
B. Install flashings and accessory items as indicated, and as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
3.4 BATTEN STRIPS, NAILERS, BLOCKING:
A. Install batten strips at base of roof projections, penetrations and non-roof edge perimeters.
B. Install treated wood nailers at roof perimeters, at base of roof projections and around roof penetrations. 1. Total nailer height shall match total thickness of insulation being used. Install with 1/8" gap between each length and at changes in direction. 2. Firmly fasten nailer to deck so as to resist a force of 200 lbs. per linear foot in any direction. 3. Taper nailer where applicable to be flush at point of contact with membrane in either vertical or horizontal applications.
3.5 INSULATION INSTALLATION: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and details.
A. General: 1. Extend new insulation over entire new and existing roofing substrates to be insulated, cutting and fitting tightly around obstructions. 2. Do not install more insulation each day than can be covered with new membrane before end of day and before start of inclement weather.
B. Adhere cover board and insulation to new and existing substrates in accordance with system manufacturer's written instructions.
Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing 07 54 23 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083 3.6 MEMBRANE AND FLASHING INSTALLATION:
A. Membrane Installation: 1. Cut sheets to maximum size possible, in order to minimize seams and to accommodate contours of roof deck and proper drainage across singled laps of sheets. 2. Install field membrane sheets over substrate in its final position, allow membrane to relax minimum 30 minutes before attachment. 3. Start at low point of roof using up to 4 sheets half the width of the field membrane panel. 4. Attach inside edge of half membrane sheet with barbed seamed plates and fasteners. 5. Heat weld first field sheet to perimeter half membrane sheet and fasten along opposite edge. 6. Continue across roof, where slope change direction, begin working at lower edge of adjoining side of the roof up the slope until reaching completed work. Install half membrane sheet over ridge line and weld to the two membrane panels. 7. Roll out first field membrane panel and position the membrane panel along the laying line of the attached perimeter membrane panel. Heat weld lap. 8. Layout barbed seam plates along edge of field membrane panel. Fasten to penetrate membrane a minimum of 2" from membrane panel edge. 9. Roll out and position subsequent field membrane sheets, overlapping sides of adjoining sheets 6" on top side of membrane and overlapping ends of adjoining sheets a minimum of 3". Heat weld to anchored membrane panel prior to fastening to substrate. 10. Orient cut edges of membrane panels to be bottom panels where splices occur. Seal exposed cut edges with sealant.
B. Membrane Welding: 1. Clean membrane, minimum 6" wide, where welding occurs. Re-clean membrane area if left exposed for more than 12 hours before starting of membrane welding. 2. Where possible, use automatic heat welder at all field splices on horizontal surfaces. Use hand held heat welders at vertical surfaces and where automatic heat welder can not be used. 3. Seams: Provide a minimum of 1-1/2" wide seam for automatic heat welders and a minimum of 2" wide seam for hand held welders. Use seam roller to ensure proper matting of surfaces. Inspect seams to verify integrity, repair as necessary, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Membrane Attachment: 1. Secure membrane at locations where membrane ends or goes through an angle change greater than 1" in 12". 2. Mechanically fasten to insulation with barbed seamed plates or mechanically fasten membrane-coated metal to wood nailer and heat weld membrane. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and final shop drawings.
D. Flashing: 1. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry.
Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing 07 54 23 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083 2. Roll membrane into adhesive to minimize wrinkles, and compress flashing to substrate. Use automatic heat welder to weld splice between membrane flashing and roof membrane.
E. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing sheet in place with clamping ring.
F. Coordinate work with sheet metal counterflashing and flashing work.
3.7 CLEAN-UP: After completion of work, remove excess materials and scrap from job and leave surfaces neat and clean.
END OF SECTION
Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing 07 54 23 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY: Flashing and sheet metal work, complete, except where indicated as work of other sections (requirements specified in this section).
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS:
A. Metal Fabrications; Section 05 50 00.
B. Wood blocking, nailers, cants; Section 06 10 00.
C. Metal flashing in conjunction with thermoplastic membrane roofing; Section 07 54 23, except requirements are specified in this section.
D. Sealants; Section 07 92 00.
1.3 SUBMITTALS: Comply with Section 01 33 00.
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions and general recommendations for each specified sheet material and fabricated product.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for showing materials, gages, layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorage details for each sheet metal item and fabricated product.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Provide materials and workmanship meeting requirements of Sheet Metal And Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Manual (SMACNA).
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS: Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of the work and protection of materials and finishes.
1.6 COORDINATION: Coordinate work with work of other trades to ensure proper sequencing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Sheet Metal: 1. Aluminum Sheets: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability of alloy and temper designed below: a. ASTM B 209, 3003-H14, minimum 0.050" thick. b. Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41 Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker, clear anodized.
Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim 07 62 00 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with materials being fastened.
C. Solder: ASTM B 32, 50% tin and 50% lead, used with rosin flux.
D. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
E. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated and with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet. 1. Material: Aluminum, 0.024 inch thick. 2. Surface Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge. 3. Accessories:
a. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing, or where drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing. b. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing's lower edge. c. Finish: As selected by TxDOT/Architect.
F. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant.
G. Bitumastic Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, cold applied solvent type bitumastic coating for application in dry film thickness of 15 mils per coat.
H. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part noncorrosive metal seam cementing compound, recommended by manufacturer for non-moving joints including riveted joints.
I. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet manufacturer for waterproof/weather- resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet.
J. Underlayments: 1. Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb. rosin-sized building paper. 2. Polyethylene Underlayment: 6 mil carbonated polyethylene film.
K. Sealants: As specified in Section 07 92 00.
L. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal clips, cleats, clamping rings, straps, anchoring devices and similar accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed, noncorrosive, size and gage required for performance.
Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim 07 62 00 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.2 FABRICATION:
A. Fabricate gutters, downspouts, flashing, trim, and other exposed sheet metal work indicated, of aluminum sheets.
B. Fabricate work to comply with "SMACNA" Architectural Sheet Metal Manual", metal manufacturer's recommendations, and recognized industry practices.
C. Fabricate for waterproof and weather-resistant performance; with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates.
D. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil-canning, buckling and tool marks, true to line and levels as indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
E. Seams: Unless otherwise indicated or specified: Form aluminum seams with epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for additional strength where required.
F. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used, or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1" deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints); unless otherwise indicated or specified.
G. Separate dissimilar metals from each other by painting each metal surface in area of contact with a heavy application of bitumastic coating, or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION: Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal work will be installed. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, SHEET METAL:
A. SMACNA Details: Except as otherwise indicated or specified, comply with applicable recommendations and details of "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" by SMACNA.
B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated or specified, comply with recommendations and instructions of manufacturer of sheet metal being installed.
C. Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints and seams which will be permanently watertight and weatherproof.
D. Underlayment: Where aluminum is to be installed directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of paper slip sheet and a course of polyethylene underlayment.
Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim 07 62 00 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
E. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required for waterproof performance.
F. Seal edges of metal flashings to substrates with roofing cement; install bed or bead of cement in manner which will maintain a watertight seal.
G. Secure edges of flashing to other work with angles and bars, and seal with sealant as indicated.
H. Overhead Metal Canopies: Refer to Section 05 50 00. Coordinate installation of sheet metal work flashing, counterflashing, surface mounted reglets with installation overhead metal canopies to provide complete installation.
3.3 CLEAN-UP: After completion of work, clean roofing cement, sealant and bituminous paint from flashing, floors, and all surfaces so defaced. Remove all excess materials and scraps from the job and leave all surfaces neat and clean.
END OF SECTION
Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim 07 62 00 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY: Firestopping and smokeseals, complete. Work includes the following:
A. Openings in fire-rated walls and floors, both empty and those accommodating penetrating items such as cables, conduits, pipes, and ducts.
B. Expansion joints in fire rated walls and floors.
C. Openings between floor slabs and exterior wall systems; perimeter fire-resistive joint systems consisting of floor-to-wall joints between perimeter edge of fire resistance rated floor assemblies and exterior aluminum framing system.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS:
A. Building substrate components; Division 03, 04, 08, 09.
B. Fire Suppression, Duct and piping penetrations, and cable and conduit penetrations; refer to drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS: Comply with Section 01 33 00.
A. Product Data: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria. Include manufacturer's preparation and installation instructions for each type of firestop required.
B. Certification: Submit certification that firestop products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Provide materials conforming to Flame (F) and Temperature (T) ratings as tested by nationally accepted testing agencies per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479 fire tests. The F and T rating must be a minimum of one hour but not less than the fire resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated. Conduct fire test with minimum positive pressure differential of 0.03"of water column.
B. Provide firestopping by contractor trained and approved by firestop manufacturer; use equipment approved by manufacturer.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Coordinate work with work of related trades to properly execute work and to maintain hourly rating of walls where firestopping and smokeseals are applied; sequence work to permit firestop materials to be installed after adjacent and surrounding work is complete.
Firestopping 07 84 00 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Maintain temperatures of substrate materials and ambient air temperatures as recommended by manufacturer; provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS: 3M Fire Protection Products is specified; equivalent materials of STI, Hilti, Tremco Firestopping, USG, RectorSeal Bio Fireshield and RectorSeal Metacaulk are acceptable; or approved equal.
2.2 MATERIALS:
A. General: 1. Provide materials that are asbestos free. 2. Provide materials with minimum F and T rating of one hour, but not less than fire resistance rating of assembly being penetrated, as tested per ASTM E 814. 3. Provide materials conforming to governing codes.
B. Firestop Acrylic Sealants: 1. FireDam 150+; Gun grade, one component acrylic latex elastomer, for metal pipe, cable penetrations and top of wall applications.
C. Firestop Silicone Sealants: 1. 3M 2000 Fire Barrier Silicone Sealant; Single component silicone, gun grade for walls and overhead applications. 2. 3M 2003 Fire Barrier Silicone Sealant; Self-leveling for floor applications.
D. Firestop Calk: 1. 3M Fire Barrier CP 25WB+; One-part, intumescent, latex elastomer for construction openings, blank openings, and penetrations.
E. Firestop Calk Spray: 1. 3M FireDam Spray; Flexible, sprayable, water-based coating for head-of-wall joints, floor joints, penetration seals, and perimeter joints.
F. Firestop Mortar: 1. 3M Fire Barrier Mortar; Single component, polypropylene fiber reinforced, lightweight cementitious mortar.
G. Firestop Sleeves: 1. 3M Ultra Plastic Pipe Device; One-piece metal collar assembly lined with intumescent wrap/strip material specified in this Section. 2. 3M Fire Barrier RC-1 Restricting Collar; 28 gage steel restricting collar with intumescent wrap/strip material specified in this Section. 3. Provide firestop sleeves in size required for project conditions.
H. Intumescent Wrap/Strip: 1. 3M Fire Barrier FS-195+ Wrap/Strip; 1/4" X 2" X 24", one-part, fire resistive elastomeric wrap/strip with aluminum foil on one side.
Firestopping 07 84 00 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
I. Firestop Pillows: 1. 3M Fire Barrier Pillows; Self contained, highly intumescent firestop pillow. 2. Provide firestop pillows sizes as required by project conditions.
J. Duct Wrap/Duct Wrap Collar: 1. 3M Fire Barrier Duct Wrap 15A and 20A; Fire-resistant wrap with inorganic blanket encapsulated with scrim reinforced foil. 2. 3M Fire Barrier Duct Wrap Collar 20A; Fire resistant wrap collar for wrapping butted seams in duct wrap. Thickness as required for project conditions.
K. Plenum Wrap: 1. 3M Fire Barrier Plenum Wrap 5A; Flexible non-combustible enclosure for cables and pipe in return air plenums. 1/2" X widths and lengths as required for project conditions.
L. Firestop Putty: 1. 3M Fire Barrier Moldable Putty+; Synthetic elastomer, one-part, intumescent fire resistive putty, non-drying, non-crumbling, re-enterable, hand moldable.
M. Composite Sheets: 1. 3M CS-195+ Composite Sheet; One-part composite system comprised of organic/inorganic, fire resistive elastomeric sheet bonded on one side to 28 gage galvanized steel sheet and the other side reinforced with hexagonal shape steel wire mesh and covered with aluminum foil. 2. Provide composite sheets in sizes required for project conditions.
N. Safing: U.S.G. Thermafiber, thicknesses as indicated or required by project conditions.
O. Accessories: 1. Dam Material: Mineral fiberboard, sheet metal, or other approved material. 2. Tapes, Fasteners, Welding Pins, Retainers, Banding, Clips: As recommended by firestop manufacturer. 3. Mineral fiber matting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION: Examine and verify that surface and condition of substrates have no defects or errors that would interfere with installation of firestopping materials. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION:
A. Clean surfaces and substrates of dirt, oil, loose material and other foreign materials which may affect proper bond and installation of firestops; comply with firestop manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Provide primers required for various substrates and conditions as recommended by firestop manufacturer.
Firestopping 07 84 00 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Mask to protect adjoining surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION:
A. Install and cure in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions; apply to provide rating of at least one hour but not less than fire resistance rating of assembly being penetrated.
B. Ensure that anchoring devices, back-up materials, clips, sleeves, supports and other materials used in actual fire test are installed.
C. Install firestops with sufficient pressure to properly fill and seal openings to ensure effective smokeseal.
D. Tool and trowel exposed surfaces.
E. Remove excess firestop material promptly as work progresses and upon completion.
F. Remove temporary dam material after initial cure of firestops.
3.4 CLEANING:
A. Where visible, clean adjacent surfaces of firestop materials.
B. Correct staining and discoloring on adjacent surfaces.
C. Remove debris and excess materials from site; leave work in neat and tidy conditions.
END OF SECTION
Firestopping 07 84 00 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY: Completely close with sealant all joints. Include joints around frames of doors, flooring joints, joints at penetrations of walls, and floors by piping and other services and equipment, joints between items of equipment and other construction, and other joints indicated or specified to be sealed.
1.2 SUBMITTALS: Comply with Section 01 33 00.
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, recommendations, and installation instructions for each type of sealant, calking compound and miscellaneous materials. Include letter of certification, or certified test laboratory reports indicating that each material complies with the requirements and is intended for the applications indicated.
B. Samples: Submit 12" long sample of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant exposed to view. Samples will be viewed for color only.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Obtain elastomeric materials only from manufacturer who will, if required, send a qualified technical representative to project site, for the purpose of advising the installer of proper procedures and precautions for the use of the material.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Examine joint surfaces, backing, and anchorage of units forming sealant rabbet. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Do not proceed with installations of sealants under adverse weather conditions, or when temperatures are above or below manufacturer's recommended limitations for installa- tion. Proceed with the work only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper cure and development of high early bond strength.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Provide in colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated with complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those for Type, Grade Class, and Uses.
A. Multi-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. BASF "NP 2", Pecora "Dynatrol II", Tremco "Vulken 227", or Bostik "Chem-Calk 500".
B. One-Component Pourable Urethane Sealant: Type S, Grade P, Class 25. BASF "SL-1", Pecora "NR-201 Urexpan", Tremco "Vulken 45", or Bostik "Chem-Calk 950".
C. Multi-Component Pourable Urethane Sealant: Type M, Grade P, Class 25. BASF "SL- 2", Tremco "THC 900", Pecora "NR-200 Urexpan", Tremco "Vulken 245", or Bostik "Chem-Calk 550".
D. Low Modulus Nonacid Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. Dow Corning; 790.
E. One-Component Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. Dow Corning "786" (VOC Content 39 g/L), Tremco "Proglaze White" , or Pecora "898 White" (VOC Content 1g/L).
2.3 ACRYLIC EMULSION SEALANT: ASTM C 834, one component, nonsag, acrylic, paintable, mildew-resistant. BASF "Sonolac", Tremco "Tremflex 834", Pecora Corp. "AC-20+"), or Bostik "Chem-Calk 600".
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
A. Joint Cleaner: Type of joint cleaning compound recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint surfaces to be cleaned.
B. Joint Primer/Sealer: Type recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the joint surfaces to be primed or sealed.
C. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer, to be applied to sealant-contact surfaces where bond to the substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self-adhesive tape wherever applicable.
D. Sealant Backer Rod: 1. Provide backing rod of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 2. ASTM C 1330, Type C closed cell material with surface skin, Type O open cell or Type B biocellular material with a surface skin, except use Type C at horizontal surfaces. Provide size and shape of rod which will control joint depth for sealant placement, break bond of sealant at bottom of joint, form optimum shape of sealant bead on back side, and provide a highly compressible backer to minimize the possibility of sealant extrusion when joint is compressed.
Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 JOINT TYPES AND USAGES:
A. Acrylic Emulsion Sealant: All interior joints except joints with metal, aluminum, tile, and wet work.
B. Urethane Sealants: 1. Exterior joints and interior joints with aluminum or metal, except Stucco joints, use nonsag urethane sealant. 2. Horizontal joints subject to pedestrian traffic, use minimum 35 Shore A hardness pourable urethane sealant.
C. Silicone Sealants: 1. 1. At contractor's option, low modulus silicone sealant may be used in lieu of urethane sealant. 2. 2. Use mildew resistant silicone sealant at wet work, tile, sinks, and plumbing fixtures.
3.2 JOINT SURFACE PREPARATION:
A. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture, and other substances that would interfere with bond of sealant.
B. For elastomeric sealants, do not proceed with installation of sealant over joint surfaces which have been painted, lacquered, waterproofed or treated with water repellent or other treatment or coating. Remove coating or treatment from joint surfaces before installing sealant.
C. Etch concrete joint surfaces to remove excess alkalinity. Etch with 5% solution of muriatic acid; neutralize with dilute ammonia solution, rinse thoroughly with water and allow to dry before sealant installation.
D. Roughen joint surfaces on vitreous coated and similar non-porous materials, wherever sealant manufacturer's data indicates lower bond strength than for porous surfaces. Rub with fine abrasive cloth or wool to produce a dull sheen.
3.3 INSTALLATION: Comply with sealant manufacturer's printed instructions, except where more stringent requirements are indicated or specified and except where manufacturer's technical representative directs otherwise.
A. Prime or seal the joint surfaces wherever shown or recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Do not allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces.
B. Install sealant backer rod for liquid elastomeric sealants, except where shown to be omitted or recommended to be omitted by sealant manufacturer for the application shown.
C. Install bond breaker tape wherever shown and wherever required by manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that elastomeric sealants will perform properly.
Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
D. Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of the joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and a vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt.
E. Install sealants to depths as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer but within the following general limitations, measured at the center (thin) section of the bead. 1. For sidewalks and similar joints sealed with elastomeric sealants and subject to traffic and other abrasion and indentation exposures, fill joints to a depth equal to 75% of joint width, but neither more than 5/8" deep nor less than 3/8" deep. 2. For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants, but not subject to traffic, fill joints to a depth equal to 50% of joint width, but neither more than 1/2" deep nor less than 1/4" deep. For joints sealed with non-elastomeric sealants, fill joints to a depth in the range of 75% to 125% of joint width.
F. Do not allow sealants to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces. Use masking tape or other precautionary devices to prevent staining of adjoining surfaces, by either the primer/sealer or the sealant.
G. Remove excess and spillage of sealants promptly as the work progresses. Clean the adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage, without damage to the adjoining surfaces of finishes.
3.4 CURE AND PROTECTION: Cure sealants in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength, and surface durability. Cure and protect sealants in a manner that will minimize increases in modulus of elasticity and other accelerated aging effects. Replace or restore sealants that are damaged or deteriorated during construction period.
END OF SECTION
Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Steel frames, hollow metal doors, and related items required to complete work.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS:
A. Wood doors; Section 08 14 16.
B. Finish painting; Section 09 90 00, and prime coat for galvannealed doors, if used.
1.3 SUBMITTALS: Comply with Section 01 33 00.
A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame, including door designation, type, level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Prior to fabrication of work, submit shop drawings indicating the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors including vertical and horizontal edge details. 3. Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles. 4. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorage, accessories, joints, and connections.
C. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on schedule in preparing schedule for doors and frames.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Provide doors and frames complying with applicable standards of ANSI A 250, including A250.8. A250.4, A 250.6, and A 250.10, A 115, and as specified.
B. Comply with requirements of SDI where specified.
C. Provide metal doors and frames manufactured by a single firm.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver, handle, and store metal doors and frames in a manner to prevent damage and deterioration.
Hollow Metal Doors And Frames 08 11 13 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Provide packaging such as cardboard or other containers, separators, banding, spreaders, and paper wrappings as required to completely protect metal doors and frames during transportation and storage.
C. Store doors upright, in a protected dry area, at least 1" off ground and with at least 1/4" air space between individual pieces. Protect primed and hardware surfaces as required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: A. Steelcraft; Division of Ingersoll-Rand. B. Republic Builders Product. C. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company. D. Curries Company. E. Fleming. F. Approved equal.
2.2 MATERIALS:
A. Sheet Steel: 1. Doors: 18 gage, ASTM A 366 cold rolled, stretcher leveled; free of scale, pitting or other surface defects. At exterior doors provide door face sheets with ASTM A 525 G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. a. Note: At Contractor's option Fleming exterior 18 gage galvannealed doors (Series D) and 14 gage galvannealed frames (Series F) may be used in lieu of galvanized doors and frames. 2. Frames: 16 gage (interior) and 14 gage (exterior) ASTM A 569 hot rolled, pickled and oiled, or cold rolled as specified above. At exterior openings provide frames with ASTM A 525 G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.
B. Core(s): 1. Resin-impregnated kraft fiber honeycomb with 1" nested, hexagonal-shaped cells. Bond core to inside of both face sheets. 2. At Exterior Insulated Doors: Foamed-in-place polyurethane or solid slab of polystyrene. Bond to inside face of both face sheets and in corners.
C. Primer: Manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive primer. Note: Rust inhibitive touch up only at galvannealed doors and frames.
D. Anchors, Fasteners, Accessories: Manufacturer's standard, hot dipped galvanized at exterior.
E. Channel Fillers: Flush steel for top channel of exterior doors.
Hollow Metal Doors And Frames 08 11 13 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.3 FABRICATION:
A. General: 1. Fabricate steel doors and frames rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp, or buckle. Provide clean cut, straight and true molded members, well- formed and aligned miters, dressed and ground smooth, and where applicable, concealed fasteners. Reinforce at corners as required to prevent sagging. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles. 2. Fit, assemble, and weld units at factory or shop. Provide welded frames with spreader bars. 3. Comply with requirements of ANSI A 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A 250.4 for physical-endurance level. 4. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames".
B. Flush Hollow Metal Doors: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, Model 2, Performance Level B. Seamless construction (no visible seam on face or vertical edge), of sizes, design as indicated. Insulated doors.
C. Frames: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, Model 2, Performance Level 3. Combination stop and frame channel section, rabbeted for doors, of type and styles indicated. 1. Anchors/Fasteners: Supply the proper fastenings and/or anchors to secure frames in each type of structural framing indicated. 2. Silencers/Mutes: Drill stops to receive a minimum of 3 silencers on strike jamb.
2.4 HARDWARE: Comply with requirements of ANSI A 250.6 and ANSI A 115 for door and frame preparation for hardware.
A. Preparation: Prepare hollow metal units to receive mortised and concealed finished hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing, drilling and tapping, in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. Reinforce hollow metal units to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface- applied hardware will be done on the job site.
B. Location of Hardware: Locate finish hardware as indicated in final shop drawings and/or in compliance with ANSI A 250.8.
2.5 GLAZING STOPS (BEADS), METAL FRAMED GLASS: Provide manufacturer's standard steel channel or tubular stops, predrilled for screws and factory finished as specified for frames. Glass and glazing is specified in Section 08 80 00.
2.6 FINISH: Dress tool marks and surface imperfections to smooth surfaces and remove irregularities. Chemically treat and clean doors and frames. Apply manufacturer's standard baked-on rust inhibitive primer complying with ANSI A 250.10 for performance and acceptance criteria.
Hollow Metal Doors And Frames 08 11 13 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified.
B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed and aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before construction of enclosing walls and ceilings.
C. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A 250.8. Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A115.1G.
D. Clearances: Provide clearances of not more than 1/8" at jambs and heads and not more than 3/4" from floor or 3/16" from thresholds.
3.2 PRIME COAT TOUCH-UP: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up with compatible air-drying primer.
END OF SECTION
Hollow Metal Doors And Frames 08 11 13 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. Factory pre-fitted, factory finished, interior, non-rated, solid core wood veneer faced door, complete.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS:
A. Steel frames; Section 08 11 13.
B. Painting; Section 09 90 00.
1.3 SUBMITTALS: Comply with Section 01 33 00.
A. Product Data: Submit door manufacturer's product data for each type of door, including details of core and edge construction, trim for openings, and factory-finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, requirements for veneer matching and factory finishing, and other pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts for locksets and other cutouts.
C. Samples:
1. For Initial Selection: Submit color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections for faces of factory-finished doors. Show full range of colors available. 2. For Verification: Corner section of door approximately 12" square with door faces and edges representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. Finish sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.
D. Warranty: Submit executed warranty.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Comply with the following quality standards:
A. Wood Door Manufacturer's Association (WDMA) I.S.1 "Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors".
Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards", including Section 9 "Architectural Flush Doors" for grade of door, core construction, finish and other requirements exceeding those of WDMA quality standard.
C. Manufacturer: Obtain doors from a single manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of NWWDA pamphlet "How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors", as with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Identify each door with numbers which correlate with designation system used on shop drawings for door, frames, and hardware, using temporary, removable or concealed markings.
1.6 WARRANTY: Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's standard form, signed by manu- facturer, installer, and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors which have warped (bow, cup or twist) or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced standards. Warranty shall be in effect for life- time of installation for solid core interior doors.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS: Do not deliver doors until wet work is complete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS: Eggers, Osh Kosh, VTI are acceptable, or approved equal.
2.2 INTERIOR WOOD DOORS:
A. Solid Core Doors For Transparent Finish: 1. Faces: Match existing, Grade A, bookmatched and running match, and paired matched (set). 2. Grade: Custom (Grade A veneers), minimum 1/50” thick; vertical edge of same species of face veneer. 3. Construction: a. Hot press PC-5 (5-ply, ANSI A 208.1 LD-2 particleboard core). b. Standard hollow-core. c. Refer to drawings for locations.
2.3 ACCESSORIES:
A. Moldings For Light Openings: Manufacturer's standard beveled solid stock wood molding, in species to match veneer.
Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.4 FABRICATION:
A. Factory-prefit and premachine doors to fit frame opening sizes indicated with the following uniform clearances and bevels. 1. Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI for prefitting. 2. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Comply with final hardware schedules and door frame shop drawings and with hardware templates. 3. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory premachining.
B. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kinds of doors required. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile specified. Glass and glazing requirements are specified in Section 08 80 00.
2.5 FACTORY FINISHING: Comply with referenced quality standard's requirements for factory finishing.
A. Finish wood doors at factory.
B. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements for grade, finish system, staining effect, and sheen. 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Finish: ANSI/WDMA I.S. TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: Color as selected by Architect. 4. Effect: Open grain finish. 5. Sheen: Satin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION: Examine doors and door frames prior to hanging to:
A. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, and location, and swing characteristics, and, frames have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads.
B. Verify that doors are free of defects that could cause their rejection.
3.2 INSTALLATION: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions referenced AWI standards, and as specified.
A. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging.
B. Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION:
A. Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely, as directed by Architect.
Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.
C. Take protective measures to assure that wood doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Storefront framing. 2. Manual-swing entrance doors.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS: Comply with Section 01 33 00.
A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. 2. Include full-size isometric details of each type of vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following: a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage. 3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers. 4. Include point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the following: a. Power requirements for each electrically operated door hardware. b. Location and types of switches, signal device, conduit sizes, and number and size of wires.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.
E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery, including concealed welds.
Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts 08 41 13 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage.
F. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.
G. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Preconstruction Laboratory Mockup Testing Submittals: 1. Testing Program: Developed specifically for Project. 2. Test Reports: Prepared by a qualified preconstruction testing agency for each mockup test. 3. Record Drawings: As-built drawings of preconstruction laboratory mockups showing changes made during preconstruction laboratory mockup testing.
B. Qualification Data: For Installer and laboratory mockup testing agency.
C. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-framed entrance and storefront.
D. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
E. Quality-Control Program: Developed specifically for Project, including fabrication and installation, according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401. Include periodic quality- control reports.
F. Source quality-control reports.
G. Field quality-control reports.
H. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to include in maintenance manuals.
Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts 08 41 13 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Maintenance Data for Structural Sealant: For structural-sealant-glazed storefront to include in maintenance manuals. Include ASTM C 1401 recommendations for post- installation-phase quality-control program.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Laboratory Mockup Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated and accredited by the International Accreditation Service or the International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complying with ISO/IEC 17025.
C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
D. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401 for design and installation of storefront systems.
1.7 MOCKUPS
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field Quality Control" Article. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and/or Installer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures, including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts 08 41 13 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS: Kawneer, U.S. Aluminum, EFCO, or approved equal.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system, including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts.
B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure, including, but not limited to, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units.
C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As required by code.
D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:
Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts 08 41 13 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to [edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of clear span for spans of up to 13 feet 6 inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components to less than 1/8 inch. a. Operable Units: Provide
E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors, do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors and anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows: 1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area: a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Entrance Doors: a. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air- pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas, including entrance doors, when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 15 lbf/sq. ft.
H. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Test according to AAMA 501.1 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested at dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 15 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Maximum Water Leakage: According to AAMA 501.1. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters, or water that is drained to exterior.
I. Seismic Performance: Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Seismic Drift Causing Glass Fallout: Complying with criteria for passing based on building occupancy type when tested according to AAMA 501.6 at design displacement and 1.5 times the design displacement.
Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts 08 41 13 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
J. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows: 1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas as a system shall have U-factor of not more than 0.69 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100. 2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Fixed glazing and framing areas as a system shall have SHGC of no greater than 0.35 as determined according to NFRC 200. 3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas as a system shall have an NFRC-certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 45 as determined according to NFRC 500.
K. Noise Reduction: Test according to ASTM E 90, with ratings determined by ASTM E 1332, as follows. 1. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class: Minimum 34.
L. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2. Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5. a. High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal-surface temperature of 180 deg F. b. Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F. c. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F.
M. Structural-Sealant Joints: 1. Designed to carry gravity loads of glazing.
N. Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184. Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by structural-sealant-glazed, aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure. 1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no sealant material behind. 2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate from each substrate, because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength.
2.3 STOREFRONT SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Exterior Framing Construction: Thermally broken. 2. Interior Vestibule Framing Construction: Nonthermal. 3. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on two sides and structural sealant on two sides. 4. Glazing Plane: Center.
Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts 08 41 13 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
5. Finish: Clear anodic. 6. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system. 7. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 8. Steel Reinforcement: As required by manufacturer.
B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.
C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing or automatic operation. 1. Door Construction: 2-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.188-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior. 2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch nominal width. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE
A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware." Coordinate with security requirements specified in Section 28 13 00.
B. General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule for each entrance door, to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. 3. Opening-Force Requirements: a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch and not more than 30 lbf to set the door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open the door to its minimum required width. b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf to fully open door.
Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts 08 41 13 - 7 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, quantity, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using entrance door hardware designations as follows: 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. 2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and requirements for description, quality, and function.
D. Cylinders: As specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware." 1. Comply with BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. 2. Keying: Match existing facilities master key system. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include notation to be furnished by Owner.
E. Continuous-Gear Hinges: BHMA A156.26; As specified in Section 08 71 00 “Door Hardware”.
F. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.
G. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum framing.
H. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.
I. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation, sized as required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to comply with field conditions and requirements for opening force.
J. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location indicated, with integral rubber bumper.
K. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components. 1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000 molded neoprene or ASTM D 2287 molded PVC. 2. Sliding Type: AAMA 701/702, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.
L. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners on mounting strip.
M. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21 raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with maximum height of 1/2 inch.
N. Finger Guards: Manufacturer's standard collapsible neoprene or PVC gasket anchored to frame hinge-jamb at center-pivoted doors.
Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts 08 41 13 - 8 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.6 GLAZING
A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.
C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.
D. Structural Glazing Sealants: ASTM C 1184 chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact; specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for use in storefront system indicated. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
E. Weatherseal Sealants: ASTM C 920 for Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O; chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural- sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and structural-sealant-glazed storefront manufacturers for this use. 1. Color: Match structural sealant.
2.7 MATERIALS
A. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
B. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
C. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
D. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308.
E. Steel Reinforcement: 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011. 4. Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts 08 41 13 - 9 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing system.
B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. 1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 requirements.
C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
E. Rigid PVC Filler.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.
C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible.
D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.
E. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.
F. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using head-and-sill-receptor system with shear blocks at intermediate horizontal members.
G. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At interior and exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.
Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts 08 41 13 - 10 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
H. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
I. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.
J. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.
2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Structural Sealant: Perform quality-control procedures complying with ASTM C 1401 recommendations, including, but not limited to, assembly material qualification procedures, sealant testing, and assembly fabrication reviews and checks.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts 08 41 13 - 11 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers. 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed, as specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants," to produce weathertight installation.
D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.
F. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
G. Install weatherseal sealant according to Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" and according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
H. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 3. Coordinate installation of Entrance Door Hardware with security requirements specified in Section 28 13 00.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.
3. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch. c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch. 4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length.
Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts 08 41 13 - 12 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. 1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration. a. Perform a minimum of two tests at the new installed aluminum entrances. 2. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 783 at 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article but not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.. a. Perform a minimum of two tests at the new installed aluminum entrances. 3. Water Penetration: ASTM E 1105 at a minimum uniform static-air-pressure differential of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure differential specified for laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft., and shall not evidence water penetration.
C. Structural-Sealant Adhesion: Test structural sealant according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401, Destructive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab (Destructive)," Appendix X2. 1. Test a minimum of two areas on each building facade. 2. Repair installation areas damaged by testing.
D. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Entrance Door Hardware: 1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware. 2. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of entrance door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper entrance door hardware operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts and supplies that are the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.
END OF SECTION
Aluminum-Framed Entrances And Storefronts 08 41 13 - 13 This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 08 62 23 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY: Tubular skylights, complete, including installation accessories.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS:
A. Carpentry; Section 06 10 00.
B. Thermoplastic-Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing; Section 07 54 23.
C. Flashing and sheetmetal work; Section 07 62 00.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at the site.
1.4 SUBMITTALS: Comply with Section 01 33 00.
A. Product Data: For tubular skylight. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For unit skylight work. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and connections to supporting structure and other adjoining work.
C. Aluminum Finish Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, in a representative section of each unit skylight in manufacturer's standard size.
D. Glazing Samples: For glazing indicated, 12 inches square and of same thickness indicated for the final Work.
E. Product Schedule: For skylights.
F. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer and installer.
G. Product Test Reports: For type and size of skylight, for tests performed within the last four years by a qualified testing agency. Test results based on testing of smaller tubular skylight than specified will not be accepted.
H. Field quality-control reports.
I. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
J. Maintenance Data: For skylights to include in maintenance manuals.
Tubular Skylights 08 62 23 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating tubular skylights that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations.
B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to tubular skylight manufacturer for installation of units required for this project.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of tubular skylights that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Uncontrolled water leakage. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. c. Yellowing of glazing. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design is Solatube International, Inc. “SolaMaster Series – Model 330 DS”; equivelant products from Velux America, Sunoptics, or approved equal.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Tubular Skylight Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Performance Class and Grade: Class CW-PG80. 2. Certification: AAMA-, WDMA-, or CSA-certified tubular skylights with label attached to each.
B. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Provide tubular skylights that pass protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 2 when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than tubular skylights indicated for use on Project and shall be installed in same manner as tubular skylights indicated for use on Project. 1. Large-Missile Test: For tubular skylights located within 30 feet of grade.
2.3 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
A. General: Provide tubular skylights that include glazing, extruded-aluminum glazing retainers, gaskets, and inner frames and that are capable of withstanding performance requirements indicated.
Tubular Skylights 08 62 23 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Shape and Size: As indicated.
C. Tubular Daylighting Assembly: 1. Roof Dome Assembly (Capture Zone): Transparent, UV and impact resistant dome with flashing base supporting dome and top of tube. a. Dome Glazing: Type DA, 0.143 inch minimum thickness injection molded acrylic classified as CC2 material; UV inhibiting, impact modified acrylic blend. b. Tube Ring: Attached to top of base section; 0,090 inch nominal thickness, injection molded high impact PVC; to prevent thermal bridging between base flashing and tubing; to channel condensed moisture out of tubing. Ring attached with butyl glazing rope 0.24 inch diameter to minimize air infiltration. c. Dome Seal: Adhesive backed weatherstrip, 0.63 inch tall by 0.28 inch wide. d. Light Tracker Reflector: Aluminum sheet, 0.015 inch with Spectralight Infinity. Positioned in the dome to capture low angle sunlight. 2. Flashing: a. Roof Flashing Base: Refer to drawings. b. One piece, seamless, leak-proof flashing functioning as base support for dome and top of tube. Sheet steel, corrosion resistant conforming to ASTM A 653, ASTM A 463, or ASTM A 792, 0.028 inch plus or minus 0.006 inch thick. 1) Base Style: Type F4, Self mounted, 4 inches high. c. Flashing Insulator: Manufacturer’s standard, thermal isolation material. d. Roof Flashing Turret Extensions: Provide manufacturer’s standard extensions for applications as required by project conditions. 3. Extension Tubes (Transfer Zone): Aluminum sheet, thickness 0.018 inch. a. Reflective extension tube, type as required by project conditions. b. Height: As indicated. c. Construction: Spectralight Infinity with Cool Tube Technology combined with ultra-high visible light reflectance with ultra-low infrared reflectance. d. Provide tube angle adapters as required by project conditions. 4. Diffuser Assemblies (Delivery Zone): a. Lens: Type L2, Prismatic lens designed to maximize light output and diffusion. Visible Light Transmission shall be greater than 90 percent at 0.100 inch thick to minimize condensation and bug, dirt and air infiltration per ASTM E 283. b. Diffuser Seal: Open cell foam, acrylic adhesive backed, 0.75 inch wide by 0.125 thick to minimize condensation and bug, dirt and air infiltration per ASTM E 283. c. Diffuser Trim Ring: Injection molded acrylic, 0.172 nominal wall thickness.
Tubular Skylights 08 62 23 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Same metal as metal being fastened, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Finish exposed fasteners to match material being fastened. 1. Where removal of exterior exposed fasteners might allow access to building, provide nonremovable fastener heads.
B. Suspension Wire: Steel, annealed, galvanized finish, size and type for application and ceiling system requirements.
C. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.
2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Mill Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installation of tubular skylight with installation of substrates, vapor retarders, roof insulation, roofing membrane, and flashing as required to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight.
B. Comply with recommendations in AAMA 1607 and with manufacturer's written instructions for installing tubular skylights.
C. Install tubular skylights level, plumb, and true to line, without distortion.
D. Anchor tubular skylights securely to supporting substrates.
E. Where aluminum surfaces of tubular skylights will contact another metal or corrosive substrates, such as preservative-treated wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces or provide other approved permanent separation recommended in writing by tubular skylight manufacturer.
Tubular Skylights 08 62 23 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. After completion of installation and nominal curing of sealant and glazing compounds but before installation of interior finishes, test for water leaks according to AAMA 501.2.
B. Perform test for total area of each tubular skylight.
C. Work will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Additional testing and inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed tubular skylight surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings and finishes.
B. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
C. Remove and replace glazing that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.
D. Protect tubular skylight surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.
END OF SECTION
Tubular Skylights 08 62 23 - 5 This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 08 7 100 DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. Furnish complete hardware of every sort and description as required to adequately equip all movable parts throughout the building for perfect operation. Furnish hardware not specified but obviously required for completion of the project, conforming to size, function, quality, and utility of other hardware specified.
B. Hardware shall be in compliance with ADA requirements.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Qualification of Supplier: The finish hardware supplier shall have in supplier's employ an AHC member of the American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants.
B. AHC Inspection: Before final inspection of work under this contract and acceptance of project by Owner, visit the site and carefully inspect hardware for conformance to specification, adequacy for intended use, proper functioning, appearance, finish, and successful operation, assuming joint responsibility with Contractor for achievement of these characteristics and a satisfactory installation.
C. Manufacturers: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer.
D. Supplier: Supplier shall be a factory authorized distributor of product supplied. Proof of authorization shall be provided upon request.
1.3 SUBMITTALS: Comply with Section 01 33 00.
A. Hardware Schedule: As soon as practicable after award of contract and prior to ordering of hardware, submit to Architect for review, a schedule of hardware to be furnished. Include type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item; name and manufacturer of each item; fastenings and other pertinent information; location of hardware set cross-referenced to drawing indications, mounting locations for hardware, and door and frame sizes and materials. 1. Within 10 days after receipt of approved hardware schedule, submit template information to all related trades. Furnish template information in accordance with latest DHI standards.
B. Product Data: Deliver to installer instructions for installation and maintenance of operating parts and exposed finishes. Furnish templates to fabricators of other work to receive finish hardware.
Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING: Furnish hardware separately unit packed (complete with necessary attachments and fastenings), labeled, and numbered in accordance with Hardware Schedule. Deliver at proper times to proper locations (shop or project site) for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Product numbers listed in the following specifications are taken from the catalogs of manufacturer's listed as follows: 1. (S) Stanley Security Solutions Indianapolis, Indiana 2. (B) Best Access Systems Indianapolis, Indiana 3. (V) Von Duprin Indianapolis, Indiana 4. (T) Trimco Los Angeles, California 5. (NG) National Guard Products Memphis, Tennessee
2.2 FASTENINGS:
A. Furnish all necessary screws, bolts, and other fasteners of suitable size and type to properly anchor the hardware.
B. Furnish fastenings, where necessary, with expansion shields, toggle bolts, sex bolts and other anchors, according to the material to which hardware is to be applied and the recommendations of the hardware manufacturer.
C. Furnish fastenings compatible with both hardware and substrate material and, if exposed, matching hardware finish.
2.3 FINISHES
A. Satin chrome (BHMA 626) and satin stainless steel (BHMA 630) as specified.
B. Paint door closers aluminum (BHMA 689).
C. Provide mill finished aluminum weatherstripping.
2.4 DOOR CLOSER ADJUSTMENT: Adjust to meet opening force requirements of federal, state, and local codes and requirements. In instances where pressure, drafts or other factors prevent the proper operation and compliance of the closers, consult with Architect for guidance. Adjust closers after HVAC systems are operational and adjusted. Be prepared to make a final adjustment to door closers within 6 months after occupancy.
2.5 KEYING
A. All locks are subject to the existing Best key system.
B. Provide all locks with temporary construction cores.
Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Furnish four (4) keys per keyed alike set and two (2) keys each for all other locks.
D. There shall be six (6) master keys furnished.
E. Furnish ten (10) construction keys and four (4) construction control keys.
F. A representative of the Best Lock Company shall consult with the owner’s representative to determine permanent keying.
G. Permanent cores and keys are to be delivered to the designated representative of the Owner.
H. Installation of the permanent cores is to be by the general contractor. Construction cores are to be returned to the Owner’s representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by DHI, except as otherwise directed by Architect.
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted and finished, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protections with finishing work specified. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate.
C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
D. Drill and countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
E. Set thresholds in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant.
3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN:
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.3 HARDWARE SETS: Furnish in the amounts as indicated on drawings or as required for complete and operable facility.
3.4 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE:
HW-1 Each to have: NG 1 Hinge HD2400 V 1 Panic Device QEL99NL B 1 Cylinder T 1 Pull 1191-5J x Type N Mtg V 1 Electric Power Transfer EPT S 1 Closer D3551-TJ T 1 Stop 7281 NG 1 Threshold 425HD NG 1 Door Bottom 200S NG 1 Set Gasketing 5075 V 1 Power Supply PS914
HW-2 Each to have: S 3 Butts FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 B 1 Lock 9K37 R 15D S 1 Closer D3551-H x SNB T 1 Kick Plate 10 x DW-1.5 T 1 Stop 1270WX NG 1 Door Bottom 200S NG 1 Set Gasketing 5075 T 3 Silencers 1229A
HW-3 Each to have: S 3 Butts FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 B 1 Lock 9K37 R 15D T 1 Stop 1270WX T 3 Silencers 1229A
HW-4 Each to have: S 3 Butts FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 B 1 Lock 9K37 AB 15D T 1 Stop 1270WV T 3 Silencers 1229A
HW-5 Each to Have: S 3 Butts FBB179 4.5 x 4.5
Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B 1 Lock 9K37 D 15D S 1 Closer D3551-H x SNB T 1 Kick Plate 10 x DW-1.5 T 3 Silencers 1229A
HW-6 Each to Have: S 3 Butts FBB179 4.5 x 4.5 V 1 Panic Device QEL99NL B 1 Cylinder T 1 Pull 1191-5J x Type N Mtg V 1 Electric Power Transfer EPT S 1 Closer D3551 x SNB T 1 Kick Plate 10 x DW-1.5 T 1 Stop 1270W T 3 Silencers 1229A V 1 Power Supply PS914
END OF SECTION
Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 5 This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY: Glass and glazing, complete.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS:
A. Aluminum Entrances, Storefront and fixed framing; Section 08 41 13.
B. Wood Doors, Section 08 14 16.
C. Hollow metal glazing frames; Section 08 11 13.
1.3 SUBMITTALS: Comply with Section 01 33 00.
A. Product Data: Submit copy of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of glass and glazing material. Include test data or certification substantiating that glass complies with specified requirements.
B. Samples: Prior to ordering, submit minimum 6" x 6" sample of each type and thickness of glass required for review by Architect.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Provide safety glass complying with requirements of CPSC 16 CFR 1201 CII.
B. Label each piece of glass designating type and thickness of glass. Do not remove label prior to installation.
C. Permanently identify each unit of tempered glass; Etch or ceramic fire identification on glass; identification shall be visible when unit is glazed.
D. Permanently mark insulating glass either on spacers or at least one insulating unit component with appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing agency indicated below: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC).
1.5 PROTECTION: Protect glass surfaces and edges at all times during the construction period. Keep glass free from contamination by materials capable of staining glass.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS:
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); Class 1 (clear), 1/4" thick.
Glazing 08 80 00 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1. Low-E: Provide with low emissivity coating (Low-E) coating on 2nd surface of insulated units, as indicated.
B. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (patterned and wire glass flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q8 (glazing), mesh M2 (square); 1/4” thick.
C. Heat Strengthened Glass: Comply with ASTM C 1048. 1. Heat-strengthened (after cutting to final size) by process designed to eliminate tong marks or by vertical process if glass is installed to conceal tong marks. 2. Kind: a. HS (heat strengthened). b. FT (fully tempered).
2.2 SEALED INSULATING UNITS: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed lites of glass separated by dehydrated air spaces complying with ASTM E 774 and with other specified requirements.
A. Insulated Unit: 1" thick composed of 1/4" thick clear float glass outer lite with low-e coating on second surface, 1/2" air space, 1/4" thick clear float glass inner lite.
B. Use HS (heat strengthened) or FT (fully tempered) as scheduled and as required by manufacturer for project conditions.
2.3 GLAZING MATERIALS: Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
A. Glazing Sealants: Tremco "Proglaze", Bostik Chem-Calk 1200", Pecora "836", or other approved by system manufacturer.
B. Glazing Gaskets: Structural rubber, molded neoprene, or cellular neoprene as recommended by manufacturer of glazing system.
C. Glazing Tape: Bostik "Chem Tape 60", Pecora "Shim-Seal", or Tremco "Pre-shimmed Tremco 440 Tape".
D. Setting Blocks: Neoprene or other resilient blocks of 70 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, adhesively backed on one face only, tested for compatibility with specified glazing sealants.
E. Spacers: Neoprene or other resilient blocks of 40 to 50 Shore A durometer hardness, tested for compatibility with specified glazing sealant.
F. Compressible Filler Rod: Closed-cell or waterproof-jacketed foam of polyethylene, butyl rubber, neoprene, polyurethane or vinyl, tested for compatibility with specified glazing sealants, of 5 to 10 psi compression strength (25% deflection), recommended by sealant manufacturer for use in glazing channel to prevent sealant exudation from the channel.
Glazing 08 80 00 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: Watertight installation of each piece of glass is required. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes, wind loading, impact loading (for operating doors) without failure of any kind including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glazing materials, and other defects in work.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. Comply with recommendations of glass manufacturers and manufacturers of sealants and other glazing materials, unless otherwise indicated or specified, including preparation of surfaces.
B. Clean channel surfaces and prime as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
C. Cut glass to size as required for measured opening, provide adequate edge clearance and glass bite all around. Cut prior to tempering.
D. Do not install sheets which have edge damage or face imperfections.
E. Miter-cut and bond (weld) ends of channel gaskets at corners to provide a continuous gasket.
F. Seal face gaskets at corners with liquid elastomeric sealant to close openings and prevent withdrawal of gaskets from corners.
G. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged during construction period.
3.3 CURING: Cure glazing sealants and compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability.
END OF SECTION
Glazing 08 80 00 - 3 This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY: Gypsum wallboard work, complete. Work includes:
A. Walls, furred ceilings, soffits, walls and areas, suspended ceilings, sound insulation, metal trim and accessories, and joint treatment.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS:
A. Unit Masonry; Section 04 20 00.
B. Insulation; Section 07 21 00.
C. Firestopping; Section 07 84 00.
1.3 SUBMITTALS: Comply with Section 01 33 00.
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions or each gypsum wallboard component.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing typical and special partition and ceiling assemblies. Include materials, material gages, stud spacing, and bracing of studs. Include joint layout.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Allowable tolerances; 1/8" offsets between planes of board faces, and 1/4" in 8 ft. for plumb, level, warp, and bow.
B. Fire-Resistance Rating: Where work is indicated for fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and installations identical with assemblies which have been tested and listed by recognized authorities, including U.L., Warnock Hersey, O.S.U., and U.S.G.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PRODUCT HANDLING: Deliver materials in original packages, containers and bundles, fully identified with manufacturer's name, brand, type and grade. Store in dry, well-ventilated space, protected from the weather under cover and off the ground. Stack flat to prevent sagging. Handle to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces.
1.6 COORDINATION: Coordinate work with work of other trades.
Gypsum Board 09 29 00 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS: U. S. Gypsum System and Georgia Pacific are specified; equivalent products of Gold Bond and Certainteed are acceptable, or approved equal.
2.2 MATERIALS:
A. Studs, Channels And Runners: Roll-formed, 20 gage, electro-galvanized steel. 7/8" furring channels. Studs of type and sizes (3-5/8", 6"), and as indicated. Punch holes near each end of stud to facilitate installation of horizontal electrical wiring or conduit; punch as required for piping.
B. Hangers: 8 gage galvanized soft annealed wire.
C. Tie Wire: 18 gage galvanized soft annealed wire.
D. Drywall Suspension System: Direct hung heavy-duty single-web steel main tees with furring channels and cross tees at light fixtures; U.S.G. (Donn) Rigid X, Chicago Metallic 660 Furring, or approved equal.
E. Gypsumboard And Fire-Rated Gypsumboard: USG Sheetrock Firecode (Type X), with tapered edges; 5/8" thick.
F. Trim Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard trim accessories of types indicated for drywall work, formed of galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated, with either knurled and perforated or expanded flanges for nailing or stapling, and beaded for concealment of flanges in joint compound. Provide all corner beads, edge trim-beads, and control joint beads, types as indicated, and as required by project conditions. Provide reveal trim as indicated.
G. Fasteners: 1. Self-drilling, self-tapping screws for power driving with special head design for gypsumboard attachment (Type S), producing surface depression for proper concealment; 1" long for single layer. 2. Provide other fasteners as required by project conditions and as recommended by manufacturer.
H. Acoustical Sealant: U.S.G. Acoustical Sealant, or approved equal.
I. Sound Attenuation Batts: 6" thick fiberglass noise barrier batts from OCF, Manville or Certainteed; or 6" thick mineral wool sound control blanket.
J. Joint Treatment Materials: 1. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. 2. Joint Tape: a. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 3. Joint Compounds: Prefilling, fill coat, finish and skim coats as recommended by manufacturer for finish level.
Gypsum Board 09 29 00 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION: Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's instructions, as specified and as indicated.
A. Partitions: Provide partition assemblies as indicated; refer to Sheet A0.0. Space studs 16" o.c., except as otherwise indicated. 1. Provide runners designed to hold and align studs. Provide additional studs at door frames. 2. Cross brace each opposite pair of studs with metal stud bracing or gypsumboard panel bracing, in compliance with design as specified on drawings, attached with specified fasteners. 3. Cut gypsumboard neatly in around openings, pipes, ducts, electrical boxes, outlets, fixtures, etc. 4. At insulated walls, wedge insulation between studs, and fit snugly against floor and ceiling runners and against protrusions. Run insulation over top of wall at ceiling, extend to 2' each side. Cut gypsumboard neatly in around openings, pipes, ducts, electrical boxes, outlets, fixtures, etc. Seal to fill gaps and around entire perimeter with acoustical sealant, including floor and ceiling joints and intersections with vertical surfaces to provide a completely airtight wall. 5. At fire rated partitions conform to tested designs for required hour ratings indicated.
B. Furred Ceilings, Soffits, Walls And Areas: 5/8" gypsumboard on furring channels and studs, as indicated. Shim as required to provide level surface.
C. Suspended Ceilings: 5/8" gypsumboard on drywall suspension system suspended by hangers and hanger wires from structural bracing at 4' o.c.
D. Application: Except where specified otherwise: 1. Apply gypsumboard parallel or horizontal to studs (except where otherwise required by fire rated assembly, with panels in longest length available. 2. Provide casing beads where edges of gypsumboard meet dissimilar materials. 3. Fasten gypsumboard with specified screws. a. Space screws 16" o.c. for walls and 12" o.c. for ceilings for single layer b. At fire rated assemblies, conform to fastening required of rated assembly. 4. Cooperate with the carpenter in placing of backing and blocking required as backing for all millwork, fixtures, fittings, and accessories. Reinforce and brace studs in partitions supporting fixtures, to provide firm backing and prevent deflection of the wall. 5. Brace studs in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations for wall height, stud spacing, and other project conditions indicated. Include bracing in shop drawing submittal. 6. Arrange gypsumboard joints on opposite sides of partitions to occur on different studs. 7. Install expansion/control joints in ceilings exceeding 2500 sq. ft. in area and in partition and wall runs exceeding 30'. Do not exceed a distance of 50', in either direction, between ceiling control joints, and install a control joint where ceiling
Gypsum Board 09 29 00 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
framing or furring changes direction. Do not exceed a distance of 30' between control joints in walls. Submit joint layout. 8. Treat all internal angles formed by the intersection of either wallboard surfaces with metal trim and/or a taped joint system as indicated or required. 9. Treat all vertical and horizontal external corners with metal bead corner reinforcement applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
E. Finishing: 1. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim control joint penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsumboard surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. 2. Prefill open joints, and damaged surface areas. 3. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. 4. Finish Levels: a. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas. b. Level 5: Surfaces receiving gloss and semigloss enamels and other surfaces subject to severe lighting.
3.2 PROTECTION: Protect installed products from damage during remainder of construction period. Remove and replace panels that are damaged.
END OF SECTION
Gypsum Board 09 29 00 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 09 51 23 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY: Acoustical ceilings, complete, including elements of the suspension system, trim, and facilities for the support and attachment of lighting fixtures, air diffusers and grilles. See Finish Schedule and Reflected Ceiling Plan for locations.
1.2 SUBMITTALS: Comply with requirements of Section 01 33 00.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings, for Architect's review, indicating location of ceiling units and items of work which are to be coordinated with the ceilings, and framing and support details for all work supported by the suspension system.
C. Samples: 1. Submit 12" X 12" samples of acoustical panel pattern, texture and color. 2. Submit 12" long samples of exposed suspension system members, moldings and trim, finish and color for verification by Architect.
1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: Deliver acoustical units in manufacturer's original unopened packages, fully identified with type, finish, performance data and compliance labels. Handle and store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS: Do not install acoustical units until space has been enclosed and is weathertight, until wet work has been completed and is dry, until work above ceiling is complete, and until temperature and humidity conditions will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
1.5 COORDINATION: Coordinate work with work of other trades.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS:
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Panels: 5 percent of quantity installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS: Armstrong is specified, USG, Certainteed, or approved equal.
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications specified.
Acoustical Ceilings 09 51 23 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083 B. Lay-In Panel: 1. Characteristics: a. Material: Wet formed mineral fiber. b. Surface Finish: Factory-applied latex paint. c. Color: White. d. Size: 24" X 24" X 3/4". e. Edge Detail: Square lay-in. f. NRC: .70. g. CAC: 35. h. Light Reflectance: 86%. i. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A (Flame Spread 25 or under), UL labeled. j. Insulation Value: Average R factor – BTU (at 75°F), 1.9 BTU. k. Sag Resistance: HumiGuard Plus. 2. Pattern: Basis of Design, Armstrong Cirrus No. 574, or approved equal.
2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATERIALS: Provide suspension systems of type, structural classification, and finishes conforming to ASTM C 635.
A. Attachment Devices: Type recommended by suspension system manufacturer for attachment or anchorage of ceiling hangers to structure above ceiling, sized for not less than 5 times the hanger design load for the structural classification indicated.
B. Hanger Wire: Minimum No. 12 gage, galvanized annealed steel wire.
C. Grid System: 1. Armstrong 15/16" Prelude Exposed Tee, U.S.G./Donn DX Grid, or Chicago Metallic 1200 Series, or approved equal. a. Characteristics: 1) Material: Double-web hot-dip galvanized steel. 2) Face Dimension: 15/16". 3) Profile: Exposed tee. 4) Surface Finish: Baked polyester paint. 5) Color: White. 6) Structural Classification: Intermediate Duty.
D. Wall Moldings: Provide wall moldings, of types and profiles indicated or required by job conditions, of same material and finish as suspension system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Examine area receiving acoustical ceilings to identify conditions which will adversely affect installation. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Verify that all work performed above ceiling plane by other trades has been completed prior to start of installation.
Acoustical Ceilings 09 51 23 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083 3.2 INSTALLATION AND WORKMANSHIP:
A. Install mechanical suspension system and acoustical units in strict compliance with ASTM C 636, and install in accordance with manufacturer's directions, using experienced acoustical mechanics.
B. Install in such a manner to permit border units of the greatest possible size, unless otherwise indicated on the Reflected Ceiling Plan.
C. Refer to Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plan for the locations of lighting fixtures, air supply and return diffusers, grilles, and registers, which will be installed in the ceilings, and which will replace and/or pierce the acoustical unit; refer to electrical and mechanical drawings for quantities.
D. Exposed Grid: 1. Install acoustical ceiling suspension system level and true to line, with neat and close-fitting joints between spliced and intersecting members. Grid to be square, and ends and cross tees tightly butted, and faces in the same plane. Do not rest flanges of the cross tees on the flanges of the main runners. 2. Neatly and accurately cut and place acoustical panels to fit snugly into the main and cross tees, with no space between the bottom of the acoustical panels and grid system, and without gaps showing in the finished installation.
3.3 CLEANING: Clean soiled or discolored acoustical units, trim, moldings, and suspension members after installation. Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids, and other defects in painted surfaces. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION
Acoustical Ceilings 09 51 23 - 3 This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY: Resilient flooring and accessories, complete. Work includes:
A. Luxury vinyl plank flooring.
B. Vinyl composition tile.
C. Rubber base.
D. Edge strips, feature strips, reducer strips, transition strips.
E. Accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS: Comply with Section 01 33 00.
A. Product Data: Submit copy of manufacturer's technical data, installation instructions, and maintenance instructions for each type of resilient flooring and accessory.
B. Samples: Submit full color palette samples for each type and pattern of resilient flooring and accessory for selection by TxDOT/Architect.
C. Warranties: Submit executed warranties.
1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to the project site in the manufacturer's original unopened containers, clearly marked to indicate pattern gage, lot number and sequence of manufacture.
B. Storage: Store in original container at not less than 70ºF for at least 48 hours before start of installation.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Maintain minimum temperature of 70ºF for minimum of 48 hours prior to installation. Maintain 70ºF temperature continuously during and after installation as recommended by the manufacturer, but in any case not less than 48 hours.
B. Luxury Vinyl Plank Flooring: 1. Maintain minimum 65 ºF room and subfloor temperature for a period of 72 hours prior to, during and after installation. Maximum temperature should not exceed 100 ºF after installation. 2. Flooring should not be installed before the concrete subfloor has cured for a minum of 30 days.
Resilient Flooring 09 65 00 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3. Moisture content of the concrete slab must not exceed 5 lbs per 1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours when using the calcium chloride test. Alkalinity of concrete slab must not be below 7 and 10 on pH scale.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS: Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
A. Luxury Vinyl Plank Flooring: Full size units equal to 5% of quantity installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUXURY VINYL PLANK FLOORING (LVT): Basis of Design is Congoleum “Structure”; equivalent products from Armstrong, Mannington, Tarkett Group/Johnsonite is acceptable; or approved equal.
A. Plank Dimensions: 9” x 48”; NOTE: Indicated on drawings as LVT.
B. Collection/Style/Finish/Color: As selected from manufacturer’s full range.
C. Wearlayer: Urethane.
D. Installation: Glue down.
2.2 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE (VCT):
A. Basis of Design is Armstrong “Standard Excelon Imperial Texture”; equivalent products from Mannington, Tarkett Group/Johnsonite, Azrock is acceptable; or approved equal.
B. ASTM F 1066, Class 2.
C. Size: 12” x 12” x 1/8”.
D. Color: As selected from manufacturer’s standard color palette.
2.3 VINYL WALL BASE:
A. Basis of Design is Armstrong; equivalent products from Roppe, Tarkett Group/Johnsonite, Flexco is acceptable; or approved equal.
B. Height and Profile: Refer to finish schedule; match existing.
C. Preformed inside and outside corners.
D. Color: As selected from manufacturer’s standard color palette; minimum two color design.
Resilient Flooring 09 65 00 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.4 ACCESSORIES:
A. Resilient Edge Strips: l/8" thick, vinyl or rubber, bullnose edge, in color to match existing flooring, or as selected the Architect from standard colors; not less than l" wide.
2.5 OTHER MATERIALS: Provide materials as indicated, specified, and required by project conditions.
A. Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by manufacturers.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit project and substrate conditions indicated.
C. Calking Compound: As recommended by manufacturer.
D. Leveling and Patching Compound: As approved by manufacturers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION: Examine the existing areas and conditions under which new resilient flooring and accessory work is to be placed. Moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature and relative humidity must be within limits recommended by flooring manufacturer. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES:
A. Use leveling and patching compounds as recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer for filling small cracks, holes and depressions, and for leveling of subfloors. 1. Substrate to be planar within 1/4" in 10' in any direction.
B. Broom clean or vacuum surfaces of foreign material which would inhibit bond or cause surface imperfections and telegraphing.
C. Vinyl Plank Floors: 1. Substrates are to be dry and exhibit neutral alkalinity. 2. Concrete substrate to be in place a minimum of 30 days prior to the installation of the vinyl plank flooring. 3. Provide alkalinity and moisture tests. The pH levels for each type of specified flooring should be below 7 and not above 10 and moisture vapor emission must not exceed 5 lbs per 1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours for the calcium chloride test. 4. Substrate must be clean and free of paint, dust, sealer, hardeners, grease, oil, solvents, old adhesive or any other foreign substances that may act as a bond barrier.
Resilient Flooring 09 65 00 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.3 INSTALLATION:
A. General: 1. Install flooring after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed and permanent heating system is operating. 2. Place flooring with adhesive cement in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Butt tightly to vertical surfaces, thresholds, nosings, and edgings. Scribe around obstructions and to produce neat joints, laid tight, even, and straight. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and similar openings. 4. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other non-permanent marking device. 5. Tightly cement flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections.
B. Tile Floors: 1. Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 1/2 tile at room perimeters. 2. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged. Cut tile neatly to and around all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped or deformed tile are not acceptable. 3. Lay tile pattern indicated
C. Luxury Vinyl Plank Flooring: Install in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions. 1. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial cure. Stagger end joints a minimum of 6” apart. Install planks in pattern indicated, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Roll vinyl plank flooring with 100-lb. roller. Repeat rolling procedure as recommended by flooring manufacturer to ensure proper bond.
D. Resilient Base: Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, millwork, casework, and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is indicated. Install base in as long lengths as practicable. Tightly bond base to backing throughout the length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. 1. Preformed Corners: Install corners before installing straight pieces. 2. Formed Corners: a. Form inside corners from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of rubber base at point where corner is formed. Shave back to base where necessary to produce snug fit to substrate. b. Form outside corner from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by shaving back of base to point where bending will occur. Remove a strip perpendicular to length of base and only deep enough to produce a
Resilient Flooring 09 65 00 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
snug fit without bends whitening or removal of more than half the thickness of rubber base.
E. Resilient Strips: Place strips tightly butted and secured to flooring with adhesive. Install strips at all unprotected edges of flooring unless otherwise shown.
3.4 CLEANING, WAXING AND POLISHING: Clean with a damp mop. Do not wash or scrub for at least 4 days after installation. Protect floor with building paper as necessary. On total completion of building, thoroughly clean resilient flooring and accessories with mild soap and water. Apply two thin coats of water emulsion wax to vinyl composition floors, allowing 30 minutes drying times between applications, then buff with heavy mechanical polisher.
END OF SECTION
Resilient Flooring 09 65 00 - 5 This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. Painting and finishing of interior and exterior items and surfaces throughout the project, except as otherwise indicated. Provide field painting of hangers, exposed steel and iron work, of primed metal surfaces and exposed-to-view prefinished metal surfaces of items, as required to match adjacent surfaces, and equipment installed under mechanical and electrical work. Refer to those respective sections for painting requirements. Provide touch-up of pre-finished items as required to match original finish. 1. Do not paint acoustical ceiling panels, acoustical wall panels, plastic laminate, anodized aluminum, and pre-finished items except as noted above.
B. Cleaning, preparation, and painting of existing surfaces as indicated and specified. 1. Work includes, new elastomeric coating at exterior tilt-up concrete walls where indicated on drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS: Comply with Section 01 33 00.
A. Paint Schedule: Submit paint schedule listing each material cross-referenced to the specific paint and finish system and application. Identify by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
B. Samples: Submit samples of finishes type and color on specified materials for verification.
1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Deliver materials to the job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS: Provide all paints, enamels, stains, varnishes, and admixtures of first line quality as manufactured by Sherwin Williams, Pratt and Lambert, Glidden Professional, Benjamin Moore, PPG Pittsburgh Paints, Farrell-Calhoun; or approved equal.
2.2 MATERIALS: See paragraph 3.4, SCHEDULE OF PAINT TREATMENT for materials. All finish coats shall contain mildewcides. Grind in the factory all exterior colors and interior deep tone colors. Shop mixing is not permitted. Colors as scheduled, and subject to modification on the job at the Architect's discretion.
A. Submit “like family” color palettes or comparable family paint color palettes for TxDOT/Architect review and selection.
Painting 09 90 00 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION: Examine the areas and conditions under which painting work is to be performed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Starting of painting work will be construed as acceptance of the surfaces within any particular areas.
A. Wood: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of all dirt, oil, or other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job painted immediately upon delivery to job. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of such wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, etc. Scrape and clean small, dry seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer, before application of the priming coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood-filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried.
B. Gypsum Wall Board: Treat all joints, nail heads and other depressions in the surface of the wallboard, in accordance with the recommended manner, with a taped joint system by the gypsum wallboard manufacturer. Do not paint over gypsum wallboard work until taped joints are thoroughly dry.
C. Cementitious Materials: Prepare cementitious surfaces to be painted by removing all, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required to remove glaze. Determine the alkalinity and moisture content of the surfaces to be painted by performing appropriate tests. If the surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of the finish paint, correct this condition before application of paint.
D. Ferrous Metals: Touch-up shop-applied prime coats which have damaged or bare areas. Wire-brush, solvent clean, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.
E. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminates with an acceptable non- petroleum based solvent
F. Existing Surfaces: If in sound conditions and of uniform porosity, no primer is required (unless required for proper bond of paint). Remove rust, dirt, grease, and loose and peeling paint from surface and spot prime with appropriate primer. Remove surface contamination by washing with powdered commercial cleaner. Wash thoroughly and allow to dry. Dull glossy surfaces with fine primer sandpaper or steel wool. Spot prime with appropriate primer. Paint as specified.
3.2 APPLICATION:
A. Apply paint by brush, roller, spray, or other acceptable practice in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Use brushes best suited for the type of material being applied. Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high pile sheeps wool as recommended by the manufacturer for material and texture required.
Painting 09 90 00 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. The number of coats and paint film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has completely dried. Sand between each enamel or varnish coat application with fine sand paper, or rub surfaces with pumice stone where required to produce an even smooth surface in accordance with the coating manufacturer's directions.
C. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through the final coat of paint, until the paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance.
D. Give special attention to insure that all surfaces, including edges corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a film thickness equivalent of that of flat surfaces.
3.3 CLEAN-UP: Thoroughly clean all spots, smears, spills, etc., remove from the site all discarded paint materials, rubbish cans and rags at the end of each work day.
3.4 SCHEDULE OF PAINT TREATMENTS:
Treatment Location Coats Materials No.
1. Ext. & Int. ferrous metal 3 Shop priming is specified under the re- spective metal section. 1st Coat: Rust primer. 2nd & 3rd Coats: Ext. alkyd semi-gloss paint.
2. Ext. & Int. galvanized metal 3 Shop priming is specified under the re- spective metal section. Pretreatment: Chemical wash. 1st Coat: Galvanized iron primer. 2nd & 3rd Costs: Ext. alkyd semi-gloss paint. 3. Other metal surfaces (factory 2 Clean and prime abraded spots as speci- finished, primed or pre- fied in metal sections and finish in 2 finished) including roof units coats specified for adjoining surfaces.
4. Aluminum (mill finished) Treat with vinyl wash coat and then use primer and finish coats as specified for adjoining surfaces.
5. Ext. plywood construction 2 1st Coat: Acrylic emulsion primer. sign 2nd Coat: Semi-gloss acrylic latex.
6. Ext. Concrete, except as 3 1st Coat: Acrylic primer. indicated below 2nd & 3rd Coats: Semi-gloss acrylic latex paint.
Painting 09 90 00 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
7. Existing Ext. Concrete (Tilt- 3 1st Coat: Concrete Primer. Up) 3 2nd & 3rd Coats: SW ConFlex XL Sherlastic Elastomeric High Build Coating, Flat. 8. Int. gypsumboard, except as noted below 2nd & 3rd Coats: Semi-gloss acrylic latex paint.
1st Coat: Latex wall primer. 2nd & 3rd Coats: Acrylic latex enamel, Eggshell or Semi-gloss or Flat.
9. Existing surfaces 2 Match existing.
END OF SECTION
Painting 09 90 00 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY: Provide semi-recessed, non-rated, fire-protection cabinets with bracket mounted fire extinguishers, complete.
1.2 SUBMITTALS: Comply with Section 01 33 00.
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 2. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, detail showing mounting methods, relationship of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.
B. Samples: Submit samples for verification for each type of exposed finish, prepared on 6” x 6” square sample.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit for fire extinguishers and fire protection cabinets.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers".
C. Fire Extinguisher: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Fire Extinguisher Cabinet: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements of ASTM E814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
1.4 COORDINATION: Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES: Larsen's Manufacturing Company “Architectural Series” is specified; equivalent products from J. L. Industries and Potter Roemer are acceptable; or approved equal.
2.2 MATERIALS:
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
Fire Protection Specialties 10 44 00 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows: 1. Sheet: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221.
C. Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality q3; 1/4” thick.
2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS:
A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for cabinet indicated. 1. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.
B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL Rated, MP 4-A:60B:C, 10 lb. nominal capacity, with mono-ammonium phosphate based dry chemical in enameled steel container. 1. Larsen’s MP-10.
2.4 CABINETS:
A. Model: AL 2409-6R.
B. Cabinet Construction: Non rated.
C. Cabinet Material: Enameled steel.
D. Semi-Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). 1. Rolled Edge Trim: Semi-recessed, 2-1/2”.
E. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as color.
F. Door Material: Aluminum sheet.
G. Door Style: Vertical duo panel door.
H. Door Glazing: Tempered break glass.
I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer’s standard door operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. Provide manufacturer’s standard projecting door pull and friction latch. 2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180 degrees.
Fire Protection Specialties 10 44 00 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
J. Accessories: 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer’s standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to cabinets and walls, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked enamel finish. a. Larsen’s B-2 bracket. 2. Lettered Door Handle: One piece, cast iron door handle with word “FIRE” embossed into face. 3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location.
K. Finishes: 1. Manufacturer’s standard baked enamel paint for interior of cabinet. 2. AA-M12C22A31 clear anodized aluminum for cabinet door and trim.
2.5 FABRICATION:
A. Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2” thick. 2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION: Verify that rough openings for cabinets are correctly sized and located.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. Install in compliance with pertinent regulations and manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Set top of cabinets and wall mounted extinguishers at height AFF to meet ADA requirements and anchor components fully in place. Indicate height on shop drawings.
C. Determine approximate complete date of work. Inspect, charge and tag fire extinguishers at date not more than 10 days before or less than one day before actual completion of work.
Fire Protection Specialties 10 44 00 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and stippable films, if any, as fire-protection specialties are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's literature.
B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.
C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-protection cabinet manufacturer.
E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION
Fire Protection Specialties 10 44 00 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 12 21 13 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. Section Includes: 1. Horizontal louver blinds.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS:
A. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting horizontal louver blinds and accessories.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS: Comply with Section 01 33 00.
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For horizontal louver blinds, include fabrication and installation details.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches long.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of horizontal louver blind. 1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of horizontal louver blind indicated. 1. Slat: Not less than 12 inches long. 2. Tapes: Full width, not less than 6 inches long. 3. Horizontal Louver Blind: Full-size unit, not less than 16 inches wide by 24 inches long. 4. Valance: Full-size unit, not less than 12 inches wide.
F. Product Schedule: For horizontal louver blinds. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver horizontal louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.
Horizontal Louver Blinds 12 21 13 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet-work and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS: Levelor, Springs Window Fashions, Hunter-Douglas Contract; or approved equal.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM SLATS
A. Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish indicated; with crowned profile and radius corners. 1. Width: 1 inch. 2. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Spacing: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Finish: Ionized antistatic, dust-repellent, baked polyester finish. 5. Features: a. Lift-Cord Rout Holes: Minimum size required for lift cord and located near back (outside) edge of slat to maximize slat overlap and minimize light gaps between slats. b. Perforated Slats: Openness factor to match existing.
B. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled. Headrails fully enclose operating mechanisms on three sides. 1. Capacity: One blind(s) per headrail unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ends: Capped or plugged. 3. Manual Lift Mechanism: a. Lift-Cord Lock: Variable; stops lift cord at user-selected position within blind full operating range. b. Operator: Extension of lift cord(s) through lift-cord lock mechanism to form cord pull. 4. Manual Tilt Mechanism: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism and linkage rod that adjusts ladders. a. Tilt: Full.
Horizontal Louver Blinds 12 21 13 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
b. Tilt: Two-direction, positive stop or lockout limited at an angle of 80 degrees from horizontal, both directions. c. Operator: Clear-plastic wand. d. Over-Rotation Protection: Manufacturer's detachable operator or slip clutch to prevent over rotation of gear. 5. Manual Lift-Operator and Tilt-Operator Lengths: Length required to extend to 48 inches above floor level when blind is fully closed. 6. Manual Lift-Operator and Tilt-Operator Locations: Right side and left side of headrail, respectively, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Integrated Headrail/Valance: Curved face.
C. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube that secures and protects ends of ladders and lift cords and has plastic- or metal-capped ends. 1. Type: Top contoured to match crowned shape of slat.
D. Lift Cords: Manufacturer's standard braided cord.
E. Ladders: Evenly spaced across headrail at spacing that prevents long-term slat sag. 1. Type: Braided cord.
F. Valance: PVC strip.
G. Mounting Brackets: With spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated. 1. Type: Overhead. 2. Intermediate Support: Provide intermediate support brackets to produce support spacing recommended by blind manufacturer for weight and size of blind.
H. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard.
I. Side Channels and Perimeter Light Gap Seals: Manufacturer's standard.
J. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: 1. Slats: Provide three samples for review and approval by TxDOT/Architect. 2. Components: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and materials exposed to view matching or coordinating with slat color unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION
A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate horizontal louver blinds to comply with WCMA A 100.1 including requirements for corded, flexible, looped devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.
B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F: 1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which blind is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch. Length equal to head-to-sill dimension of opening in which blind is installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch.
Horizontal Louver Blinds 12 21 13 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between blinds of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings.
C. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. 1. Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts.
D. Mounting and Intermediate Brackets: Designed for removal and reinstallation of blind without damaging blind and adjacent surfaces, for supporting blind components, and for bracket positions and blind placement indicated.
E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to brackets and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use.
F. Color-Coated Finish: 1. Metal: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb, aligned and centered on openings, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Locate so exterior slat edges are not closer than 1 inch from interior faces of glass and not closer than 1/4 from interior faces of glazing frames through full operating ranges of blinds. 2. Install mounting and intermediate brackets to prevent deflection of headrails. 3. Install with clearances that prevent interference with adjacent blinds, adjacent construction, and operating hardware of glazed openings, other window treatments, and similar building components and furnishings.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate free of binding or malfunction through full operating ranges.
Horizontal Louver Blinds 12 21 13 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensures that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
C. Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired in a manner approved by Architect before time of Substantial Completion.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems.
END OF SECTION
Horizontal Louver Blinds 12 21 13 - 5 This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. Constant-volume air systems. 2. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Equipment: a. Motors. 3. Control system verification.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B. BAS: Building automation systems.
C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
D. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
E. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
F. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work.
G. TDH: Total dynamic head.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. TAB Conference: If requested by the Owner, conduct a TAB conference at Project site after approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. 1. Minimum Agenda Items: a. The Contract Documents examination report. b. The TAB plan. c. Needs for coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. d. Proposed procedures for documentation and communication flow.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS 1. TAB Report: Documentation indicating that Work complies with ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."
Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For HVAC 23 05 93 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: Submit documentation that the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.
C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
D. System Readiness Checklists: Submit system readiness checklists as specified in "Preparation" Article.
E. Examination Report: Submit a summary report of the examination review required in "Examination" Article.
F. Certified TAB reports.
G. Sample report forms.
H. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following: 1. Instrument type and make. 2. Serial number. 3. Application. 4. Dates of use. 5. Dates of calibration.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by AABC , NEBB, or TABB. 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC. 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC as a TAB technician.
B. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation."
C. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.
Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For HVAC 23 05 93 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible.
C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.
F. Examine equipment performance data including fan curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.
G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
I. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
K. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For HVAC 23 05 93 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
L. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following: 1. Equipment and systems to be tested. 2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems. 3. Instrumentation to be used. 4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment.
B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following: 1. Airside: a. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed. b. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional. c. Clean filters are installed. d. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. e. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. f. Ceilings are installed. g. Windows and doors are installed. h. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. 2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials.
C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For HVAC 23 05 93 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.
D. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
H. Check for airflow blockages.
I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
J. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
K. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."
3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure total airflow. a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions. b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow. c. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable. d. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at terminals and calculate the total airflow. 2. Measure fan static pressures as follows: a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air- handling system. d. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured. 3. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions. 4. Obtain approval from engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air- handling-unit performance.
Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For HVAC 23 05 93 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows. 1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. 2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow. 3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.
C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows. 1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 2. Measure inlets and outlets airflow. 3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow. 4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted.
D. Verify final system conditions. 1. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within design. Readjust to design if necessary. 2. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design. 3. Re-measure all final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile. 4. Mark all final settings. 5. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary. 6. Measure and record all operating data. 7. Record final fan-performance data.
3.6 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Phase and hertz. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter size and thermal-protection-element rating. 8. Service factor and frame size.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test manual bypass of controller to prove proper operation.
3.7 CONTROLS VERIFICATION
A. In conjunction with system balancing, perform the following: 1. Verify temperature control system is operating within the design limitations.
Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For HVAC 23 05 93 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2. Confirm that the sequences of operation are in compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Verify that controllers are calibrated and function as intended. 4. Verify that controller set points are as indicated. 5. Verify the operation of lockout or interlock systems. 6. Verify the operation of valve and damper actuators. 7. Verify that controlled devices are properly installed and connected to correct controller. 8. Verify that controlled devices travel freely and are in position indicated by controller: open, closed, or modulating. 9. Verify location and installation of sensors to ensure that they sense only intended temperature, humidity, or pressure.
B. Reporting: Include a summary of verifications performed, remaining deficiencies, and variations from indicated conditions.
3.8 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.
B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified above. Toilet, shower, locker rooms shall be negative pressure relative to adjacent spaces, regardless of tolerances allowed above.
3.9 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. 3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data.
B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data.
C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB specialist. 3. Project name. 4. Project location.
Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For HVAC 23 05 93 - 7 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
D. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number, make, and size of belts. k. Number, type, and size of filters. 2. Motor Data: a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.
Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For HVAC 23 05 93 - 8 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. i. Outdoor airflow in cfm. j. Return airflow in cfm. k. Outdoor-air damper position. l. Return-air damper position. m. Vortex damper position.
E. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: 1. Coil Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c. f. Make and model number. g. Face area in sq. ft.. h. Tube size in NPS. i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Average face velocity in fpm. c. Air pressure drop in inches wg. d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. h. Water flow rate in gpm. i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. j. Entering-water temperature in deg F. k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig. n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F. o. Inlet steam pressure in psig.
F. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System identification. b. Location.
Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For HVAC 23 05 93 - 9 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Fuel type in input data. g. Output capacity in Btu/h. h. Ignition type. i. Burner-control types. j. Motor horsepower and rpm. k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz. l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor. m. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. n. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Entering-air temperature in deg F. c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. d. Air temperature differential in deg F. e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg. f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg. g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Low-fire fuel input in Btu/h. i. High-fire fuel input in Btu/h. j. Manifold pressure in psig. k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F. l. Operating set point in Btu/h. m. Motor voltage at each connection. n. Motor amperage for each phase. o. Heating value of fuel in Btu/h.
G. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1. Fan Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Motor Data: a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.
Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For HVAC 23 05 93 - 10 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
g. Number, make, and size of belts. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.
H. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following: 1. Report Data: a. System and air-handling-unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft.. g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm. h. Indicated velocity in fpm. i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig.
I. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Apparatus used for test. d. Area served. e. Make. f. Number from system diagram. g. Type and model number. h. Size. i. Effective area in sq. ft.. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Air velocity in fpm. c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final airflow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. g. Space temperature in deg F.
J. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling-unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Room or riser served.
Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For HVAC 23 05 93 - 11 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
d. Coil make and size. e. Flowmeter type. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Entering-water temperature in deg F. c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig. e. Entering-air temperature in deg F. f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.
K. Instrument Calibration Reports: 1. Report Data: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration.
END OF SECTION
Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For HVAC 23 05 93 - 12 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulating the following duct services: 1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water- vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke- developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke- developed index of 150 or less.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields.
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
Duct Insulation 23 07 13 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.6 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" paragraph. 1. Comply with requirements in paragraph 3.7 for where insulating materials shall be applied. 2. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds 3. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871 4. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. 5. Approved manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corp. b. Johns Mansville c. Knauf Insulation d. Manson Insulation e. Owens Corning f. Approved equal
2.2 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.
2.4 TAPES
A. Mastic and fiberglass tape sealing.
Duct Insulation 23 07 13 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.5 SECUREMENTS
A. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. 2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer. 3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. b. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 4. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter. b. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches. c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 5. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. 6. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
Duct Insulation 23 07 13 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.
B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
Duct Insulation 23 07 13 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.
N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
C. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.
Duct Insulation 23 07 13 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches. 5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at end joints.
Duct Insulation 23 07 13 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.
3.7 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 1. Supply ducts: 1-1/2 inch thickness, 0.75 PCF minimum density 2. and outside air ducts: 1-1/2 inch thickness, 0.75 PCF minimum density
B. Items Not Insulated: 1. Fibrous-glass ducts. 2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Vibration-control devices. 7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
END OF SECTION
Duct Insulation 23 07 13 - 7 This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 23 11 23 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping and tubing joining materials. 3. Manual gas shutoff valves.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Piping specialties. 2. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected models. 3. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. 4. Service meters. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. Include bypass fittings.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
Facility Natural-Gas Piping 23 11 23 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight.
D. Protect stored HDPE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located.
B. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted by the owner.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finished surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings: 1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
B. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig or less.
2.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends. 4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: a. Material Group: 1.1.
Facility Natural-Gas Piping 23 11 23 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings, and spiral-wound metal gaskets. e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel underground. 5. Mechanical Couplings: a. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish. b. Buna-nitrile seals. c. Steel bolts, washers, and nuts. d. Coupling shall be capable of joining HDPE pipe to HDPE pipe, steel pipe to HDPE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. e. Steel body couplings installed underground on plastic pipe shall be factory equipped with anode. 6. Approved manufacturers: a. Wheatland tube b. American piping. c. US Steel. d. Federal Steel. e. Or approved equal.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES
A. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33. 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller. 6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body.
B. Two-Piece, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 1. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 2. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 3. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 4. Seats: Reinforced TFE.
Facility Natural-Gas Piping 23 11 23 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
5. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 6. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 7. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 8. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. 10. Approved manufacturers: a. AY McDonald b. Appollo c. BrassCraft d. Lyall RW & Co. e. Perfection Corp. f. Or approved equal
C. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 2. Plug: Bronze. 3. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 4. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 5. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 6. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. 8. Approved manufacturers: a. AY McDonald b. Lee Brass Co. c. Or approved equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.
Facility Natural-Gas Piping 23 11 23 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.
C. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.
3.3 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
G. Locate valves for easy access.
H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.
I. Install piping free of sags and bends.
J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.
M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing. 1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.
Facility Natural-Gas Piping 23 11 23 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.
O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.
P. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.
Q. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
R. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.
S. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.
T. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.
U. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
V. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.
W. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.
B. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.
3.5 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
C. Threaded Joints: 1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
Facility Natural-Gas Piping 23 11 23 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
D. Welded Joints: 1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators. 2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction.
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 5. NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.
B. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.
C. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.
D. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.
3.8 PAINTING
A. Clean, prime, and paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to the International Fuel Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
Facility Natural-Gas Piping 23 11 23 - 7 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.10 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.
3.11 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 5 PSIG
A. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.
3.12 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve.
B. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following: 1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve.
END OF SECTION
Facility Natural-Gas Piping 23 11 23 - 8 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Insulated flexible ducts. 2. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 3. Single-wall round ducts and fittings. 4. Sheet metal materials. 5. Sealants and gaskets. 6. Hangers and supports.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. 1. Minimum sheet metal thickness shall be 24 gauge, regardless of what SMACNA allows.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the product
B. Shop Drawings: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation.
Metal Ducts 23 31 13 - 1
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCT
A. Insulated flexible duct shall be Flexmaster TL-M or equal.
2.2 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on 2-inch static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. Minimum sheet metal thickness shall be 24 gauge.
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.3 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
Metal Ducts 23 31 13 - 2
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
E. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Ductmate industries 2. Elgen Manufacturing 3. Linx 4. McGill Airflow 5. MKT Metal manufacturing 6. Norfab 7. SEMCO 8. Set Duct Manufacturing 9. Spiral manufacturing 10. Stamped fitting inc. 11. Or approved equal.
2.4 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.
2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS
A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke- developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
B. Tape Sealing System: 1. Water resistant. 2. Mold and mildew resistant. 3. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 4. Service: Indoor. 5. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum.
Metal Ducts 23 31 13 - 3
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.
2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
C. Strap and Rod Sizes: 18 gauge minimum thickness, 1-inch minimum width. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
D. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.
E. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.
B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install ducts in maximum practical lengths.
D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.
Metal Ducts 23 31 13 - 4
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.
G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.
J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers.
L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."
3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.
B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.
C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.
D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.
3.3 DUCT SEALING
A. Seal ducts at a minimum to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible": 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Seal Class A.
Metal Ducts 23 31 13 - 5
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."
B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick.
C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.
D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet.
F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.6 START UP
A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
3.7 DUCT SCHEDULE
A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel and as follows:
B. Supply, Return, outside air Ducts: a. Pressure Class: Positive/negative 4-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
C. Elbow Configuration:
Metal Ducts 23 31 13 - 6
Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow. 3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow.
END OF SECTION
Metal Ducts 23 31 13 - 7
This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 23 74 16.11 PACKAGED, SMALL-CAPACITY, ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes packaged, small-capacity, rooftop air-conditioning units (RTUs) with the following components and accessories: 1. Casings. 2. Fans. 3. Motors. 4. Coils. 5. Refrigerant circuit components. 6. Air filtration. 7. Gas furnaces. 8. Dampers. 9. Electrical power connections. 10. Controls. 11. Accessories. 12. Roof curbs.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. DDC: Direct digital controls.
B. ECM: Electronically commutated motor.
C. MERV: Minimum efficiency reporting value.
D. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the outdoor-air stream to reject heat during cooling operations and to absorb heat during heating operations. "Outdoor air" is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system.
E. RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, this abbreviation means packaged, small- capacity, rooftop air-conditioning units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit is mounted on the roof or on a concrete base on ground.
F. Supply-Air Fan: The fan providing supply air to conditioned space. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.
G. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the supply-air stream to absorb heat (provide cooling) during cooling operations and to reject heat (provide heating) during heating operations. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air- conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.
Packaged, Small-Capacity, Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units 23 74 16.11 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each RTU. 1. Include manufacturer's technical data. 2. Include rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Structural members to which RTUs will be attached. 2. Roof openings. 3. Roof curbs and flashing.
B. Field quality-control reports.
C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For RTUs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fan Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven fan. 2. Filters: One set(s) of filters for each unit.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of RTUs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Gas Furnace Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Solid-State Ignition Modules: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion.
Packaged, Small-Capacity, Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units 23 74 16.11 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Approved manufacturers: 1. Aaon 2. Addison 3. Carrier 4. Daikin 5. Lennox 6. Ruud 7. Rheem 8. Trane 9. Valent 10. York 11. Or approved equal
B. AHRI Compliance: 1. Comply with AHRI 210/240 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs. 2. Comply with AHRI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs. 3. Comply with AHRI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs. 4. Comply with AHRI 1060 for testing and rating performance for air-to-air exchanger.
C. AMCA Compliance: 1. Comply with AMCA 11 and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal for air and sound performance according to AMCA 211 and AMCA 311. 2. Damper leakage tested according to AMCA 500-D. 3. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
D. ASHRAE Compliance: 1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigeration system safety. 2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
E. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
G. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.
H. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
Packaged, Small-Capacity, Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units 23 74 16.11 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.2 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS
A. Supply-Air Fan: 1. Fan Type: centrifugal.
B. Relief (Exhaust)-Air Fan: 1. Airflow: 75-90% of supply fan CFM.
C. Compressors: 1. Number of Refrigerant Circuits: One. 2. Compressor Speed: Single.
2.3 CASINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced double-wall insulated panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed.
B. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with minimum 1-inch foam insulation and seal moisture tight for minimum R-7 performance.
C. Exterior Casing Material: Galvanized steel with factory-painted finish, with pitched roof panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs.
D. Inner Casing Fabrication Requirements: 1. Inside Casing: G-90-coated galvanized steel.
E. Condensate Drain Pans: Fabricated using rigid heavy plastic polymer, G-90-coated galvanized-steel sheet 0.028 inch thick, or stainless-steel sheet 0.025 inch thick, a minimum of 2 inches deep, and complying with ASHRAE 62.1 for design and construction of drain pans. 1. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple.
F. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
2.4 FANS
A. Supply-Air Fans: Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls. 1. Direct-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Motor shall be resiliently mounted in the fan inlet. 2. Belt-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Motors shall be installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the casing.
B. Condenser-Coil Fan: propeller, mounted on shaft of permanently lubricated motors.
C. Relief-Air Fan: mounted on permanently lubricated motor.
Packaged, Small-Capacity, Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units 23 74 16.11 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.5 MOTORS
A. Comply with Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment" and the requirements of this Article.
B. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
C. Efficiency: Premium efficient.
2.6 COILS
A. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: 1. Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing- type vertical distributor. 2. Polymer strip shall prevent all copper coils from contacting steel coil frame or condensate pan. 3. Coil Split: Interlaced.
B. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil: 1. Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing- type vertical distributor. 2. Polymer strip shall prevent all copper coils from contacting steel coil frame or condensate pan.
2.7 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS
A. Compressor: Hermetic, scroll, mounted on vibration isolators; with internal overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief.
B. Refrigeration Specialties: 1. Refrigerant: R-410A. 2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element. 3. Refrigerant filter/dryer. 4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch. 5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch. 6. Minimum off-time relay. 7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload. 8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines. 9. Low-ambient kit high-pressure sensor.
2.8 AIR FILTRATION
A. MERV-8 (Minimum arrestance and MERV according to ASHRAE 52.2)
2.9 GAS FURNACE
A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; complying with ANSI Z21.47/CSA 2.3 and NFPA 54. 1. CSA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of CSA.
Packaged, Small-Capacity, Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units 23 74 16.11 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Burners: Stainless steel. 1. Fuel: Natural gas. 2. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark or hot-surface igniter with flame sensor. 3. High-Altitude Kit: For Project elevations more than 2000 feet above sea level.
C. Heat-Exchanger and Drain Pan: Stainless steel.
D. Venting: Gravity vented.
E. Power Vent: Integral, motorized centrifugal fan interlocked with gas valve.
F. Gas Valve Train: Single-body, regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing pilot solenoid valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff.
2.10 DAMPERS
A. Leakage Rate: Comply with ASHRAE/IES 90.1.
B. Damper Motor: Modulating with adjustable minimum position.
2.11 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTIONS
A. RTU shall have a single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection.
2.12 CONTROLS
A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC."
B. Basic Unit Controls: 1. Control-voltage transformer. 2. Wall-mounted thermostat or sensor with the following features: a. Heat-cool-off switch. b. Fan on-auto switch. c. Automatic changeover. d. Adjustable deadband. e. Exposed set point. f. Exposed indication. g. Degree F indication. h. Unoccupied-period-override push button. i. Data entry and access port to input temperature set points, occupied and unoccupied periods, and output room temperature, supply-air temperature, operating mode, and status.
Packaged, Small-Capacity, Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units 23 74 16.11 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.13 ACCESSORIES
A. Duplex, 115-V, ground-fault-interrupter outlet with 15-A overcurrent protection. Include transformer if required.
B. Safeties: 1. Smoke detector. 2. Condensate overflow switch. 3. Phase-loss protection. 4. High pressure control. 5. Gas furnace airflow-proving switch.
C. Coil guards of painted, galvanized-steel wire.
D. Hail guards of galvanized steel, painted to match casing.
E. Outdoor-air intake weather hood.
2.14 ROOF CURBS
A. Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion-protection coating, watertight gaskets, and factory-installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards. 1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. a. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or II. b. Minimum Thickness: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of curb. a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet. c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have airstream surface coated with a temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric depending on service air velocity. d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.
B. Curb Dimensions: Height of 14 inches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of RTUs.
B. Examine roughing-in for RTUs to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections before equipment installation.
Packaged, Small-Capacity, Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units 23 74 16.11 - 7 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where RTUs will be installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure, according to NRCA's "NRCA Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof Systems." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with duct installation requirements specified in other HVAC Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb. 2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under entire roof curb. 3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors. 4. Install return-air duct continuously through roof structure.
B. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest roof drain or area drain.
C. Where installing piping adjacent to RTUs, allow space for service and maintenance.
D. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.
C. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. RTU will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
Packaged, Small-Capacity, Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units 23 74 16.11 - 8 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing. 3. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber. 4. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, coils, and fans. 5. Inspect internal insulation. 6. Verify that labels are clearly visible. 7. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. 8. Verify that controls are connected and operable. 9. Verify that filters are installed. 10. Clean condenser coil and inspect for construction debris. 11. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris. 12. Connect and purge gas line. 13. Remove packing from vibration isolators. 14. Inspect operation of barometric relief dampers. 15. Verify lubrication on fan and motor bearings. 16. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding. 17. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. 18. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions. a. Start refrigeration system. b. Do not operate below recommended low-ambient temperature. c. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report. 19. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences. 20. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer. 21. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing. Adjust burner for peak efficiency: a. Measure gas pressure on manifold. b. Inspect operation of power vents. c. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber. d. Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharge. e. Perform flue-gas analysis. Measure and record flue-gas carbon dioxide and oxygen concentration. f. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing rate and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air. 22. Calibrate thermostats. 23. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits. 24. Inspect outdoor-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers. 25. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following when ambient is a minimum of 15 deg F above return-air temperature: a. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. b. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. c. Outdoor-air, dry-bulb temperature. d. Outdoor-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.
Packaged, Small-Capacity, Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units 23 74 16.11 - 9 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
26. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown. 27. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve. a. Supply-air volume. b. Return-air volume. c. Relief-air volume. d. Outdoor-air intake volume. 28. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following: a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures. b. Short circuiting of air through condenser coil or from condenser fans to outdoor-air intake. 29. Verify operation of remote panel including pilot-light operation and failure modes. Inspect the following: a. High-temperature limit on gas-fired heat exchanger. b. Low-temperature safety operation. c. Filter high-pressure differential alarm. d. Economizer to minimum outdoor-air changeover. e. Relief-air fan operation. f. Smoke and firestat alarms. 30. After startup and performance testing and prior to Substantial Completion, replace existing filters with new filters.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain RTUs.
END OF SECTION
Packaged, Small-Capacity, Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units 23 74 16.11 - 10 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 23 81 29 DUCTLESS MINI-SPLIT HVAC SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes complete HVAC system(s) including, but not limited to, delegated design and the following components to make a complete operating system(s) according to requirements indicated: 1. Indoor, recessed, ceiling-mounted units. 2. Outdoor, air-source heat pump units. 3. System controls. 4. System refrigerant and oil. 5. System condensate drain piping. 6. System refrigerant piping. 7. Metal hangers and supports. 8. Metal framing systems. 9. Fastener systems. 10. Miscellaneous support materials. 11. Piping and tubing insulation. 12. System control cable and raceways.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Air-Conditioning System Operation: System capable of operation with all zones in cooling only.
B. Heat-Pump System Operation: System capable of operation with all zones in either heating or cooling, but not with simultaneous heating and cooling zones that transfer heat between zones.
C. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.
D. Plenum: A space forming part of the air distribution system to which one or more air ducts are connected. An air duct is a passageway, other than a plenum, for transporting air to or from heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning equipment.
E. VRF: Variable refrigerant flow.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for indoor and outdoor units. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3. Include operating performance at design conditions and at extreme maximum and minimum outdoor ambient conditions. 4. Include description of system controllers, dimensions, features, control interfaces and connections, power requirements, and connections. 5. Include system operating sequence of operation in narrative form for each unique indoor- and outdoor-unit control. 6. Include description of control software features. 7. Include total refrigerant required and a comprehensive breakdown of refrigerant required by each system installed. 8. Include refrigerant type and data sheets showing compliance with requirements indicated.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC systems to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Nationally recognized manufacturer of HVAC systems and products. 2. Shipped HVAC systems with similar requirements to those indicated for a continuous period of five years within time of bid. 3. HVAC systems and products that have been successfully tested and in use on at least five completed projects. 4. Having complete published catalog literature, installation, and operation and maintenance manuals for all products intended for use. 5. Having full-time in-house employees for the following: a. Product research and development. b. Product and application engineering. c. Product manufacturing, testing, and quality control. d. Technical support for system installation training, startup, commissioning, and troubleshooting of installations.
B. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: 1. Authorized representative of, and trained by, HVAC system manufacturer. 2. Demonstrated past experience with products being installed for period within three consecutive years before time of bid. 3. Demonstrated past experience on five projects of similar complexity, scope, and value. a. Each person assigned to Project shall have demonstrated past experience. 4. Staffing resources of competent and experienced full-time employees that are assigned to execute work according to schedule. 5. Service and maintenance staff assigned to support Project during warranty period. 6. Product parts inventory to support ongoing system operation for a period of not less than five years after Substantial Completion.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
7. HVAC system manufacturer's backing to take over execution of Work if necessary to comply with requirements indicated. Include Project-specific written letter, signed by manufacturer's corporate officer, if requested.
C. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by HVAC system manufacturer. 1. Each employee shall be certified by manufacturer for proper installation of systems, including, but not limited to, equipment, piping, controls, and accessories indicated and furnished for installation. 2. Installer certification shall be valid and current for duration of Project. 3. Retain copies of Installer certificates on-site and make available on request. 4. Each person assigned to Project shall have demonstrated past experience. a. Demonstrated past experience with products being installed for period within three consecutive years before time of bid. b. Demonstrated past experience on five projects of similar complexity, scope, and value. 5. Installers shall have staffing resources of competent, trained, and experienced full-time employees that are assigned to execute work according to schedule.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store products in a clean and dry place.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written rigging and installation instructions for unloading and moving to final installed location.
C. Handle products carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting, and scoring. Do not install damaged products.
D. Protect products from weather, dirt, dust, water, construction debris, and physical damage. 1. Retain factory-applied coverings on equipment to protect finishes during construction and remove just prior to operating unit. 2. Cover unit openings before installation to prevent dirt and dust from entering inside of units. If required to remover coverings during unit installation, reapply coverings over openings after unit installation and remove just prior to operating unit.
E. Replace installed products damaged during construction.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace equipment and components that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures. b. Faulty operation. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2. Warranty Period: a. For Compressor: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. b. For Parts, Including Controls: One year from date of Substantial Completion. c. For Labor: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved manufacturers: 1. Carrier corp. 2. Daikin AC 3. Fujitec 4. Johnson Controls 5. LG electronics 6. Mitsubishi 7. Samsung 8. Trane 9. Or approved equal.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain products from single source from single manufacturer including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Indoor and outdoor units, including accessories. 2. Controls and software. 3. Refrigerant isolation valves. 4. Specialty refrigerant pipe fittings.
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Direct-expansion (DX) HVAC system(s) with variable capacity in response to varying cooling and heating loads. System shall consist of indoor units, outdoor unit(s), piping, controls, and electrical power to make complete operating system(s) complying with requirements indicated.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. AHRI Compliance: System and equipment performance certified according to AHRI 1230.
D. ASHRAE Compliance: 1. ASHRAE 62.1: For indoor air quality. 2. ASHRAE 135: For control network protocol with remote communication. 3. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: For system and component energy efficiency.
E. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Service Access: 1. Provide and document service access requirements. 2. Locate equipment, system isolation valves, and other system components that require service and inspection in easily accessible locations. Avoid locations that are difficult to access if possible. 3. Where serviceable components are installed behind walls and above inaccessible ceilings, provide finished assembly with access doors or panels to gain access. Properly size the openings to allow for service, removal, and replacement. 4. If less than full and unrestricted access is provided, locate components within an 18-inch reach of the finished assembly. 5. Where ladder access is required to service elevated components, provide an installation that provides for sufficient access within ladder manufacturer's written instructions for use. 6. Comply with OSHA regulations.
B. System Design and Installation Requirements: 1. Design and install systems indicated according to manufacturer's recommendations and written instructions. 2. Where manufacturer's requirements differ from requirements indicated, contact Architect for direction. The most stringent requirements should apply unless otherwise directed in writing by Architect.
C. Isolation of Equipment: Provide isolation valves to isolate each indoor unit and outdoor unit for service, removal, and replacement without interrupting system operation.
D. Outdoor Conditions: 1. Suitable for outdoor ambient conditions encountered. 2. Maximum System Operating Outdoor Temperature: See Drawings. 3. Minimum System Operating Outdoor Temperature: See Drawings.
E. Thermal Movements: Allow for controlled thermal movements from ambient, surface, and system temperature changes.
F. Capacities and Characteristics: As indicated on Drawings.
2.4 INDOOR, RECESSED, CEILING-MOUNTED UNITS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested complete unit with components, piping, condensate pump, wiring, and controls required for mating to ductwork, piping, power, and controls field connections.
B. Cabinet: 1. Material: Painted steel, or coated steel frame covered by a plastic cabinet, with an architectural acceptable finish suitable for tenant occupancy on exposed surfaces. 2. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard internal insulation, complying with ASHRAE 62.1, to provide thermal resistance and prevent condensation. 3. Mounting: Manufacturer-designed provisions for field installation.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
4. Internal Access: Removable panels of adequate size for field access to internal components for inspection, cleaning, service, and replacement.
C. DX Coil Assembly: 1. Coil Casing: Aluminum, galvanized, or stainless steel. 2. Coil Fins: Aluminum, mechanically bonded to tubes, with arrangement required by performance. 3. Coil Tubes: Copper, of diameter and thickness required by performance. 4. Expansion Valve: Electronic modulating type with linear or proportional characteristics. 5. Internal Tubing: Copper tubing with brazed joints. 6. Internal Tubing Insulation: Manufacturer's standard insulation, of thickness to prevent condensation. 7. Field Piping Connections: Manufacturer's standard. 8. Factory Charge: Dehydrated air or nitrogen. 9. Testing: Factory pressure tested and verified to be without leaks.
D. Drain Assembly: 1. Pan: Non-ferrous material, with bottom sloped to low point drain connection. 2. Condensate Removal: Unit-mounted pump or other integral lifting mechanism, capable of lifting drain water to an elevation above top of cabinet. 3. Field Piping Connection: Non-ferrous material.
E. Fan and Motor Assembly: 1. Fan(s): a. Direct-drive arrangement. b. Single or multiple fans connected to a common motor shaft and driven by a single motor. c. Fabricated from non-ferrous components or ferrous components with corrosion protection finish. d. Wheels statically and dynamically balanced. 2. Motor: Brushless dc or electronically commutated with permanently lubricated bearings. 3. Motor Protection: Integral protection against thermal, overload, and voltage fluctuations. 4. Speed Settings and Control: Two (low, high), three (low, medium, high), or more than three speed settings or variable speed with a speed range of least 50 percent. 5. Vibration Control: Integral isolation to dampen vibration transmission.
F. Filter Assembly: 1. Access: Bottom, to accommodate filter replacement without the need for tools. 2. Media: If more than one filter type is indicated, Contractor has option to choose. a. Replaceable: Extended surface, panel, or cartridge with antimicrobial treatment fiber media. b. Washable: Manufacturer's standard filter with antimicrobial treatment.
G. Discharge-Air Grille Assembly: Mounted in bottom of unit cabinet. 1. Discharge Pattern: One-, two-, three-, or four-way throw as indicated on Drawings.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
a. Discharge Pattern Adjustment: Field-adjustable limits for up and down range of motion. b. Discharge Pattern Closure: Ability to close individual discharges of units with multiple patterns. 2. Motorized Vanes: Modulating up and down flow pattern for uniform room air distribution. 3. Additional Branch Supply Duct Connection: Sheet metal knockout for optional connection to one additional supply branch duct.
H. Return-Air Grille Assembly: Manufacturer's standard grille mounted in bottom of unit cabinet.
I. Outdoor Air Ventilation Connection: Sheet metal knockout for optional connection to outdoor air ventilation duct.
J. Unit Accessories: 1. Outdoor Air Ventilation Kit: Connection, motorized damper, and control to satisfy unit control sequence of operation indicated on Drawings. 2. Remote Room Temperature Sensor Kit: Wall-mounted, hardwired room temperature sensor kit for use in rooms that do not have room temperature measurement.
K. Unit Controls: 1. Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard, and suitable for indoor locations. 2. Factory-Installed Controller: Configurable digital control. 3. Communication: Network communication with other indoor units and outdoor unit(s). 4. Cable and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard with each connection labeled and corresponding to a unit-mounted wiring diagram. 5. Field Connection: Manufacturer's standard with each connection labeled and corresponding to a unit-mounted wiring diagram.
L. Unit Electrical: 1. Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard, and suitable for indoor locations. 2. Field Connection: Single point connection to power entire unit and integral controls. 3. Disconnecting Means: Factory-mounted circuit breaker or switch, complying with NFPA 70. 4. Control Transformer: Manufacturer's standard. Coordinate requirements with field power supply. 5. Wiring: Manufacturer's standard with each connection labeled and corresponding to a unit-mounted wiring diagram. 6. Raceways: Enclose line voltage wiring in metal raceways to comply with NFPA 70.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 7 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.5 OUTDOOR, AIR-SOURCE HEAT PUMP UNITS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested complete unit with components, piping, wiring, and controls required for mating to piping, power, and controls field connections. 1. All units installed shall be from the same product development generation.
B. Cabinet: 1. Galvanized steel and coated with a corrosion-resistant finish. 2. Mounting: Manufacturer-designed provisions for field installation. 3. Internal Access: Removable panels or hinged doors of adequate size for field access to internal components for inspection, cleaning, service, and replacement.
C. Compressor and Motor Assembly: 1. One or more positive-displacement, direct-drive and hermetically sealed scroll compressor(s) with inverter drive and turndown to 15 percent of rated capacity. 2. Protection: Integral protection against the following: a. High refrigerant pressure. b. Low oil level. c. High oil temperature. d. Thermal and overload. e. Voltage fluctuations. f. Phase failure and phase reversal. g. Short cycling. 3. Speed Control: Variable to automatically maintain refrigerant suction and condensing pressures while varying refrigerant flow to satisfy system cooling and heating loads. 4. Vibration Control: Integral isolation to dampen vibration transmission. 5. Oil management system to ensure safe and proper lubrication over entire operating range. 6. Crankcase heaters with integral control to maintain safe operating temperature. 7. Fusible plug.
D. Condenser Coil Assembly: 1. Plate Fin Coils: a. Casing: Aluminum, galvanized, or stainless steel. b. Fins: Aluminum or copper, mechanically bonded to tubes, with arrangement required by performance. c. Tubes: Copper, of diameter and thickness required by performance. 2. Aluminum Microchannel Coils: a. Series of flat tubes containing a series of multiple, parallel-flow microchannels layered between refrigerant header manifolds. b. Single- or multiple-pass arrangement. c. Construct fins, tubes, and header manifolds of aluminum alloy. 3. Hail Protection: Provide condenser coils with louvers, baffles, or hoods to protect against hail damage.
E. Condenser Fan and Motor Assembly: 1. Fan(s): Propeller type. a. Direct-drive arrangement.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 8 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
b. Fabricated from non-ferrous components or ferrous components with corrosion protection finish to match performance indicated for condenser coil. c. Statically and dynamically balanced. 2. Fan Guards: Removable safety guards complying with OSHA regulations. If using metal materials, coat with corrosion-resistant coating to match performance indicated for condenser coil. 3. Motor(s): Brushless dc or electronically commutated with permanently lubricated bearings and rated for outdoor duty. 4. Motor Protection: Integral protection against thermal, overload, and voltage fluctuations. 5. Speed Settings and Control: Variable speed with a speed range of least 75 percent. 6. Vibration Control: Integral isolation to dampen vibration transmission.
F. Drain Pan: If required by manufacturer's design, provide unit with non-ferrous drain pan with bottom sloped to a low point drain connection.
G. Unit Controls: 1. Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard, and suitable for unprotected outdoor locations. 2. Factory-Installed Controller: Configurable digital control. 3. Factory-Installed Sensors: a. Refrigerant suction temperature. b. Refrigerant discharge temperature. c. Outdoor air temperature. d. Refrigerant high pressure. e. Refrigerant low pressure. f. Oil level. 4. Communication: Network communication with indoor units and other outdoor unit(s). 5. Cable and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard with each connection labeled and corresponding to a unit-mounted wiring diagram. 6. Field Connection: Manufacturer's standard with each connection labeled and corresponding to a unit-mounted wiring diagram.
H. Unit Electrical: 1. Enclosure: Metal, similar to enclosure, and suitable for unprotected outdoor locations. 2. Field Connection: Single point connection to power entire unit and integral controls. 3. Disconnecting Means: Factory-mounted circuit breaker or switch, complying with NFPA 70. 4. Control Transformer: Manufacturer's standard. Coordinate requirements with field power supply. 5. Wiring: Manufacturer's standard with each connection labeled and corresponding to a unit-mounted wiring diagram. 6. Raceways: Enclose line voltage wiring in metal raceways to comply with NFPA 70.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 9 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
I. Unit Piping: 1. Unit Tubing: Copper tubing with brazed joints. 2. Unit Tubing Insulation: Manufacturer's standard insulation, of thickness to prevent condensation. 3. Field Piping Connections: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Factory Charge: Dehydrated air or nitrogen. 5. Testing: Factory pressure tested and verified to be without leaks.
2.6 SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL
A. Refrigerant: 1. R-410a.
B. Oil: 1. As required by HVAC system manufacturer and to comply with performance requirements indicated.
2.7 SYSTEM CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING
A. If more than one material is listed, material selection is Contractor's option.
B. Copper Tubing: 1. Drawn-Temper Tubing: According to ASTM B 88, Type L or Type DWV according to ASTM B 306. 2. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. 3. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. 4. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys, and water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.
2.8 SYSTEM REFRIGERANT PIPING
A. Comply with equipment manufacturer’s requirements.
B. Refrigerant Piping: 1. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR. 2. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. 3. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M.
C. Refrigerant Tubing Kits: 1. Furnished by HVAC system manufacturer. 2. Factory-rolled and -bundled, soft-copper tubing with tubing termination fittings at each end. 3. Standard one-piece length for connecting to indoor units. 4. Pre-insulated with flexible elastomeric insulation of thickness to comply with governing energy code and sufficient to eliminate condensation. 5. Factory Charge: Dehydrated air or nitrogen.
D. Divided-Flow Specialty Fittings: Where required by HVAC system manufacturer for proper system operation, HVAC system manufacturer shall furnish specialty fittings with identification and instructions for proper installation by Installer.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 10 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
E. Refrigerant Isolation Ball Valves: 1. Description: Uni-body full port design, rated for maximum system temperature and pressure, and factory tested under pressure to ensure tight shutoff. Designed for valve operation without removing seal cap. 2. Seals: Compatible with system refrigerant and oil. Seal service life of at least 20 years. 3. Valve Connections: Flare or sweat depending on size.
2.9 METAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Copper Tube Hangers: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory- fabricated components. 2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of galvanized or copper-coated steel.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS SUPPORT MATERIALS
A. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; galvanized.
C. Threaded Rods: Continuously threaded. Zinc-plated steel or galvanized steel for indoor applications and stainless steel for outdoor applications. Mating nuts and washers of similar material as rods.
2.11 PIPING AND TUBING INSULATION
A. Condensate Drain Piping and Tubing Insulation and Jacket Requirements: 1. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: a. Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials, complying with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials. b. Indoors: 1/2 inch thick.
B. Refrigerant Tubing Insulation and Jacket Requirements: 1. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: a. Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials, complying with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials. 1/2inchthick. 2. Field-Applied Jacket: a. Indoors, Exposed to View: None required. b. Outdoors, Exposed to View: Aluminum, smooth, 0.020 inch thick.
C. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 11 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
D. Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: Aluminum.
2.12 SYSTEM CONTROL CABLE
A. Cable Rating: Listed and labeled for application according to NFPA 70. 1. Flame Travel and Smoke Density in Plenums: As determined by testing identical products according to NFPA 262, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products for installation in plenums with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame Travel Distance: 60 inches or less. b. Peak Optical Smoke Density: 0.5 or less. c. Average Optical Smoke Density: 0.15 or less. 2. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Riser Cables in Non-Plenum Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1666. 3. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Cables in Non-Riser Applications and Non- Plenum Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1685.
B. Low-Voltage Control Cabling: 1. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG. a. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) or No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned-copper conductors as required by HVAC system manufacturer. b. PVC insulation. c. Braided or foil shielded. d. PVC jacket. e. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1685. 2. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. a. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) or No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned-copper conductors as required by HVAC system manufacturer. b. PVC insulation. c. Braided or foil shielded. d. PVC jacket. e. NFPA 262 includes the standard flame-resistance test criteria in common use for cables and conductors. f. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.
2.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect factory-assembled equipment.
B. Equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports for historical record. Submit reports only if requested.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 12 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine products before installation. Reject products that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Examine roughing-in for piping and tubing to verify actual locations of connections before equipment installation.
D. Examine roughing-in for ductwork to verify actual locations of connections before equipment installation.
E. Examine roughing-in for wiring and conduit to verify actual locations of connections before equipment installation.
F. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and outdoor pads for suitable conditions where equipment will be installed.
G. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.
H. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Clearance: 1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. 2. Maintain clearances required by governing code.
B. Loose Components: Install components, devices, and accessories furnished by manufacturer, with equipment, that are not factory mounted.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF INDOOR UNITS
A. Install units to be level and plumb while providing a neat and finished appearance.
B. Unless otherwise required by HVAC system manufacturer, support ceiling-mounted units from structure above using threaded rods; minimum rod size of 3/8 inch.
C. Adjust supports of exposed and recessed units to draw units tight to adjoining surfaces.
D. Protect finished surfaces of ceilings, floors, and walls that come in direct contact with units. Refinish or replaced damaged areas after units are installed.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 13 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
E. In rooms with ceilings, conceal piping and tubing, controls, and electrical power serving units above ceilings.
F. In rooms without ceiling, arrange piping and tubing, controls, and electrical power serving units to provide a neat and finished appearance.
G. Provide lateral bracing if needed to limit movement of suspended units to not more than 0.25 inch.
H. For wall-mounted units that are exposed, conceal piping and tubing, controls, and electrical power serving units within walls.
I. Attachment: Install hardware for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF OUTDOOR UNITS
A. Install units to be level and plumb while providing a neat and finished appearance.
B. Install outdoor units on support structures indicated on Drawings.
C. Pad-Mounted Installations: Install outdoor units on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. 1. Attachment: Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 2. Grouting: Place grout under equipment supports and make bearing surface smooth.
3.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping and tubing systems. Install piping and tubing as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B. Install piping and tubing in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
C. Install piping and tubing at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
D. Install piping and tubing above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
E. Install piping and tubing to permit valve servicing.
F. Install piping and tubing at indicated slopes.
G. Install piping and tubing free of sags.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 14 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
I. Install piping and tubing to allow application of insulation.
J. Install groups of pipes and tubing parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation with service access between insulated piping and tubing.
K. Install sleeves for piping and tubing penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
L. Install escutcheons for piping and tubing penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEM CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING
A. General Requirements for Drain Piping and Tubing: 1. Install a union in piping at each threaded unit connection. 2. Install an adjustable stainless-steel hose clamp with adjustable gear operator on unit hose connections. Tighten clamp to provide a leak-free installation. 3. If required for unit installation, provide a trap assembly in drain piping to prevent air circulated through unit from passing through drain piping. Comply with more stringent of the following: a. Details indicated on Drawings. b. Manufacturer's requirements. c. Governing codes. d. In the absence of requirements, comply with requirements of ASHRAE handbooks. 4. Extend drain piping from units with drain connections to drain receptors as indicated on Drawings. If not indicated on Drawings, terminate drain connection at nearest accessible location that is not exposed to view by occupants. 5. Provide each 90-degree change in direction with a Y- or T-fitting. Install a threaded plug connection in the dormant side of fitting or future use as a service cleanout.
B. Gravity Drains: 1. Slope piping from unit connection toward drain termination at a constant slope of not less than two percent.
C. Pumped Drains: 1. If unit condensate pump or lift mechanism is not included with an integral check valve, install a full-size check valve in each branch pipe near unit connection to prevent backflow into unit.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERANT PIPING
A. Size and install refrigerant piping in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s requirements.
B. Refrigerant Tubing Kits: 1. Unroll and straighten tubing to suit installation. Deviations in straightness of exposed tubing shall be unnoticeable to observer. 2. Support tubing using hangers and supports indicated at intervals not to exceed 5 feet. Minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 15 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3. Prepare tubing ends and make mating connections to provide a pressure tight and leak-free installation.
C. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15 and governing codes.
D. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
E. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints and fittings.
F. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or panels if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.
G. Install refrigerant piping and tubing in protective conduit where installed belowground.
H. Install refrigerant piping and tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical damage.
I. Unless otherwise required by HVAC system manufacturer, slope refrigerant piping and tubing as follows: 1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping and tubing with a uniform slope downward away from compressor. 2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. 3. Install traps to entrain oil in vertical runs. 4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
J. When brazing, remove or protect components that could be damaged by heat.
K. Before installation, clean piping, tubing, and fittings to cleanliness level required by HVAC system manufacturer.
L. Joint Construction: 1. Ream ends of tubes and remove burrs. 2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of tube and fittings before assembly. 3. Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter. a. Use Type BCuP (copper-phosphorus) alloy for joining copper fittings with copper tubing. b. Use Type BAg (cadmium-free silver) alloy for joining copper with bronze.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF METAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 16 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
C. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified.
D. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.
E. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
F. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
G. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
H. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
I. Piping and Tubing Insulation: 1. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. 2. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. 3. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction. 4. Multiple horizontal pipes located indoors may use metal framing systems with split clamp attachment for each pipe in lieu if individual clevis hangers. 5. Pipe stands for horizontal pipes located outdoors. 6. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. 7. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from scratching pipe.
K. Horizontal Piping Hanger Spacing and Rod Size: Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. Sizes through NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 17 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
6. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
L. Plastic Pipe Hanger and Support Spacing: 1. Space hangers and supports according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions for service conditions. 2. Maximum spacing, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
M. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8). 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): If longer ends are required for riser clamps.
N. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at midpoint intervals between floors, not to exceed 5 feet.
O. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified.
P. Use hangers, supports, and attachments with galvanized coatings unless otherwise indicated.
Q. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
R. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1 inch.
S. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. 4. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
T. Building Attachments: Install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar- joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 18 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. 13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND TUBING INSULATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. Installation to maintain a continuous vapor barrier.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are unavailable, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.
3.10 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and in applicable Division 26 Sections.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 19 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. To extent electrical power is required for system equipment, components, and controls, and is not indicated on Drawings and addressed in the Specifications, the design for such electrical power shall be delegated to HVAC system provider. 1. Delegated design of electrical power to equipment, components and controls, and associated installation shall be included at no additional cost to Owner.
C. Connect field electrical power source to each separate electrical device requiring field electrical power. Coordinate termination point and connection type with Installer.
D. Install nameplate or acrylic label with self-adhesive back for each electrical connection indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection. 1. Nameplate shall be laminated phenolic layers of black with engraved white letters. Letters at least 1/2 inch high. 2. Locate nameplate or label where easily visible.
E. Comply with TIA-569-D for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points.
F. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.
G. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system.
3.11 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEM CONTROL CABLE
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Installation Method: 1. Install cables in raceways except as follows: a. Within equipment and associated control enclosures. b. In accessible ceiling spaces where open cable installation method may be used. c. In gypsum board partitions where cable may be enclosed within wall cavity. 2. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.
C. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA-568-C Series of standards. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems." 3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels. 4. Cables may not be spliced and shall be continuous from terminal to terminal. Do not splice cable. 5. Cables serving a common system may be grouped in a common raceway. Install control cable in separate raceway from power wiring. Do not group conductors from different systems or different voltages. 6. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 20 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems." Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Do not use heat lamps for heating. 10. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems." Monitor cable pull tensions. 11. Support: Do not allow cables to lie on removable ceiling tiles or access panels. 12. Secure: Fasten securely in place with hardware specifically designed and installed so as to not damage cables. 13. Provide strain relief. 14. Keep runs short. Allow extra length for connecting to terminals. 15. Do not bend cables in a radius less than 10 times the cable OD. 16. Use sleeves or grommets to protect cables from vibration at points where they pass around sharp corners and through penetrations. 17. Ground wire shall be copper, and grounding methods shall comply with IEEE C2. Demonstrate ground resistance.
D. Balanced Twisted-Pair Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA-568-C.2. 2. Do not untwist balanced twisted-pair cables more than 1/2 inch at the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.
E. Open-Cable Installation: 1. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 30 inches apart. 2. Cable shall not be run through or on structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Do not run cables between structural members and corrugated panels.
F. Separation from EMI Sources: Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-D recommendations for separating unshielded cable from potential EMI sources including electrical power wiring and equipment.
3.12 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system with permanent signage.
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage HVAC system manufacturer's service representative to advise and assist installers; witness testing; and observe and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including controls and connections. 1. Field service shall be performed by an employee or a factory-trained and - authorized service representative of HVAC system manufacturer whose primary job responsibilities are to provide direct technical support of its products.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 21 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
a. Additional factory-authorized representatives may assist with completion of certain activities only if supervised by manufacturer's employee. A factory-authorized representative shall not provide assistance without manufacturer's employee supervision.
B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of manufacturer's service representative: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C. Refrigerant Tubing Positive Pressure Testing: 1. Comply with more stringent of HVAC system manufacturer's requirements and requirements indicated. 2. After completion of tubing installation, pressurize tubing systems to a test pressure of not less than 1.2 times HVAC system operating pressure, but not less than 600 psig, using dry nitrogen. 3. Successful testing shall maintain a test pressure for a continuous and uninterrupted period of 24 hours. Allowance for pressure changes attributed to changes in ambient temperature are acceptable. 4. Prepare test report to record the following information for each test: a. Name of person starting test, company name, phone number, and e-mail address. b. Name of manufacturer's service representative witnessing test, company name, phone number, and e-mail address. c. Detailed description of extent of tubing tested. d. Date and time at start of test. e. Test pressure at start of test. f. Outdoor temperature at start of test. g. Name of person ending test, company name, phone number, and e-mail address. h. Date and time at end of test. i. Test pressure at end of test. j. Outdoor temperature at end of test. k. Remarks: 5. Submit test reports for Project record.
D. Refrigerant Tubing Evacuation Testing: 1. Comply with more stringent of HVAC system manufacturer's requirements and requirements indicated. 2. After completion of tubing positive-pressure testing, evacuate tubing systems to a pressure of 500 microns. 3. Successful testing shall maintain a test pressure for a continuous and uninterrupted period of one hour(s) with no change.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 22 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
4. Prepare test report to record the following information for each test: a. Name of person starting test, company name, phone number, and e-mail address. b. Name of manufacturer's service representative witnessing test, company name, phone number, and e-mail address. c. Detailed description of extent of tubing tested. d. Date and time at start of test. e. Test pressure at start of test. f. Outdoor temperature at start of test. g. Name of person ending test, company name, phone number, and e-mail address. h. Date and time at end of test. i. Test pressure at end of test. j. Outdoor temperature at end of test. k. Remarks: 5. Submit test reports for Project record. 6. Upon successful completion of evacuation testing, system shall be charged with refrigerant.
E. System Refrigerant Charge: 1. Using information collected from the refrigerant tubing evacuation testing, system Installer shall consult variable refrigerant system manufacturer to determine the correct system refrigerant charge. 2. Installer shall charge system following HVAC system manufacturer's written instructions. 3. System refrigerant charging shall be witnessed by system manufacturer's representative. 4. Total refrigerant charge shall be recorded and permanently displayed at the system's outdoor unit.
F. Products will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
G. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.14 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a HVAC system manufacturer's service representative to perform system(s) startup service. 1. Service representative shall be an employee or a factory-trained and -authorized service representative of HVAC system manufacturer. 2. Complete startup service of each separate system. 3. Complete system startup service according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Startup checks shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Check control communications of equipment and each operating component in system(s). 2. Check each indoor unit's response to demand for cooling and heating. 3. Check each indoor unit's response to changes in airflow settings. 4. Check each indoor unit and outdoor unit for proper condensate removal.
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 23 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
5. Check sound levels of each indoor and outdoor unit.
C. Installer shall accompany manufacturer's service representative during startup service and provide manufacturer's service representative with requested documentation and technical support during startup service. 1. Installer shall correct deficiencies found during startup service for reverification.
D. System Operation Report: 1. After completion of startup service, manufacturer shall issue a report for each separate system. 2. Report shall include complete documentation describing each startup check, the result, and any corrective action required.
3.15 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust equipment and components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points. Adjust initial airflow settings and discharge airflow patterns.
C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges according to HVAC system manufacturer's written instructions, and as indicated.
3.16 PROTECTION
A. Protect products from moisture and water damage. Remove and replace products that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
B. Protect equipment from physical damage. Replace equipment with physical damage that cannot be repaired to new condition. Observable surface imperfections shall be grounds for removal and replacement.
C. Protect equipment from electrical damage. Replace equipment suffering electrical damage.
D. Cover and seal openings of equipment to keep inside of equipment clean. Do not remove covers until finish work is complete.
3.17 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain entire system.
B. Training Materials: Provide training materials to each attendee.
END OF SECTION
Ductless Mini-Split HVAC Systems 23 81 29 - 24 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less. 2. Metal-clad cable, Type MC, rated 600 V or less. 3. Armored cable, Type AC, rated 600 V or less. 4. Photovoltaic cable, Type PV, rated 2000 V or less. 5. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 05 13 "Medium-Voltage Cables" for single-conductor and multiconductor cables, cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution systems with 601 to 35,000 V. 2. Section 26 05 23 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control systems communications cables and Classes 1, 2, and 3 control cables. 3. Section 27 13 13 "Communications Copper Backbone Cabling" for twisted pair cabling used for data circuits. 4. Section 27 15 13 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling" for twisted pair cabling used for data circuits.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. RoHS: Restriction of Hazardous Substances.
B. VFC: Variable-frequency controller.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer's authorized service representative.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables 26 05 19 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE
A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements. 1. Alpha Wire Company 2. General Cable Technologies Company 3. Southwire Company 4. Engineer approved equal
C. Standards: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. RoHS compliant. 3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."
D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8 for stranded conductors.
E. Conductor Insulation: 1. Type NM: Comply with UL 83 and UL 719. 2. Type RHH and Type RHW-2: Comply with UL 44. 3. Type USE-2 and Type SE: Comply with UL 854. 4. Type TC-ER: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 1277. 5. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83. 6. Type THW and Type THW-2: Comply with NEMA WC-70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 83. 7. Type UF: Comply with UL 83 and UL 493. 8. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.
F. Shield: 1. Type TC-ER: Cable designed for use with VFCs, with oversized crosslinked polyethylene insulation, spiral-wrapped foil plus 85 percent coverage braided shields and insulated full-size ground wire, and sunlight- and oil-resistant outer PVC jacket.
2.2 METAL-CLAD CABLE, TYPE MC
A. Description: A factory assembly of one or more current-carrying insulated conductors in an overall metallic sheath.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements. 1. Alpha Wire Company 2. General Cable Technologies Company 3. Southwire Company
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables 26 05 19 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
4. Engineer approved equal
C. Standards: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. Comply with UL 1569. 3. RoHS compliant. 4. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."
D. Circuits: 1. Single circuit.
E. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8 for stranded conductors.
F. Ground Conductor: Insulated.
G. Conductor Insulation: 1. Type THHN/THWN-2: Comply with UL 83. 2. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44.
H. Armor: Aluminum, interlocked.
I. Do not use snap in style fittings with type MC cable.
2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements. 1. 3M Electrical Products 2. AFC Cable Systems 3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. NSi Industries LLC 5. TE Connectivity Ltd. 6. Thomas & Betts Corp. 7. Engineer approved equal
C. Jacketed Cable Connectors: For steel and aluminum jacketed cables, zinc die-cast with set screws, designed to connect conductors specified in this Section.
D. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section. 1. Material: Aluminum. 2. Type: Two hole with long barrels. 3. Termination: Compression.
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables 26 05 19 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
C. Power-Limited Fire Alarm and Control: Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.
B. Exposed Feeders: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.
C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
E. Feeders Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
F. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
I. Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
J. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.
K. VFC Output Circuits: Type XHHW-2 in metal conduit.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables 26 05 19 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.
C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.
E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.
F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
G. Complete cable tray systems installation according to Section 260536 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" prior to installing conductors and cables.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.
B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.
3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables 26 05 19 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each of the following visual and electrical tests: a. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical damage and correct connection according to the single-line diagram. b. Test bolted connections for high resistance using one of the following: 1) A low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Calibrated torque wrench. 3) Thermographic survey. c. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation. d. Inspect for correct identification. e. Inspect cable jacket and condition. f. Insulation-resistance test on each conductor for ground and adjacent conductors. Apply a potential of 500-V dc for 300-V rated cable and 1000-V dc for 600-V rated cable for a one-minute duration. g. Continuity test on each conductor and cable. h. Uniform resistance of parallel conductors.
B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports to record the following: 1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements, and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables 26 05 19 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 26 05 23 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Category 6 balanced twisted pair cable. 2. Balanced twisted pair cabling hardware. 3. RS-485 cabling. 4. Low-voltage control cabling. 5. Control-circuit conductors. 6. Identification products.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.
C. Plenum: A space forming part of the air distribution system to which one or more air ducts are connected. An air duct is a passageway, other than a plenum, for transporting air to or from heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning equipment.
D. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Flame Travel and Smoke Density in Plenums: As determined by testing identical products according to NFPA 262, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products for installation in plenums with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame Travel Distance: 60 inches or less. 2. Peak Optical Smoke Density: 0.5 or less. 3. Average Optical Smoke Density: 0.15 or less.
Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 23 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Riser Cables in Non-Plenum Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1666.
D. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Cables in Non-Riser Applications and Non-Plenum Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1685.
2.2 CATEGORY 6 BALANCED TWISTED PAIR CABLE
A. Description: Four-pair, balanced-twisted pair cable, with internal spline, certified to meet transmission characteristics of Category 6 cable at frequencies up to 250MHz.
B. Manufactures: Subject to compliance with project requirements. 1. 3M 2. Belden Inc. 3. CommScope, Inc. 4. Hitachi Cable America, Inc. 5. Mohawk; a division of Belden Inc. 6. ComCables, Inc. 7. Engineer approved equal
C. Standard: Comply with NEMA WC 66/ICEA S-116-732 and TIA-568-C.2 for Category 6 cables.
D. Conductors: 100-ohm, 23 AWG solid copper.
E. Shielding/Screening: Unshielded twisted pairs (UTP).
F. Cable Rating: Plenum.
G. Jacket: thermoplastic.
2.3 BALANCED TWISTED PAIR CABLE HARDWARE
A. Description: Hardware designed to connect, splice, and terminate balanced twisted pair copper communications cable.
B. Manufactures: Subject to compliance with project requirements. 1. 3M 2. Belden Inc. 3. CommScope, Inc. 4. Mohawk; a division of Belden Inc. 5. ComCables, Inc. 6. Engineer approved equal
C. General Requirements for Balanced Twisted Pair Cable Hardware: 1. Comply with the performance requirements of Category 6. 2. Comply with TIA-568-C.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. 3. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.
Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 23 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
D. Plugs and Plug Assemblies: 1. Male; eight position; color-coded modular telecommunications connector designed for termination of a single four-pair 100-ohm unshielded or shielded balanced twisted pair cable. 2. Comply with IEC 60603-7-1, IEC 60603-7-2, IEC 60603-7-3, IEC 60603-7-4, and IEC 60603-7.5. 3. Marked to indicate transmission performance.
2.4 RS-485 CABLE
A. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. Paired, two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors. 2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262.
2.5 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE
A. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. Multi-pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors. 2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.
2.6 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A. Manufactures: Subject to compliance with project requirements. 1. Encore Wire Corp. 2. General Cable Corp 3. Service Wire Company 4. Southwire Company 5. Engineer approved equal
B. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN/THWN-2, complying with UL 83 in raceway.
C. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN/THWN-2, complying with UL 83 in raceway.
D. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN/THWN-2, complying with UL 83 in raceway.
E. Class 2 Control Circuits and Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits That Supply Critical Circuits: Circuit Integrity (CI) cable. 1. Smoke control signaling and control circuits.
Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 23 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory test twisted pair cables according to TIA-568-C.2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Test cables on receipt at Project site. 1. Test each pair of twisted pair cable for open and short circuits.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND BOXES
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for raceway selection and installation requirements for boxes, conduits, and wireways as supplemented or modified in this Section. 1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep. 2. Outlet boxes for cables shall be no smaller than 4 inches square by 1-1/2 inches deep with extension ring sized to bring edge of ring to within 1/8 inch of the finished wall surface. 3. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.
B. Comply with TIA-569-D for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points.
C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.
D. Raceway Installation in Equipment Rooms: 1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard if a single piece of plywood is installed, or in the corner of the room if multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of the room. 2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions. 3. Secure conduits to backboard if entering the room from overhead. 4. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor. 5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA-568-C Series of standards. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems." 3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels.
Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 23 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
4. Cables may not be spliced and shall be continuous from terminal to terminal. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. 5. Cables serving a common system may be grouped in a common raceway. Install network cabling and control wiring and cable in separate raceway from power wiring. Do not group conductors from different systems or different voltages. 6. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems." Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Do not use heat lamps for heating. 10. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems." Monitor cable pull tensions. 11. Support: Do not allow cables to lie on removable ceiling tiles. 12. Secure: Fasten securely in place with hardware specifically designed and installed so as to not damage cables. 13. Provide strain relief. 14. Keep runs short. Allow extra length for connecting to terminals. Do not bend cables in a radius less than 10 times the cable OD. Use sleeves or grommets to protect cables from vibration at points where they pass around sharp corners and through penetrations. 15. Ground wire shall be copper, and grounding methods shall comply with IEEE C2. Demonstrate ground resistance.
C. Balanced Twisted Pair Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA-568-C.2. 2. Install termination hardware as specified in Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling" unless otherwise indicated. 3. Do not untwist balanced twisted pair cables more than 1/2 inch at the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.
D. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors: 1. Install wiring in raceways. 2. Use insulated spade lugs for wire and cable connection to screw terminals. 3. Comply with requirements specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
E. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-D recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communications cable from potential EMI sources including electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 23 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches. 3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. 4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. 5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or 5 HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches. 6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches.
3.4 REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Remove abandoned conductors and cables. Abandoned conductors and cables are those installed that are not terminated at equipment and are not identified with a tag for future use.
3.5 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A. Minimum Conductor Sizes: 1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits; No 14 AWG. 2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits; No. 16 AWG. 3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits; No 12 AWG.
3.6 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
B. Comply with TIA-569-D, Annex A, "Firestopping."
C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping" Chapter.
Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 23 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.7 GROUNDING
A. For low-voltage control wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
3.8 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visually inspect cable jacket materials for UL or third-party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA- 568-C.1. 2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.
C. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION
Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 23 - 7 This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Conduit and cable support devices. 3. Support for conductors in vertical conduit. 4. Structural steel for fabricated supports and restraints. 5. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, including powder-actuated fasteners, mechanical expansion anchors, concrete inserts, clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts, and hanger rods. 6. Fabricated metal equipment support assemblies.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following: a. Slotted support systems, hardware, and accessories. b. Clamps. c. Hangers. d. Sockets. e. Eye nuts. f. Fasteners. g. Anchors. h. Saddles. i. Brackets. 2. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation details for electrical hangers and support systems. 1. Hangers. Include product data for components. 2. Slotted support systems. 3. Equipment supports. 4. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For hangers and supports for electrical systems. 1. Include design calculations and details of hangers.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design hanger and support system.
B. Seismic Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the supported equipment and systems will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the supported equipment and systems will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.
C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame Rating: Class 1. 2. Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D 635.
2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Preformed steel channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch-diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c. in at least one surface. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with project requirments. a. B-line; an Eaton business b. Thomas & Betts Corp. c. Unistrut; Part of Atkor International d. Engineer approved equal 2. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 3. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: Galvanized steel. 4. Channel Width: 1-5/8 inches. 5. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA- 6. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
C. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for nonarmored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor
Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be made of malleable iron.
D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements. 1) Hilti, Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co. 5) Engineer approved equal 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements. 1) B-line; an Eaton Business 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti, Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC 6) Engineer approved equal 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.3 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.
Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with the following standards for application and installation requirements of hangers and supports, except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter: 1. NECA 1. 2. NECA 101.
B. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.
C. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
D. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceways: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
E. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this article.
B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.
C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS SP-58, Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27), complying with MSS SP-69. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that comply with seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for reinforcing bars.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.4 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.
B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete.
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base as follows: 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 09 90 00 "Painting" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Surface raceways. 5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 6. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping at conduit and box entrances. 2. Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets, and handholes serving communications systems.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.
B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: 1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports.
B. Source quality-control reports.
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Metal Conduit: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements. a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkor International b. Republic Conduit c. Thomas & Betts Corp. d. Wheatland Tube Company e. Engineer approved equal 2. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 3. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. 4. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. 5. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. 6. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. a. Comply with NEMA RN 1. b. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum. 7. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. 8. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel. 9. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.
B. Metal Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements. a. Appleton Electric b. Arlington Industries, Inc. c. Bridgeport Fittings, Inc. d. Engineer approved equal 2. Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 3. Listing and Labeling: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 4. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 5. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 1203 and NFPA 70. 6. Fittings for EMT: a. Material: Steel or die cast. b. Type: compression. 7. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 8. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.
C. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Nonmetallic Conduit: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements. a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkor International b. Cantex, Inc. c. Thomas & Betts Corp. d. Engineer approved equal 2. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduit shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 3. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.
B. Nonmetallic Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirments. a. Cantex, Inc. b. Kraloy c. Thomas & Betts Corp. d. Engineer approved equal 2. Fittings, General: Listed and labeled for type of conduit, location, and use. 3. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and 4. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.
2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements. 1. B-line, an Eaton business 2. Hoffman: a brand of nVent 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric 5. Engineer approved equal
B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 (indoor) or Type 3R (outdoor) unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements. 1. Mono-Systems, Inc. 2. Panduit Corp. 3. Wiremold/Legrand 4. Engineer approved equal
B. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements. 1. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds 2. Hoffman; a brand of nVent 3. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 4. RACO; a Hubbell Company 5. Engineer approved equal
B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
E. Metal Floor Boxes: 1. Material: Cast metal or sheet metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
F. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round. 1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
G. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.
H. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70 lb.
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1. Listing and Labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
I. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
J. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
K. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.
L. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.
M. Gangable boxes are prohibited.
N. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 3R with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.
O. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1 (indoor) or Type 3R (outdoor) galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
2.6 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements. 1. Carson Industries LLC 2. Newbasis 3. Quazite; Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. Engineer approved equal
B. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: 1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application. 2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two. 1. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, indicating service. 6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 7. Handholes 18 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES
A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. 1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer. 3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012 and traceable to NIST standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: IMC. 3. Underground Conduit: Type EPC-40-PVC,. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the following: a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet- handling units. c. Mechanical rooms. d. Electrical rooms. e. Gymnasiums. 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 6. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 3. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. a. Do not use screw in style fittings.
E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.
F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.
H. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.
B. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.
C. Do not install raceways or electrical items on any "explosion-relief" walls or rotating equipment.
D. Do not fasten conduits onto the bottom side of a metal deck roof.
E. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 7 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
F. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
G. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
H. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.
I. Make bends in raceway using large-radius preformed ells. Field bending shall be according to NFPA 70 minimum radii requirements. Use only equipment specifically designed for material and size involved.
J. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
K. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached and within 36 inches of any coupling. Space conduit supports no more than 120 inches.
L. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location. 5. Change from ENT to GRC or IMC before rising above floor.
M. Stub-Ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure.
N. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
O. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.
P. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
Q. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 8 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
R. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
S. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
T. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.
U. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.
V. Surface Raceways: 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.
W. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
X. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Conduit extending from interior to exterior of building. 4. Conduit extending into pressurized duct and equipment. 5. Conduit extending into pressurized zones that are automatically controlled to maintain different pressure set points. 6. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
Y. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.
Z. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet. 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 9 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change. 3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits. 4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
AA. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
BB. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.
CC. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.
DD. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.
EE. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
FF. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
GG. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.
HH. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
II. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 10 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
JJ. PVC elbows are prohibited.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. 2. Install backfill in 8 inch loose lifts. 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction. 4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow. 5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling. b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. c. Transition from PVC to GRS shall be made below grade. All elbows and risers shall be GRS. 6. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES
A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.
C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.
D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line.
E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 11 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.
3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."
3.6 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 12 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 26 05 44 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 84 00 "Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire- resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES
A. Wall Sleeves: 1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.
B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.
C. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
D. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: 1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
Sleeves And Sleeve Seals For Electrical Raceways And Cabling 26 05 44 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.
2.4 GROUT
A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non- fire-rated walls or floors.
B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS
A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below. 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.
B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.
C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry- Unit Floors and Walls: 1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:
Sleeves And Sleeve Seals For Electrical Raceways And Cabling 26 05 44 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing. 2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting. 5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.
D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: 1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building.
B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
Sleeves And Sleeve Seals For Electrical Raceways And Cabling 26 05 44 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
END OF SECTION
Sleeves And Sleeve Seals For Electrical Raceways And Cabling 26 05 44 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Color and legend requirements for raceways, conductors, and warning labels and signs. 2. Labels. 3. Bands and tubes. 4. Tapes and stencils. 5. Tags. 6. Signs. 7. Cable ties. 8. Paint for identification. 9. Fasteners for labels and signs.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for electrical identification products.
B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate composition, size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.
C. Identification Schedule: For each piece of electrical equipment and electrical system components to be an index of nomenclature for electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For arc-flash hazard study.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with ASME A13.1.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
E. Comply with NFPA 70E and Section 260573.19 "Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis" requirements for arc-flash warning labels.
F. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS
A. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
B. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors. Color-coding shall be maintained when using type MC cable. 1. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG if authorities having jurisdiction permit. 2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. 3. Colors for 240-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. 4. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Purple. b. Phase B: Brown. c. Phase C: Yellow. 5. Color for Neutral: White or gray. 6. Color for Equipment Grounds: Green. 7. Colors for Isolated Grounds: Green with white stripe.
C. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER - CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING."
D. Warning Label Colors: 1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
E. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."
Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
F. Equipment Identification Labels: 1. Black letters on a white field.
2.3 LABELS
A. Vinyl Wraparound Labels: Preprinted, flexible labels laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing label ends.
B. Snap-around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with diameters sized to suit diameters and that stay in place by gripping action.
C. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil-thick, polyester or vinyl flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive. 1. Self-Lamination: Clear; UV-, weather- and chemical-resistant; self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend. 2. Marker for Labels: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 3. Marker for Labels: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink recommended by printer manufacturer.
D. Self-Adhesive Labels: Polyester or Vinyl, thermal, transfer-printed, 3-mil-thick, multicolor, weather- and UV-resistant, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for intended use and location. 1. Minimum Nominal Size: a. 1-1/2 by 6 inches for raceway and conductors. b. 3-1/2 by 5 inches for equipment. c. As required by authorities having jurisdiction.
2.4 BANDS AND TUBES
A. Snap-around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches long, with diameters sized to suit diameters and that stay in place by gripping action.
B. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tubes with machine-printed identification labels, sized to suit diameter and shrunk to fit firmly. Full shrink recovery occurs at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224.
2.5 TAPES AND STENCILS
A. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide; compounded for outdoor use.
C. Tape and Stencil: 4-inch-wide black stripes on 10-inch centers placed diagonally over orange background and are 12 inches wide. Stop stripes at legends.
Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
D. Floor Marking Tape: 2-inch-wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow and black stripes and clear vinyl overlay.
E. Underground-Line Warning Tape: 1. Tape: a. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. b. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. c. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert and not subject to degradation when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. 2. Color and Printing: a. Comply with ANSI Z535.1, ANSI Z535.2, ANSI Z535.3, ANSI Z535.4, and ANSI Z535.5. b. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: "ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE". c. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: "TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE". 3. Tag: a. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core; bright colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service. b. Width: 3 inches. c. Overall Thickness: 5 mils. d. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil. e. Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft.. f. Tensile according to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf and 4600 psi.
F. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch.
2.6 TAGS
A. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.
B. Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags: Polyethylene tags, 0.015 inch thick, color-coded for phase and voltage level, with factory screened or printed permanent designations; punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.
C. Write-on Tags: 1. Polyester Tags: 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment. 2. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.
Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer.
2.7 SIGNS
A. Baked-Enamel Signs: 1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal Size: 7 by 10 inches.
B. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs: 1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs, with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing, punched and drilled for fasteners, and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal Size: 10 by 14 inches.
C. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs: 1. Engraved legend. 2. Thickness: a. For signs up to 20 sq. in., minimum 1/16 inch thick. b. For signs larger than 20 sq. in., 1/8 inch thick. c. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. d. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners with 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.
2.8 CABLE TIES
A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.
B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black.
C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, and self-locking. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F according to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi. 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.
Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F. 5. Color: Black.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification product.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
D. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual.
E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
F. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation, and maintenance of electrical systems and connected items.
G. System Identification for Raceways and Cables under 600 V: Identification shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place identification of two-color markings in contact, side by side. 1. Secure tight to surface of conductor, cable, or raceway.
H. System Identification for Raceways and Cables over 600 V: Identification shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent identification of two-color markings in contact, side by side. 1. Secure tight to surface of conductor, cable, or raceway.
Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
I. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.
J. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels, signs, and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.
K. Accessible Fittings for Raceways: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. "EMERGENCY POWER." 2. "POWER." 3. "UPS."
L. Vinyl Wraparound Labels: 1. Secure tight to surface of raceway or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Attach labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape, with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate.
M. Snap-around Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
N. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
O. Self-Adhesive Labels: 1. On each item, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and operation and maintenance manual. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-1/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
P. Snap-around Color-Coding Bands: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
Q. Heat-Shrink, Preprinted Tubes: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
R. Marker Tapes: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
S. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. 1. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding.
T. Tape and Stencil: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.
Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 7 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
U. Floor Marking Tape: Apply stripes to finished surfaces following manufacturer's written instructions.
V. Underground Line Warning Tape: 1. During backfilling of trenches, install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above cable or raceway at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall. 2. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 3. Install underground-line warning tape for direct-buried cables and cables in raceways.
W. Metal Tags: 1. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Secure using plenum rated cable ties.
X. Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags: 1. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Secure using plenum-rated cable ties.
Y. Write-on Tags: 1. Place in a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Secure using plenum-rated cable ties.
Z. Baked-Enamel Signs: 1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on minimum 1-1/2-inch-high sign; where two lines of text are required, use signs minimum 2 inches high.
AA. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs: 1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-1/2-inch-high sign; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
BB. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs: 1. Attach signs that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-1/2-inch-high sign; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
CC. Cable Ties: General purpose, for attaching tags, except as listed below: 1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.
Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 8 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to provide view of identifying devices.
B. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, pull points, and locations of high visibility. Identify by system and circuit designation.
C. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil. Stencil legend "DANGER - CONCEALED HIGH-VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- high, black letters on 20-inch centers. 1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, and at 10-foot maximum intervals.
D. Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Vinyl wraparound labels. 1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.
E. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits, More Than 30 A and 120 V to Ground: Identify with self-adhesive raceway labels. 1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.
F. Accessible Fittings for Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive labels containing the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. "EMERGENCY POWER." 2. "POWER." 3. "UPS."
G. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use vinyl wraparound labels to identify the phase. 1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.
H. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More Than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic preprinted tags colored and marked to indicate phase, and a separate tag with the circuit designation.
Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 9 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
I. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive labels with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.
J. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations, provide self-adhesive labels with the conductor designation.
K. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source.
L. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Self-adhesive vinyl tape that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
M. Locations of Underground Lines: Underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical-fiber cable.
N. Concealed Raceways and Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Apply floor marking tape to the following finished surfaces: 1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space. 2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall. 3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.
O. Workspace Indication: Apply floor marking tape to finished surfaces. Show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.
P. Instructional Signs: Self-adhesive labels, including the color code for grounded and ungrounded conductors.
Q. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive labels. 1. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 2. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power-transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.
R. Arc Flash Warning Labeling: Self-adhesive labels.
S. Operating Instruction Signs: Self-adhesive labels.
T. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Self-adhesive labels with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch-high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.
Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 10 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
U. Equipment Identification Labels: 1. Indoor Equipment: Laminated acrylic or melamine plastic sign. 2. Outdoor Equipment: Laminated acrylic or melamine sign. 3. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be in the form of a self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchgear. e. Switchboards. f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation indicated on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. g. Substations. h. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. i. Motor-control centers. j. Enclosed switches. k. Enclosed circuit breakers. l. Enclosed controllers. m. Variable-speed controllers. n. Push-button stations. o. Power-transfer equipment. p. Contactors.
q. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. r. Battery-inverter units. s. Battery racks. t. Power-generating units. u. Monitoring and control equipment. v. UPS equipment.
END OF SECTION
Identification For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 - 11 This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 26 05 73.19 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes a computer-based, arc-flash study to determine the arc-flash hazard distance and the incident energy to which personnel could be exposed during work on or near electrical equipment.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
B. Field Adjusting Agency: An independent electrical testing agency with full-time employees and the capability to adjust devices and conduct testing indicated and that is a member company of NETA.
C. One-Line Diagram: A diagram that shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used therein.
D. Power System Analysis Software Developer: An entity that commercially develops, maintains, and distributes computer software used for power system studies.
E. Power Systems Analysis Specialist: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located.
F. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes the affected portion from the system.
G. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.
H. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served.
I. Single-Line Diagram: See "One-Line Diagram."
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.
B. Study Submittals: Submit the following submittals after the approval of system protective devices submittals. Submittals shall be in digital form: 1. Arc-flash study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.
Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis 26 05 73.19 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2. Arc-flash study report; signed, dated, and sealed by Power Systems Analysis Specialist. 3. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that selection of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: 1. For Power Systems Analysis Software Developer. 2. For Power System Analysis Specialist. 3. For Field Adjusting Agency.
B. Product Certificates: For arc-flash hazard analysis software, certifying compliance with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Provide maintenance procedures in equipment manuals according to requirements in NFPA 70E. 2. Operation and Maintenance Procedures: In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," provide maintenance procedures for use by Owner's personnel that comply with requirements in NFPA 70E.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Study shall be performed using commercially developed and distributed software designed specifically for power system analysis.
B. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section.
C. Manual calculations are unacceptable.
D. Power System Analysis Software Qualifications: An entity that owns and markets computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices. 1. Computer program shall be designed to perform arc-flash analysis or have a function, component, or add-on module designed to perform arc-flash analysis. 2. Computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed professional engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development Professional certification.
E. Power Systems Analysis Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the arc-flash study, analyzing the arc flash, and documenting
Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis 26 05 73.19 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer.
F. Arc-Flash Study Certification: Arc-Flash Study Report shall be signed and sealed by Power Systems Analysis Specialist.
G. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications: 1. Employer of a NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification responsible for all field adjusting of the Work. 2. A member company of NETA. 3. Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS
A. Comply with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.
B. Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.
2.2 ARC-FLASH STUDY REPORT CONTENT
A. Executive summary of study findings.
B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and guide for interpretation of results.
C. One-line diagram, showing the following: 1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings. 2. Conductor types, sizes, and lengths. 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings, including derating factors and environmental conditions. 4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings. 5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, panelboard designations, and ratings.
D. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article.
E. Arc-Flash Study Output Reports: 1. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each equipment location included in the report: a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio. e. Equivalent impedance.
Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis 26 05 73.19 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical basis. g. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis.
F. Incident Energy and Flash Protection Boundary Calculations: 1. Arcing fault magnitude. 2. Protective device clearing time. 3. Duration of arc. 4. Arc-flash boundary. 5. Restricted approach boundary. 6. Limited approach boundary. 7. Working distance. 8. Incident energy. 9. Hazard risk category. 10. Recommendations for arc-flash energy reduction.
G. Fault study input data, case descriptions, and fault-current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of computer printout.
2.3 ARC-FLASH WARNING LABELS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for self-adhesive equipment labels. Produce a 3.5-by-5-inch self-adhesive equipment label for each work location included in the analysis.
B. Label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC-FLASH HAZARD," and shall include the following information taken directly from the arc-flash hazard analysis: 1. Location designation. 2. Nominal voltage. 3. Protection boundaries. a. Arc-flash boundary. b. Restricted approach boundary. c. Limited approach boundary. 4. Arc flash PPE category. 5. Required minimum arc rating of PPE in Cal/cm squared. 6. Available incident energy. 7. Working distance. 8. Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date.
C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field-applied markings.
Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis 26 05 73.19 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals. Proceed with arc-flash study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to arc-flash study may not be used in study.
3.2 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS
A. Comply with NFPA 70E and its Annex D for hazard analysis study.
B. Calculate maximum and minimum contributions of fault-current size. 1. Maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions. 2. Calculate arc-flash energy at 85 percent of maximum short-circuit current according to IEEE 1584 recommendations. 3. Calculate arc-flash energy at 38 percent of maximum short-circuit current according to NFPA 70E recommendations.
C. Calculate the arc-flash protection boundary and incident energy at locations in electrical distribution system where personnel could perform work on energized parts.
D. Calculate the limited and restricted approach boundaries for each location.
E. Incident energy calculations shall consider the accumulation of energy over time when performing arc-flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations shall take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators shall be decremented as follows: 1. Fault contribution from induction motors shall not be considered beyond three to five cycles. 2. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators shall be decayed to match the actual decrement of each as closely as possible (for example, contributions from permanent magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to three per unit after 10 cycles).
F. Arc-flash energy shall generally be reported for the maximum of line or load side of a circuit breaker. However, arc-flash computation shall be performed and reported for both line and load side of a circuit breaker as follows: 1. When the circuit breaker is in a separate enclosure. 2. When the line terminals of the circuit breaker are separate from the work location.
G. Base arc-flash calculations on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Cap maximum clearing time at two seconds based on IEEE 1584, Section B.1.2.
Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis 26 05 73.19 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.3 POWER SYSTEM DATA
A. Obtain all data necessary for conduct of the arc-flash hazard analysis. 1. Verify completeness of data supplied on one-line diagram on Drawings and under "Preparatory Studies" Paragraph in "Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis" Article. Call discrepancies to Architect's attention. 2. For new equipment, use characteristics from approved submittals under provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project. 3. For existing equipment, whether or not relocated, obtain required electrical distribution system data by field investigation and surveys conducted by qualified technicians and engineers.
B. Electrical Survey Data: Gather and tabulate the following input data to support study. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds NETA ETT-Certified Technician Level III or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification. Data include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings. 2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance or available short circuit current at the service. 3. Power sources and ties. 4. Short-circuit current at each system bus (three phase and line to ground). 5. Full-load current of all loads. 6. Voltage level at each bus. 7. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type, impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift. 8. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating and impedance. 9. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings. 10. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio. 11. For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios, potential transformer ratios, and relay settings. 12. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, size, and conductor material. 13. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation. 14. Low-voltage conductor sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material (magnetic or nonmagnetic). 15. Medium-voltage conductor sizes, lengths, conductor material, conductor construction and metallic shield performance parameters, and conduit material (magnetic or nonmagnetic).
Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis 26 05 73.19 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.4 LABELING
A. Apply one arc-flash label on the front cover for each equipment included in the study. Base arc-flash label data on highest values calculated at each location.
B. Each piece of equipment listed below shall have an arc-flash label applied to it: 1. Motor-control center. 2. Low-voltage switchboard. 3. Switchgear. 4. Medium-voltage switch. 5. Medium voltage transformers 6. Low voltage transformers. 7. Panelboard and safety switch over 250 V. 8. Applicable panelboard and safety switch under 250 V. 9. Control panel.
C. Note on record Drawings the location of equipment where the personnel could be exposed to arc-flash hazard during their work. 1. Indicate arc-flash energy. 2. Indicate protection level required.
3.5 APPLICATION OF WARNING LABELS
A. Install arc-flash warning labels under the direct supervision and control of Power System Analysis Specialist. Labels shall include the following; 1. If incident energy >= 40 cal/cm2: “DANGER, DO NOT WORK ENERGIZED” 2. If incident energy <= 40 cal/cm2: “WARNING, USE PPE PER TABLE 130.5(G), NFPA-70E 2018 EDITION”
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage Power Systems Analysis Specialist to train Owner's maintenance personnel in potential arc-flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment and the significance of arc-flash warning labels.
END OF SECTION
Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis 26 05 73.19 - 7 This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors. 2. Switchbox-mounted occupancy sensors.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 27 26 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, non-networkable wall- switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: 1. Show installation details for the following: a. Occupancy sensors. b. Vacancy sensors. 2. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and elevations, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which equipment will be attached. 3. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following: a. Luminaires. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Control modules.
B. Field quality-control reports.
C. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranties.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace lighting control devices that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Faulty operation of lighting control software. b. Faulty operation of lighting control devices. 2. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INDOOR OCCUPANCYAND VACANCY SENSORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements. 1. nLight, Acuity Controls 2. DLM, Wattstopper 3. Crestron Electronics, Inc. 4. Engineer approved equal
B. General Requirements for Sensors: 1. Wall or Ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors. 2. Dual technology. 3. Separate power pack. 4. Hardwired connection to switch. 5. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 6. Operation: a. Occupancy Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. b. Vacancy Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, lights are manually turned on and sensor turns lights off when the room is unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. c. Combination Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, sensor shall be programmed to turn lights on when coverage area is occupied and turn them off when unoccupied, or to turn off lights that have been manually turned on; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. 7. Sensor Output: Sensor is powered from the power pack. 8. Power: Line voltage. 9. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast or LED load at 120- and 277- V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24- V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70. 10. Mounting: a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.
Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door. 11. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor. 12. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. 13. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; turn lights off when selected lighting level is present.
C. Dual-Technology Type: Wall or Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit. 1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch-minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. 3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 2000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling. 4. Detection Coverage (Room, Wall Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere within a 180-degree pattern centered on the sensor over an area of 2000 square feet when mounted 48 inches above finished floor.
2.2 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements. 1. Acuity Controls 2. Wattstopper, Legrand 3. Crestron Electronics, Inc. 4. Engineer approved equal
B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor with manual on-off switch, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox using hardwired connection. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Occupancy Sensor Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn lights off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. 3. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F. 4. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA ballast or LED load at 120 V, 1200-VA ballast or LED load at 277 V, and 800-W incandescent.
Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.3 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine lighting control devices before installation. Reject lighting control devices that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
B. Examine walls and ceilings for suitable conditions where lighting control devices will be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SENSOR INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.
C. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90-percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 3/4 inch.
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower- limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.
Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor.
B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting lighting control devices to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations. 2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's operations. 3. Align high-bay occupancy sensors using manufacturer's laser aiming tool.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.
END OF SECTION
Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23 - 5 This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 26 09 43 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes a networked lighting control system comprised of the following components: 1. Wired Networked Devices a. Wall Stations b. Graphic Wall Stations c. Digital Key Switches d. Auxiliary Input/Output Devices e. Occupancy and Photocell Sensors f. Wall Switch Sensors g. Embedded Sensors h. Power Packs and Secondary Packs i. Networked Luminaires j. Relay and Dimming Panel k. Bluetooth® Low Energy Programming Device l. Communication Bridge
B. The networked lighting control system shall meet all of the characteristics and performance requirements specified herein.
C. The contractor shall provide, install and verify proper operation of all equipment necessary for proper operation of the system as specified herein and as shown on applicable drawings.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 262726 Wiring Devices
B. Section 260923 Lighting Control Devices
C. Section 265113 Interior Lighting Fixtures
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal shall be provided including the following items. 1. Bill of Materials necessary to install the networked lighting control system. 2. Product Specification Sheets indicating general device descriptions, dimensions, electrical specifications, wiring details, and nomenclature. 3. Riser Diagrams showing device wiring connections of system backbone and typical per room/area type. 4. Other Diagrams and Operational Descriptions – as needed to indicate system operation or interaction with other system(s). 5. Contractor Startup/Commissioning Worksheet (must be completed prior to factory start-up). Network Lighting Controls 26 09 43 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
6. Service Specification Sheets indicating general service descriptions, including startup, training, post-startup support, and service contract terms. 7. Hardware and Software Operation Manuals.
1.4 APPROVALS
A. Prior approval from owner’s representative is required for products or systems manufactured by companies not specified in the Network Lighting Controls section of this specification.
B. Alternate products or systems require submission of catalog datasheets, system overview documents and installation manuals to owner’s representative.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Qualifications 1. System electrical components shall be listed or recognized by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (e.g., UL, ETL, or CSA) and shall be labeled with required markings as applicable. 2. System shall be listed as qualified under DesignLights Consortium Networked Lighting Control System Specification V2.0. 3. All components shall be subjected to 100% end of line testing prior to shipment to the project site to ensure proper device operation. 4. All components and the manufacturing facility where product was manufactured must be RoHS compliant.
B. Installation and Startup Qualifications 1. System startup shall be performed by qualified personnel approved or certified by the manufacturer.
C. Service and Support Requirements 1. Phone Support: Toll free technical support shall be available at no additional charge to the owner. 2. Onsite Support: The bidder shall provide one site visit within 12 months of substantial completion to adjust system components and programming to meet the owner’s needs.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Only install equipment after the following site conditions are maintained: 1. Ambient Temperature: 14 to 105 degrees F (-10 to 40 degrees C) 2. Relative Humidity: less than 90% non-condensing
B. Equipment shall not be subjected to dust, debris, moisture, or temperature and humidity conditions exceeding the requirements indicated above, at any point prior to installation.
C. Only properly rated equipment and enclosures, installed per the manufacturer’s instructions, may be subjected to dust and moisture following installation.
Network Lighting Controls 26 09 43 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.7 WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer shall provide a minimum five-year warranty on all hardware devices supplied and installed. Warranty coverage shall begin on the date of shipment.
B. The hardware warranty shall cover repair or replacement any defective products within the warranty period.
1.8 MAINTENANCE & SUSTAINABILITY
A. The manufacturer shall make available to the owner new parts, upgrades, and/or replacements available for a minimum of 5 years following installation.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with project requirements. 1. nLight , Acuity Controls (basis of design) 2. DLM, Wattstopper, Legrand 3. Crestron Electronics, Inc. 4. Engineer approved equal
2.2 SYSTEM COMPLIANCE
A. System components shall comply with UL 916 and UL 924 standards where applicable.
B. System components shall comply with CFR Title 47, Part 15 standards where applicable.
C. All equipment shall be installed and connected in compliance with NFPA 70.
2.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. System Architecture 1. System shall have an architecture that is based upon three main concepts: (1) networkable intelligent lighting control devices, (2) standalone lighting control zones using distributed intelligence, (3) optional system backbone for remote, time based and global operation between control zones. 2. Intelligent lighting control devices shall have individually addressable network communication capability and consist of one or more basic lighting control components: occupancy sensor, photocell sensor, relay, dimming output, contact closure input, analog 0-10V input, and manual wall station capable of indicating switching, dimming, and/or scene control. Combining one or more of these components into a single device enclosure shall be permissible so as to minimize overall device count of system. 3. Lighting control zones consisting of one or more luminaires and intelligent lighting control devices and shall be capable of providing automatic control from sensors (occupancy and/or photocell) and manual control from local wall stations without requiring connection to a higher-level system backbone; this capability is referred to as “distributed intelligence.” a. Lighting control zones of at least 128 devices per zone shall be supported. Network Lighting Controls 26 09 43 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
4. Intelligent lighting control devices shall support individual (unique) configuration of device settings and properties, with such configuration residing within the intelligent control devices. 5. Intelligent lighting control devices shall have distributed intelligence programming stored in non-volatile memory, such that following any loss of power the lighting control zones shall operate according to their defined default settings and sequence of operations. 6. Lighting control zones shall be capable of being networked with a higher-level system backbone to provide time based control, remote control from inputs and/or systems external to the control zone, and remote configuration and monitoring through a software interface. 7. All system devices shall support remote firmware update, such that physical access to each device is not necessary, for purposes of upgrading functionality at a later date.
B. Wired Networked Control Zone Characteristics 1. Connections to devices within a wired networked lighting control zone and to backbone components shall be with a single type of low voltage network cable, which shall be compliant with CAT5e specifications or higher. To prevent wiring errors and provide cost savings, the use of mixed types of low voltage network cables shall not be permitted. 2. Devices in an area shall be connected via a “daisy-chain” topology; requiring all individual networked devices to be connected back to a central component in a “hub-and-spoke” topology shall not be permitted, so as to reduce the total amount of network cable required for each control zone. 3. System shall provide the option of having pre-terminated plenum rated low voltage network cabling supplied with hardware so as to reduce the opportunity for improper wiring and communication errors during system installation. 4. Following proper installation and provision of power, all networked devices connected together with low voltage network cable shall automatically form a functional lighting control zone without requiring any type of programming, regardless of the programming mechanism (e.g., software application, handheld remote, pushbutton). The “out of box” default sequence of operation is intended to provide typical sequence of operation so as to minimize the system startup and programming requirements and to also have functional lighting control operation prior to system startup and programming. 5. Once software is installed, system shall be able to automatically discover all connected devices without requiring any provisioning of system or zone addresses. 6. All networked devices shall have the ability to detect improper communication wiring and blink its LED in a specific cadence as to alert installation/startup personnel.
C. Supported Sequence of Operations 1. Characteristics and performance requirements herein shall be supported by the networked lighting control system. 2. Control Zones a. Intelligent lighting control devices installed in an area (also referred to as a group of devices) shall be capable of transmitting and tracking occupancy sensor, photocell sensor, and manual switch information within at least 48 unique control zones to support different and Network Lighting Controls 26 09 43 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
reconfigurable sequences of operation within the area. These shall also be referred to as local control zones. b. Intelligent lighting control devices located in different areas shall be able to transmit and track information within at least 128 system-wide control zones to support required sequences of operation that may span across multiple areas. Occupancy and photocell commands shall be available across a single controller, and switch commands shall be available across single or multiple controllers. These shall also be referred to as global control zones. 3. Wall station Capabilities a. Wall stations shall be provided to support the following capabilities: 1) On/Off of a local control zone and global control zone simultaneously, as required. 2) Continuous dimming control of light level of a local control zone and global control zone simultaneously, as required. 3) Preset Scenes that can activate a specific combination of light levels across multiple local and global channels, as required. 4) Profile Scenes that can modify the sequence of operation for the devices in the area (group) in response to a button press. This capability is defined as supporting “Local Profiles” and is used to dynamically optimize the occupant experience and lighting energy usage. Wall stations shall be able to manually start and stop Local Profiles, or the local profile shall be capable of ending after a specific duration of time between 5 minutes and 12 hours. Parameters that shall be configurable and assigned to a Local Profile shall include, but not be limited to, fixture light level, occupancy time delay, response to occupancy sensors (including enabling/disabling response), response to daylight sensors (including enabling/disabling response), and enabling/disabling of wall stations. b. 3-way / multi-way control: multiple wall stations shall be capable of controlling the same local and global control zones, so as to support “multi-way” switching, dimming, preset scene, and profile scene control. 4. Occupancy Sensing Capabilities a. Local and global control: Occupancy sensors shall be configurable to control a local and global zone simultaneously, as required. b. Multi-sensor control: multiple occupancy sensors shall be capable of controlling the same local and global control zones. This capability combines occupancy sensing coverage from multiple sensors without consuming multiple control zones. c. System shall support the following types of occupancy sensing sequence of operations: 1) On/Off Occupancy Sensing 2) Partial-On Occupancy Sensing 3) Partial-Off Occupancy Sensing 4) Vacancy Sensing (Manual-On / Automatic-Off) d. On/Off, Partial-On, and Partial-Off Occupancy Sensing modes shall function according to the following sequence of operation: 1) Occupancy sensors shall automatically turn lights on to a designated level when occupancy is detected. To support fine
Network Lighting Controls 26 09 43 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
tuning of Partial-On sequences the designated occupied light level shall support at least 100 dimming levels. 2) Occupancy sensors shall automatically turn lights off or to a dimmed state (Partial-Off) when vacancy occurs or if sufficient daylight is detected. To support fine tuning of Partial-Off sequences the designated unoccupied dim level shall support at least 100 dimming levels. To provide additional energy savings and an enhanced occupant experience, the system shall also be capable of dimming the lights when vacant and then turning the lights off completely after an additional amount of time. 3) Photocell readings, if enabled in the Occupancy Sensing control zone, shall be capable of automatically adjusting the light level during occupied or unoccupied conditions as necessary to further reduce energy usage. Additional requirements and details for photocell sensing capabilities are indicated under Photocell Sensing Capabilities. 4) At any time, the use of a wall station shall change the dimming level or turn lights off as selected by the occupant. The lights shall optionally remain in this manually-specified light level until the zone becomes vacant; upon vacancy the normal sequence of operation, as defined above, shall proceed. e. Vacancy Sensing mode (also referred to as Manual-On / Automatic-Off) shall function according to the following sequence of operation: 1) The use of a wall station is required turn lights on. The system shall be capable of programming the zone to turn on to either to a designated light level or the previous user light level. Initially occupying the space without using a wall station shall not result in lights turning on. 2) Occupancy sensors shall automatically turn lights off or to a dimmed state (Partial-Off) when vacancy occurs or if sufficient daylight is detected. To support fine tuning of Partial-Off sequences the designated unoccupied dim level shall support at least 100 dimming levels. To provide additional energy savings and an enhanced occupant experience, the system shall also be capable of dimming the lights when vacant and then turning the lights off completely after an additional amount of time. 3) To minimize occupant impact in case the area or zone is still physically occupied following dimming or shutoff of the lights due to detection of vacancy, the system shall support an “automatic grace period” immediately following detection of vacancy, during which time any detected occupancy shall result in the lights reverting to the previous level. After the grace period has expired, the use of a wall station is required to turn lights on. 4) Photocell readings, if enabled in the Occupancy Sensing control zone, shall be capable of automatically adjusting the light level during occupied or unoccupied conditions as necessary to further reduce energy usage. Additional requirements and details for photocell sensing capabilities are indicated under Photocell Sensing Capabilities.
Network Lighting Controls 26 09 43 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
5) At any time, the use of a wall station shall change the dimming level or turn lights off as selected by the occupant. The lights shall optionally remain in this manually-specified light level until the zone becomes vacant; upon vacancy the normal sequence of operation, as defined above, shall proceed. f. To accommodate different types of environments, occupancy time delays before dimming or shutting off lights shall be specifiable for control zones between 15 seconds to 2 hours. 5. Photocell Sensing Capabilities (Automatic Daylight Sensing) a. Photocell sensing devices shall be configurable to control a local and global zone simultaneously, as required. b. The system shall support the following types of photocell-based control: 1) On/Off: The control zone is automatically turned off if the photocell reading exceeds the defined setpoint and automatically turned on if the photocell reading is below the defined setpoint. An adjustable time delay or adaptive setpoint behavior may be used to prevent the system from exhibiting nuisance on/off switching, as well as a dead band to prevent on/off cycling. 2) Continuous Dimming: The control zone automatically adjusts its dimming output in response to photocell readings, such that a minimum light level consisting of both electric light and daylight sources is maintained at the task. The photocell response shall be configurable to adjust the photocell setpoint and dimming rates. 6. System shall support automated demand response capabilities with automatic reduction of light level to at least three levels of demand response.
2.6 WIRED NETWORKED DEVICES
A. Wired Networked Wall Switches, Dimmers, Scene Controllers 1. Product Series: nPODM, nPODM xS, nPODM xL 2. Devices shall recess into single-gang switch box and fit a standard GFI opening. 3. Communication and low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard low voltage network cabling with RJ-45 connectors. 4. All switches shall have the ability to detect when it is not receiving valid communication and blink its LED in a pattern to visually indicate a potential wiring issue. 5. Devices with mechanical push-buttons shall provide tactile and LED user feedback. 6. Devices with mechanical push-buttons shall be made available with custom button labeling. 7. Wall switches & dimmers shall support the following device options: a. Number of control zones: 1, 2 or 4 b. Control Types Supported: 1) On/Off 2) On/Off/Dimming 3) On/Off/Dimming/Correlated Color Temperature Control for specific luminaire types c. Colors: As selected by architect 8. Scene controllers shall support the following device options: a. Number of scenes: 1, 2 or 4 b. Control Types Supported: Network Lighting Controls 26 09 43 - 7 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1) On/Off 2) On/Off/Dimming 3) Preset Level Scene Type 4) On/Off/Dimming/Preset Level for Correlated Color Temperature 5) Reprogramming of other devices within daisy-chained zone so as to implement user selected lighting scene. This shall support manual start/stop from the scene controller, or optionally programmed to automatically end after a user selectable duration between 5 minutes and 12 hours. 6) Selecting a lighting profile to be run by the system’s upstream controller so as to implement a selected lighting profile across multiple zones. This shall support manual start/stop from the scene controller, or optionally programmed to automatically end after a user selectable duration between 5 minutes and 12 hours. c. Colors: As selected by architect.
B. Wired Networked Graphic Wall Stations 1. Product Series: nPOD-GFX 2. Device shall surface mount to single-gang switch box. 3. Device shall have a 3.5” full color touch screen. 4. Device shall be powered with Class 2 low voltage supplied locally via a directly wired power supply. 5. Device shall have a micro-USB style connector for local computer connectivity. 6. Communication shall be over standard low voltage network cabling with RJ-45 connectors. 7. Device shall enable user supplied screen saver image to be uploaded within one of the following formats: jpg, png, gif, bmp, tif. 8. Device shall enable configuration of all switches, dimmers, and lighting preset scenes via password protected setup screens. 9. Graphic wall stations shall support the following device options: a. Number of control zones: Up to 16 b. Number of scenes: Up to 16 c. Profile type scene duration: User configurable from 5 minutes to 12 hours d. Colors: Ivory, White, Light Almond, Gray, Black
C. Wired Networked Digital Key Switches 1. Product Series: nPOD KEY, nPOD KEY MNTN 2. Devices shall recess into single-gang switch box and fit a standard GFI opening. 3. Communication and low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard low voltage network cabling with RJ-45 connectors. 4. All switches shall have the ability to detect when it is not receiving valid communication and blink its LED in a pattern to visually indicate a potential wiring issue. 5. Devices shall have LED user feedback to provide indication of on/off status of the programmed lights or scene, as well as indication of device power. 6. Digital key switches shall support the following device options: a. Control Types Supported: 1) On/Off 2) On/Off/Dimming 3) Preset Level Scene Type Network Lighting Controls 26 09 43 - 8 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
4) Reprogramming of other devices within daisy-chained zone so as to implement user selected lighting scene. This shall support manual start/stop from the scene controller, or optionally programmed to automatically end after a user selectable duration between 5 minutes and 12 hours. 5) Selecting a lighting profile to be run by the system’s upstream controller so as to implement a selected lighting profile across multiple zones. This shall support manual start/stop from the scene controller, or optionally programmed to automatically end after a user selectable duration between 5 minutes and 12 hours. b. Colors: As selected by architect.
D. Wired Networked Auxiliary Input / Output (I/O) Devices 1. Product Series: nIO-1S, nIO-RLX, nIO-MLO-5STEPA, nIO-MLO-AB, nIO- NLI, nIO-X, nIO-D, nIO-EZ-PH, nIO-EZD 2. Devices shall be plenum rated and be inline wired, screw mountable, or have an extended chase nipple for mounting to a ½” knockout. 3. Communication and low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard low voltage network cabling with RJ-45 connectors. 4. Auxiliary Input/Output Devices shall be specified as an input or output device with the following options: a. Contact closure or Pull High input 1) Input shall be programmable to support maintained or momentary inputs that can activate local or global scenes and profiles, activate lights at a preconfigured level, ramp light level up or down, or toggle lights on/off. b. 0-10V analog input 1) Input shall be programmable to function as a daylight sensor. c. RS-232/RS-485 digital input 1) Input supports activation of up to 4 local or global scenes and profiles, and on/off/dimming control of up to 16 local control zones. d. 0-10V dimming control output, capable of sinking up to 20mA of current 1) Output shall be programmable to support all standard sequence of operations supported by system. e. Digital control output via EldoLED LEDcode communication 1) Output shall be programmable to support light intensity control, as well as optional correlated color temperature (CCT) control, of the connected luminaire.
E. Wired Networked Occupancy and Photosensors 1. Product Series: nCM, nCMB, nRM, nWV, nHW 2. Occupancy sensors shall sense the presence of human activity within the desired space and fully control the on/off function of the lights. 3. Sensors shall utilize passive infrared (PIR) technology, which detects occupant motion, to initially turn lights on from an off state, thus preventing false on conditions. Ultrasonic or Microwave based sensing technologies shall not be accepted. 4. For applications where a second method of sensing is necessary to adequately detect maintained occupancy (such as in rooms with obstructions), a sensor with an additional “dual” technology shall be used. Network Lighting Controls 26 09 43 - 9 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
5. Dual technology sensors shall have one of its two technologies not require motion to detect occupancy. Acceptable dual technology includes PIR/Microphonics (also known as Passive Dual Technology or PDT) which both looks for occupant motion and listens for sounds indicating occupants. Sensors where both technologies detect motion (PIR/Ultrasonic) shall not be acceptable. 6. All sensing technologies shall be acoustically passive, meaning they do not transmit sounds waves of any frequency (for example in the Ultrasonic range), as these technologies have the potential for interference with other electronic devices within the space (such as electronic white board readers). Acceptable detection technologies include Passive Infrared (PIR), and/or Microphonics technology. Ultrasonic or Microwave based sensing technologies shall not be accepted. 7. System shall have ceiling, fixture, recessed & corner mounted sensors available, with multiple lens options available customized for specific applications. 8. Communication and low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard low voltage network cabling with RJ-45 connectors. 9. All sensors shall have the ability to detect when it is not receiving valid communication and blink its LED in a pattern to visually indicate a potential wiring issue. 10. Sensor programming parameter shall be available and configurable remotely from the software and locally via the device push-button. 11. Ceiling mount occupancy sensors shall be available with zero or one integrated dry contact switching relays, capable of switching 1 amp at 24 VAC/VDC (resistive only). 12. Sensors shall be available with one or two occupancy “poles”, each of which provides a programmable time delay. 13. Sensors shall have optional features for photosensor/daylight override, automatic dimming control, and low temperature/high humidity operation. 14. Photosensor shall provide for an on/off set-point, and a dead band to prevent the artificial light from cycling. Delay shall be incorporated into the photocell to prevent rapid response to passing clouds. 15. Photosensor and dimming sensor’s set-point and dead band shall be automatically calibrated through the sensor’s microprocessor by initiating an “Automatic Set-point Programming” procedure. Min and max dim settings as well as set-point may be manually entered. 16. Dead band setting shall be verified and modified by the sensor automatically every time the lights cycle to accommodate physical changes in the space (i.e., furniture layouts, lamp depreciation, or lamp outages). 17. A dual zone option shall be available for On/Off Photocell, Automatic Dimming Control Photocell, or Combination units. The secondary daylight zone shall be capable of being controlled as an “offset” from the primary zone.
F. Wired Networked Wall Switch Sensors 1. Product Series: nWSX 2. Devices shall recess into single-gang switch box and fit a standard GFI opening. 3. Communication and low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard low voltage network cabling with RJ-45 connectors. 4. All wall switch sensors shall have the ability to detect when it is not receiving valid communication and blink its LED in a pattern to visually indicate a potential wiring issue. 5. Devices with mechanical push-buttons shall provide tactile user feedback. Network Lighting Controls 26 09 43 - 10 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
6. Wall switches sensors shall support the following device options: a. User Input Control Types Supported: On/Off or On/Off/Dimming b. Occupancy Sensing Technology: PIR only or Dual Tech acoustic c. Daylight Sensing Option: Inhibit Photosensor d. Colors: Ivory, White, Light Almond, Gray
G. Wired Networked Power Packs and Secondary Packs 1. Product Series: nPP16, nPP16-ER, nPP20-PL, nSP16, nSP5-PCD, nSP5-2P- LVR, nSHADE, nAR40, nEPS 60, nPS-80 2. Power Packs shall incorporate one optional Class 1 relay, optional 0-10 VDC dimming output, and contribute low voltage Class 2 power to the rest of the system. 3. Power Packs shall accept 120 or 277 VAC (or optionally 347 VAC) and carry a plenum rating. 4. Secondary Packs shall incorporate the relay and 0-10 VDC or line voltage dimming output, but shall not be required to contribute system power. 5. Power Supplies shall provide system power only, but are not required to switch line voltage circuit. 6. Auxiliary Relay Packs shall switch low voltage circuits only, capable of switching 1 amp at 40 VAC/VDC (resistive only). 7. Communication shall be delivered to each device via standard low voltage network cabling with RJ-45 connectors. Secondary packs shall receive low voltage power via standard low voltage network cable. 8. Power Pack programming parameters shall be available and configurable remotely from the software and locally via the device push-button. 9. Power Pack shall securely mount through a threaded ½ inch chase nipple or be capable of being secured within a luminaire ballast/driver channel. Plastic clips into junction box shall not be accepted. All Class 1 wiring shall pass through chase nipple into adjacent junction box without any exposure of wire leads. Note: UL Listing under Energy Management or Industrial Control Equipment automatically meets this requirement, whereas Appliance Control Listing does not meet this safety requirement. 10. When required by local code, Power Pack must install inside standard electrical enclosure and provide UL recognized support to junction box. All Class 1 wiring is to pass through chase nipple into adjacent junction box without any exposure of wire leads. 11. Power/Secondary Packs shall be available with the following options: a. Power Pack capable of full 16-Amp switching of all normal power lighting load types, with optional 0-10V dimming output capable of up to 100mA of sink current. b. Secondary Pack with UL924 listing for switching of full 16-Amp Emergency Power circuits, with optional 0-10V dimming output capable of up to 100mA of sink current. c. Power and Secondary Packs capable of full 20-Amp switching of general purpose receptacle (plug-load) control. d. Secondary Pack capable of full 16-Amp switching of all normal power lighting load types. e. Secondary Pack capable of 5-Amps switching and dimming 120 VAC incandescent lighting loads or 120/277 VAC line voltage dimmable fluorescent ballasts (2-wire and 3-wire versions).
Network Lighting Controls 26 09 43 - 11 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
f. Secondary Pack capable of 5-Amps switching and dimming of 120/277 VAC magnetic low voltage transformers. g. Secondary Pack capable of 4-Amps switching and dimming of 120 VAC electronic low voltage transformers. h. Secondary Pack capable of louver/damper motor control for skylights. i. Secondary Pack capable of providing a pulse on/pulse off signal for purposes of controlling shade systems via relay inputs. j. Secondary Pack capable of switching 1 amp at 40 VAC/VDC (resistive only) with the intent to provide relay signal to auxiliary system (e.g. BMS). k. Power Supply capable of providing auxiliary bus power (no switched or dimmed load).
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Installation Procedures and Verification 1. The successful bidder shall review all required installation and pre-startup procedures with the manufacturer’s representative through pre-construction meetings. 2. The successful bidder shall install and connect the networked lighting control system components according to the manufacturer’s installation instructions, wiring diagrams, the project submittals and plans specifications. 3. The successful bidder shall be responsible for testing of all low voltage network cable included in the bid. Bidder is responsible for verification of the following minimum parameters: a. Wire Map (continuity, pin termination, shorts and open connections, etc.) b. Length c. Insertion Loss
B. Documentation and Deliverables 1. The installing contractor shall be responsible for documenting installed location of all networked devices, including networked luminaires. This includes responsibility to provide as-built plan drawing showing device address barcodes corresponding to locations of installed equipment. 2. The installing contractor is also responsible for the following additional documentation to the manufacturer’s representative if visualization / graphical floorplan software is provided as part of bid package: a. As-Built floor plan drawings showing daisy-chain wired network control zones outlined, in addition to device address locations required above. All documentation shall remain legible when reproducing\scanning drawing files for electronic submission. b. As-Built electrical lighting drawings (reflected ceiling plan) in PDF and CAD format. Architectural floor plans shall be based on as-built conditions. 1) CAD files shall have layers already turned on/off as desired to be shown in the graphical floorplan background images. The following CAD elements are recommended to be hidden to produce an ideal background graphical image: Network Lighting Controls 26 09 43 - 12 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
Titleblock Text- Inclusive of room names and numbers, fixture tags and drawings notes Fixture wiring and homeruns Control devices Hatching or poché of light fixtures or architectural elements 2) CAD files shall be of AutoCAD 2013 or earlier. Revit file overall floor plan views shall be exported to AutoCAD 2013.
3.2 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Upon completion of installation by the installer, including completion of all required verification and documentation required by the manufacturer, the system shall be started up and programmed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer. 1. Low voltage network cable testing shall be performed prior to system startup.
B. System start-up and programming shall include: 1. Verifying operational communication to all system devices. 2. Programming the network devices into functional control zones to meet the required sequence of operation. 3. Programming and verifying all sequence of operations. 4. Customization of owner’s software interfaces and applications.
C. Initial start-up and programming is to occur on-site. Additional programming may occur on-site or remotely over the Internet as necessary.
3.3 PROJECT TURNOVER
A. System Documentation 1. Submit software database file with desired device labels and notes completed. Changes to this file will not be made by the factory.
B. Owner Training 1. Provisions for onsite training for owner and designated attendees to be included in submittal package.
END OF SECTION
Network Lighting Controls 26 09 43 - 13 This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. ATS: Acceptance testing specification.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. GFEP: Ground-fault equipment protection.
D. HID: High-intensity discharge.
E. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.
F. SPD: Surge protective device.
G. VPR: Voltage protection rating.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard. 1. Include materials, switching and overcurrent protective devices, SPDs, accessories, and components indicated. 2. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Show tabulations of installed devices with nameplates, conductor termination sizes, equipment features, and ratings. 3. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental protection, knockouts, corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets, hinges, and locks. 4. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 5. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations.
Panelboards 26 24 16 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and GFEP Types: Two spares for each panelboard. 3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.
B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
Panelboards 26 24 16 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F to plus 104 deg F. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: 1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.
C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's and Owner's permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 70E.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panelboards that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Panelboard Warranty Period: 18 months from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELBOARDS COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with project requirements. 1. Siemens (to match existing)
B. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
G. Enclosures: Flush and Surface-mounted, dead-front cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
Panelboards 26 24 16 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
c. Kitchen or Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. e. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 5. 2. Height: 84 inches maximum. 3. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware. 4. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware. 5. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. 6. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. 7. Finishes: a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.
H. Incoming Mains: Refer to plans.
I. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. a. Plating shall run entire length of bus. b. Bus shall be fully rated the entire length. 2. Interiors shall be factory assembled into a unit. Replacing switching and protective devices shall not disturb adjacent units or require removing the main bus connectors. 3. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box. 4. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated from box. 5. Full-Sized Neutral: Equipped with full-capacity bonding strap for service entrance applications. Mount electrically isolated from enclosure. Do not mount neutral bus in gutter. 6. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authority having jurisdiction, as suitable for nonlinear loads in electronic-grade panelboards and others designated on Drawings. Connectors shall be sized for double-sized or parallel conductors as indicated on Drawings. Do not mount neutral bus in gutter.
J. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Terminations shall allow use of 75 deg C rated conductors without derating. 3. Size: Lugs suitable for indicated conductor sizes, with additional gutter space, if required, for larger conductors.
Panelboards 26 24 16 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
4. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type, with a lug on the neutral bar for each pole in the panelboard. 5. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type, with a lug on the bar for each pole in the panelboard. 6. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 7. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 8. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material and with matching insulating covers. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 9. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra- capacity neutral bus.
K. NRTL Label: Panelboards or load centers shall be labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authority having jurisdiction for use as service equipment with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. Panelboards or load centers shall have meter enclosures, wiring, connections, and other provisions for utility metering. Coordinate with utility company for exact requirements.
L. Future Devices: Panelboards or load centers shall have mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. 1. Percentage of Future Space Capacity: Ten percent.
M. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include label or manual with size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices listed and labeled by an NRTL for series-connected short-circuit rating. 1. Panelboards rated 240 V or less shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on Drawings, but not less than 10,000 A rms symmetrical. 2. Panelboards rated above 240 V and less than 600 V shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on Drawings, but not less than 14,000 A rms symmetrical.
N. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short- circuit current available at terminals. Assembly listed by an NRTL for 100 percent interrupting capacity. 1. Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated 240 V or less shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on Drawings, but not less than 10,000 A rms symmetrical. 2. Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated above 240 V and less than 600 V shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on Drawings, but not less than 14,000 A rms symmetrical.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
Panelboards 26 24 16 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with project requirements. 1. Siemens (to match existing)
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
C. Mains: As indicated
D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.
E. Doors: Door-in-door construction with concealed hinges; secured with multipoint latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. Outer door shall permit full access to the panel interior. Inner door shall permit access to breaker operating handles and labeling, but current carrying terminals and bus shall remain concealed.
2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with project requirements. 1. Siemens (to match existing)
B. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads. b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. c. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. 3. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: a. RMS sensing. b. Field-replaceable rating plug or electronic trip. c. Digital display of settings, trip targets, and indicated metering displays. d. Multi-button keypad to access programmable functions and monitored data. e. Ten-event, trip-history log. Each trip event shall be recorded with type, phase, and magnitude of fault that caused the trip. f. Integral test jack for connection to portable test set or laptop computer. g. Field-Adjustable Settings: 1) Instantaneous trip. 2) Long- and short-time pickup levels. 3) Long and short time adjustments. 4) Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared T response. 4. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and double-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).
Panelboards 26 24 16 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
5. GFEP Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). 6. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240- V, single-pole configuration. 7. Subfeed Circuit Breakers: Vertically mounted. 8. MCCB Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Breaker handle indicates tripped status. c. UL listed for reverse connection without restrictive line or load ratings. d. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. e. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and HID lighting circuits. f. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. g. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage. h. Rating Plugs: Three-pole breakers with ampere ratings greater than 150 amperes shall have interchangeable rating plugs or electronic adjustable trip units. i. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing with a single handle. j. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in off position.
C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle. 1. Fuses and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Section 262813 "Fuses." 2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: a. Standard ampere ratings and number of poles. b. Mechanical cover interlock with a manual interlock override, to prevent the opening of the cover when the switch is in the on position. The interlock shall prevent the switch from being turned on with the cover open. The operating handle shall have lock-off means with provisions for three padlocks. c. Auxiliary Contacts: One normally open and normally closed contact(s) that operate with switch handle operation.
2.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of phases, and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door.
B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC rating.
C. Circuit Directory: Directory card inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.
Panelboards 26 24 16 - 7 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1. Circuit directory shall identify specific purpose with detail sufficient to distinguish it from all other circuits.
2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify actual conditions with field measurements prior to ordering panelboards to verify that equipment fits in allocated space in, and comply with, minimum required clearances specified in NFPA 70.
B. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407.
C. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged, rusted, or have been subjected to water saturation.
D. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Comply with NECA 1.
C. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.
D. Equipment Mounting: 1. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.
E. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
F. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.
G. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
Panelboards 26 24 16 - 8 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
H. Mount surface-mounted panelboards to steel slotted supports 5/8 inch in depth. Orient steel slotted supports vertically.
I. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. 2. Tighten bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using calibrated torque wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written instructions.
J. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately derived systems to ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes, separate grounds for isolated ground bars, and connections to separate ground bars.
K. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
L. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten directories are not acceptable. Install directory inside panelboard door.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in power panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
E. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit.
Panelboards 26 24 16 - 9 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test for low-voltage air circuit breakers stated in NETA ATS, Paragraph 7.6 Circuit Breakers. Perform optional tests. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. c. Instruments and Equipment: 1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results, with comparisons of the two scans. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. Prior to making circuit changes to achieve load balancing, inform Architect of effect on phase color coding. 1. Measure loads during period of normal facility operations. 2. Perform circuit changes to achieve load balancing outside normal facility operation schedule or at times directed by the Architect. Avoid disrupting services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. 3. After changing circuits to achieve load balancing, recheck loads during normal facility operations. Record load readings before and after changing circuits to achieve load balancing. 4. Tolerance: Maximum difference between phase loads, within a panelboard, shall not exceed 20 percent.
Panelboards 26 24 16 - 10 This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Prior to energizing panelboards, apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
Panelboards 26 24 16 - 11 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Heavy duty receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 2. GFCI receptacles, 125 V, 20 A. 3. Heavy duty toggle switches, 120/277 V, 20 A. 4. Decorator-style devices, 20 A. 5. Occupancy sensors. 6. Wall-box dimmers. 7. Wall plates.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. AFCI: Arc-fault circuit interrupter.
B. BAS: Building automation system.
C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
D. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
E. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
F. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
G. SPD: Surge protective device.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.
C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements. 1. Hubbell Wiring Device-Kellems 2. Legrand 3. Pass & Seymour 4. Engineer approved equal
B. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
D. Comply with NEMA WD 1.
E. Device Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: As specified above, with orange triangle on face.
F. Wall Plate Color: Stainless steel
2.2 HEAVY DUTY RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A
A. Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and FS W-C-596.
B. Tamper-Resistant Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is inserted in the receptacle. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 498 and FS W-C-596. 4. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles" Article.
C. Weather-Resistant Duplex Receptacle, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Description: Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. Integral shutters that operate only when a plug is inserted in the receptacle. Square face. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 498. 4. Marking: Listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, "Receptacles in Damp or Wet Locations" Article.
2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES, 125 V, 20 A
A. Duplex GFCI Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1. Description: Integral GFCI with "Test" and "Reset" buttons and LED indicator light. Two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R. 3. Type: Feed through. 4. Standards: Comply with UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.
2.4 HEAVY DUTY TOGGLE SWITCHES, 120/277 V, 20 A
A. Single-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
B. Two-Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
C. Three-Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
D. Four-Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
E. Pilot-Light, Single-Pole Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Description: Illuminated when switch is on. 2. Standards: Comply with UL 20 and FS W-S-896.
F. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Description: For use with mechanically held lighting contactors. 2. Standards: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.
2.5 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Wall Switch Sensor Light Switch, Dual Technology: 1. Description: Switchbox-mounted, combination lighting-control sensor and conventional switch lighting-control unit using dual (ultrasonic and passive infrared) technology. 2. Standards: Comply with UL 20. 3. Rated 960 W at 120 V ac for tungsten lighting, 10 A at 120 V ac or 10 A at 277 V ac for fluorescent or LED lighting, and 1/4 hp at 120 V ac. 4. Adjustable time delay of 20 minutes. 5. Able to be locked to Manual-On mode. 6. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc.
2.6 DIMMERS
A. Wall-Box Dimmers: 1. Description: Modular, full-wave, solid-state dimmer switch with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters. 2. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. 3. Standards: Comply with UL 1472. 4. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off switch positions shall bypass dimmer module.
Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
a. 600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices. 5. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness. 6. LED Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with LED lamps; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.
2.7 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch-thick, satin-finished, Type 302 stainless steel. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.
B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes, and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall comply with NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.
Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
D. Device Installation: 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right. 2. Install hospital-grade receptacles in patient-care areas with the ground pin or neutral blade at the top.
F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G. Dimmers: 1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan-speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' device, listing conditions in the written instructions.
H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.
I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.
3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. Install non-feed-through GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.
Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
B. Test Instrument for Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.
C. Tests for Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault-current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.
D. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION
Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 4. Molded-case switches. 5. Enclosures.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. NC: Normally closed.
B. NO: Normally open.
C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include nameplate ratings, dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.
B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers 26 28 16 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on- site testing.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with project requirements. 1. Square D, Schneider Electric 2. Eaton 3. Siemens
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers 26 28 16 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single manufacturer.
B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
2.4 FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Type HD, Heavy Duty: 1. Single throw. 2. Poles: as indicated 3. 600-V ac. 4. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses. 5. Lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
B. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 5. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 6. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
2.5 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Three Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers 26 28 16 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Three Pole, Double Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
D. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 5. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 6. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
2.6 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Circuit breakers shall be constructed using glass-reinforced insulating material. Current carrying components shall be completely isolated from the handle and the accessory mounting area.
B. Circuit breakers shall have a toggle operating mechanism with common tripping of all poles, which provides quick-make, quick-break contact action. The circuit-breaker handle shall be over center, be trip free, and reside in a tripped position between on and off to provide local trip indication. Circuit-breaker escutcheon shall be clearly marked on and off in addition to providing international I/O markings. Equip circuit breaker with a push- to-trip button, located on the face of the circuit breaker to mechanically operate the circuit-breaker tripping mechanism for maintenance and testing purposes.
C. The maximum ampere rating and UL, IEC, or other certification standards with applicable voltage systems and corresponding interrupting ratings shall be clearly marked on face of circuit breaker. Circuit breakers shall be 100 percent rated.
D. MCCBs shall be equipped with a device for locking in the isolated position.
E. Lugs shall be suitable for 140 deg F rated wire on 125-A circuit breakers and below.
F. Standard: Comply with UL 489 with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.
G. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current thermal element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
H. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front- mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
I. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings:
Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers 26 28 16 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1. Instantaneous trip. 2. Long- and short-time pickup levels. 3. Long- and short-time time adjustments. 4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I-squared t response.
J. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
K. Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).
L. Ground-Fault Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).
M. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits. 4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self- powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor. 5. Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted Integral communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system. 6. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact. 7. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time delay. 8. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts. 9. Alarm Switch: One NO / NC contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped. 10. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position. 11. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function. 12. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations.
2.7 MOLDED-CASE SWITCHES
A. Description: MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating.
B. Standard: Comply with UL 489 with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.
Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers 26 28 16 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes and number of poles. 2. Lugs: a. Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. b. Lugs shall be suitable for 140 deg F rated wire on 125-A circuit breakers and below. 3. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; remote-mounted and powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor. 4. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact. 5. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time delay. 6. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic switch contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of switch contacts. 7. Alarm Switch: One NO / NC contact that operates only when switch has tripped. 8. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit switch operation; key shall be removable only when switch is in off position. 9. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with ground-fault shunt trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function. 10. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations.
2.8 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: UL 489, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
B. Enclosure Finish: The enclosure shall be gray baked enamel paint, electrodeposited on cleaned, phosphatized steel (NEMA 250 Type 1).
C. Conduit Entry: NEMA 250 Types 4, 4X, and 12 enclosures shall contain no knockouts. NEMA 250 Types 7 and 9 enclosures shall be provided with threaded conduit openings in both endwalls.
D. Operating Mechanism: The circuit-breaker operating handle shall be externally operable with the operating mechanism being an integral part of the box, not the cover directly operable through the front cover of the enclosure (NEMA 250 Type 1). The cover interlock mechanism shall have an externally operated override. The override shall not permanently disable the interlock mechanism, which shall return to the locked position once the override is released. The tool used to override the cover interlock mechanism shall not be required to enter the enclosure in order to override the interlock.
E. Enclosures designated as NEMA 250 Type 4, 4X stainless steel, 12, or 12K shall have a dual cover interlock mechanism to prevent unintentional opening of the enclosure cover when the circuit breaker is ON and to prevent turning the circuit breaker ON when the enclosure cover is open.
Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers 26 28 16 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
F. NEMA 250 Type 7/9 enclosures shall be furnished with a breather and drain kit to allow their use in outdoor and wet location applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Commencement of work shall indicate Installer's acceptance of the areas and conditions as satisfactory.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's and Owner's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E.
3.3 ENCLOSURE ENVIRONMENTAL RATING APPLICATIONS
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: Provide enclosures at installed locations with the following environmental ratings. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Kitchen and Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. 4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.
Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers 26 28 16 - 7 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting of eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
E. Install fuses in fusible devices.
F. Comply with NFPA 70 and NECA 1.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
D. Perform tests and inspections.
E. Tests and Inspections for Switches: 1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. c. Verify that the unit is clean. d. Verify blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and mechanical operation. e. Verify that fuse sizes and types match the Specifications and Drawings. f. Verify that each fuse has adequate mechanical support and contact integrity. g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two following methods: 1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter. a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS Table 100.12.
Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers 26 28 16 - 8 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
a) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS Table 100.12. h. Verify that operation and sequencing of interlocking systems is as described in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings. i. Verify correct phase barrier installation. j. Verify lubrication of moving current-carrying parts and moving and sliding surfaces. 2. Electrical Tests: a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Measure contact resistance across each switchblade fuseholder. Drop values shall not exceed the high level of the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's published data are not available, investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. c. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole, phase-to- phase and phase-to-ground with switch closed, and across each open pole. Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use Table 100.1 from the NETA ATS. Investigate values of insulation resistance less than those published in Table 100.1 or as recommended in manufacturer's published data. d. Measure fuse resistance. Investigate fuse-resistance values that deviate from each other by more than 15 percent. e. Perform ground fault test according to NETA ATS 7.14 "Ground Fault Protection Systems, Low-Voltage."
F. Tests and Inspections for Molded Case Circuit Breakers: 1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: a. Verify that equipment nameplate data are as described in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. d. Verify that the unit is clean. e. Operate the circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation. f. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two following methods: 1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter. a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers 26 28 16 - 9 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS Table 100.12. a) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS Table 100.12. g. Inspect operating mechanism, contacts, and chutes in unsealed units. h. Perform adjustments for final protective device settings in accordance with the coordination study. 2. Electrical Tests: a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole, phase-to- phase and phase-to-ground with circuit breaker closed, and across each open pole. Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use Table 100.1 from the NETA ATS. Investigate values of insulation resistance less than those published in Table 100.1 or as recommended in manufacturer's published data. c. Perform a contact/pole resistance test. Drop values shall not exceed the high level of the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's published data are not available, investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. d. Perform insulation resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground. Applied potential shall be 500-V dc for 300-V rated cable and 1000-V dc for 600-V rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute. For units with solid state components, follow manufacturer's recommendation. Insulation resistance values shall be no less than two megohms. e. Determine the following by primary current injection: 1) Long-time pickup and delay. Pickup values shall be as specified. Trip characteristics shall not exceed manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors. 2) Short-time pickup and delay. Short-time pickup values shall be as specified. Trip characteristics shall not exceed manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors. 3) Ground-fault pickup and time delay. Ground-fault pickup values shall be as specified. Trip characteristics shall not exceed manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors. 4) Instantaneous pickup. Instantaneous pickup values shall be as specified and within manufacturer's published tolerances.
Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers 26 28 16 - 10 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
f. Test functionality of the trip unit by means of primary current injection. Pickup values and trip characteristics shall be as specified and within manufacturer's published tolerances. g. Perform minimum pickup voltage tests on shunt trip and close coils in accordance with manufacturer's published data. Minimum pickup voltage of the shunt trip and close coils shall be as indicated by manufacturer. h. Verify correct operation of auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indicators; zone interlocking; electrical close and trip operation; trip-free, anti-pump function; and trip unit battery condition. Reset all trip logs and indicators. Investigate units that do not function as designed. i. Verify operation of charging mechanism. Investigate units that do not function as designed. 3. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 4. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 5. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
G. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
H. Prepare test and inspection reports. 1. Test procedures used. 2. Include identification of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker tested and describe test results. 3. List deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers 26 28 16 - 11 This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 26 51 19 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following types of LED luminaires: 1. Downlight. 2. Recessed, linear. 3. Strip light. 4. Surface mount, linear. 5. Surface mount, nonlinear. 6. Suspended, linear.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 09 23 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting. 2. Section 26 09 43 "Network Lighting Controls" for automatic control of lighting.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.
B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.
C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."
D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.
E. LED: Light-emitting diode.
F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation. 2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires. 4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers. 5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data. 6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IES "Lighting Measurements Testing and Calculation Guides" for each luminaire type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps and accessories identical to those indicated for the luminaire as applied in this Project. a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National
LED Interior Lighting 26 51 19 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Luminaires. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extend to within 12 inches of the plane of the luminaires. 4. Structural members to which equipment and or luminaires will be attached. 5. Initial access modules for acoustical tile, including size and locations. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following: a. Other luminaires. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Ceiling-mounted projectors.
B. Qualification Data: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires.
C. Seismic Qualification Data: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire.
E. Sample warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.
LED Interior Lighting 26 51 19 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products, and complying with the applicable IES testing standards.
C. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.
D. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color consistency among luminaires.
E. Mockups: For interior luminaires in room or module mockups, complete with power and control connections. 1. Obtain Architect's approval of luminaires in mockups before starting installations. 2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
LED Interior Lighting 26 51 19 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with project requirements. 1. Lithonia Lighting, Acuity Brands 2. Hubbell Lighting 3. Eaton 4. Philips Lighting 5. Engineer approved equal
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
B. Seismic Performance: Luminaires and lamps shall be labeled vibration and shock resistant. 1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully operational during and after the seismic event."
C. Ambient Temperature: 41 to 104 deg F. 1. Relative Humidity: Zero to 95 percent.
D. Altitude: Sea level to 1000 feet.
E. Color Temperature: 4000k
2.3 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate labels where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. 1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics: a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating. c. CCT and CRI.
C. Recessed luminaires shall comply with NEMA LE 4.
D. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL.
E. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.
LED Interior Lighting 26 51 19 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.4 DOWNLIGHT.
A. Nominal Operating Voltage: As indicated.
B. Lamp: 1. Lumens: As indicated 2. CRI: As indicated 3. CCT: 4000k 4. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70. 5. Dimmable from 100 percent to 1 percent of maximum light output. 6. Internal driver. 7. User-Replaceable Lamps: a. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C78.79. b. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1. 8. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
C. Housings: 1. Extruded-aluminum or steel housing and heat sink. 2. Anodized or powder coated finish. 3. Universal mounting bracket. 4. Integral junction box with conduit fittings.
D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
E. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Fixed or Adjustable lens as indicated. 2. Light distribution: As indicated. 3. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 4. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 5. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
F. Standards: 1. ENERGY STAR certified. 2. RoHS compliant. 3. UL Listing: Listed for damp location. 4. Recessed luminaires shall comply with NEMA LE 4.
2.5 RECESSED, LINEAR.
A. Nominal Operating Voltage: As indicated.
B. Lamp: 1. Lumens: As indicated. 2. Minimum allowable efficacy of 85 lm/W.
LED Interior Lighting 26 51 19 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3. CRI: As indicated. 4. CCT: 4000k 5. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70. 6. Dimmable from 100 percent to 1 percent of maximum light output. 7. Internal driver. 8. User-Replaceable Lamps: a. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C78.79. b. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1. 9. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
C. Housings: 1. Extruded-aluminum or steel housing and heat sink. 2. Clear Insert color anodized or powder-coat finish. 3. With integral mounting provisions.
D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Components are designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
E. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Prismatic glass. 2. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 3. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 4. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
F. Standards: 1. ENERGY STAR certified. 2. RoHS compliant. 3. UL Listing: Listed for damp location. 4. NEMA LE 4.
2.6 STRIP LIGHT.
A. Nominal Operating Voltage: As indicated.
B. Lamp: 1. Lumens: As indicated. 2. Minimum allowable efficacy of 80 lm/W. 3. CRI: As indicated. 4. CCT: 4000k 5. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70. 6. Dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output. 7. Internal driver. 8. User-Replaceable Lamps: a. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C78.79. b. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1.
LED Interior Lighting 26 51 19 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
9. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
C. Housings: 1. Extruded-aluminum or steel housing and heat sink. 2. Clear anodized or powder-coat finish. 3. With integral mounting provisions.
D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping of luminaire without use of tools. Components are designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
E. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Lens: As indicated. 2. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 3. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 4. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
F. Standards: 1. ENERGY STAR certified. 2. RoHS compliant. 3. UL Listing: Listed for damp location.
2.7 SURFACE MOUNT, LINEAR.
A. Nominal Operating Voltage: As indicated.
B. Lamp: 1. Lumens: As indicated. 2. Minimum allowable efficacy of 80 lm/W. 3. CRI: As indicated. 4. CCT: 4000k 5. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70. 6. Dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output. 7. Internal driver. 8. User-Replaceable Lamps: a. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C78.79. b. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1. 9. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
C. Housings: 1. Extruded-aluminum or steel housing and heat sink. 2. Anodized or powder-coat finish. 3. With integral mounting provisions.
LED Interior Lighting 26 51 19 - 7 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Components are designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
E. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Lens: As indicated 2. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 3. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 4. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
F. Standards: 1. ENERGY STAR certified. 2. RoHS compliant. 3. UL Listing: Listed for damp location.
2.8 SURFACE MOUNT, NONLINEAR
A. Nominal Operating Voltage: As indicated.
B. Lamp: 1. Lumens: As indicated. 2. Minimum allowable efficacy of 80 lm/W. 3. CRI: As indicated. 4. CCT: 4000k 5. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70. 6. Dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output. 7. Internal driver. 8. User-Replaceable Lamps: a. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C78.79. b. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1. 9. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
C. Housings: 1. Extruded-aluminum or steel housing and heat sink. 2. Anodized or powder-coat finish. 3. With integral mounting provisions.
D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Components are designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
E. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Lens: As indicated.
LED Interior Lighting 26 51 19 - 8 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 3. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 4. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
F. Standards: 1. ENERGY STAR certified. 2. RoHS compliant. 3. UL Listing: Listed for damp location.
2.9 SUSPENDED, LINEAR
A. Nominal Operating Voltage: As indicated.
B. Lamp: 1. Lumens: As indicated. 2. Minimum allowable efficacy of 85 lm/W. 3. CRI: As indicated. 4. CCT: 4000k 5. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70. 6. Dimmable from 100 percent to 1 percent of maximum light output. 7. Internal driver. 8. User-Replaceable Lamps: a. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C78.79. b. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1. 9. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
C. Housings: 1. Extruded-aluminum or steel housing and heat sink. 2. Anodized or powder-coat finish. 3. With integral mounting provisions.
D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Components are designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
E. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Lens: As indicated. 2. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 3. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 4. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
F. Standards: 1. ENERGY STAR certified. 2. RoHS compliant.
LED Interior Lighting 26 51 19 - 9 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3. UL Listing: Listed for damp location.
2.10 SUSPENDED, NONLINEAR
A. Nominal Operating Voltage: As indicated.
B. Lamp: 1. Lumens: As indicated. 2. Minimum allowable efficacy of 85 lm/W. 3. CRI: As indicated. 4. CCT: 4000k 5. Rated lamp life of 50,000 hours to L70. 6. Dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output. 7. Internal driver. 8. User-Replaceable Lamps: a. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C78.79. b. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1. 9. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
C. Housings: 1. Extruded-aluminum or steel housing and heat sink. 2. Anodized or powder-coat finish. 3. Universal mounting bracket. 4. Integral junction box with conduit fittings.
D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Components are designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
E. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Lens: As indicated. 2. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 3. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 4. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
F. Standards: 1. ENERGY STAR certified. 2. RoHS compliant. 3. UL Listing: Listed for damp location.
2.11 MATERIALS
A. Metal Parts: 1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
LED Interior Lighting 26 51 19 - 10 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Steel: 1. ASTM A 36/A 36M for carbon structural steel. 2. ASTM A 568/A 568M for sheet steel.
C. Stainless Steel: 1. 1. Manufacturer's standard grade. 2. 2. Manufacturer's standard type, ASTM A 240/240 M.
D. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M.
E. Aluminum: ASTM B 209.
2.12 METAL FINISHES
A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.13 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as luminaire.
C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.
D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before luminaire installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
LED Interior Lighting 26 51 19 - 11 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING
A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install new lamps.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install lamps in each luminaire.
D. Supports: 1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping. 3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.
E. Flush-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Secured to outlet box. 2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around circumference of luminaire. 3. Trim ring flush with finished surface.
F. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Attached to structural members in walls. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.
G. Suspended Luminaires: 1. Ceiling Mount: a. 5/32-inch-diameter aircraft cable supports adjustable to required lenght. b. Hook mount. 2. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 3. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices. 4. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end. 5. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.
LED Interior Lighting 26 51 19 - 12 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
H. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires: 1. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.
I. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for wiring connections.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. 2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.
B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Comply with requirements for startup specified in Section 26 09 43 "Network Lighting Controls."
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied conditions. Make up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required during hours of darkness. 1. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps or luminaires that are defective. 2. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3. Adjust the aim of luminaires in the presence of the Architect.
END OF SECTION
LED Interior Lighting 26 51 19 - 13 This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 26 52 13 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Emergency lighting units. 2. Exit signs. 3. Luminaire supports.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.
B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.
C. Emergency Lighting Unit: A lighting unit with internal or external emergency battery powered supply and the means for controlling and charging the battery and unit operation.
D. Fixture: See "Luminaire" Paragraph.
E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and emergency lighting support. 1. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 2. Include physical description of the unit and dimensions. 3. Battery and charger for light units. 4. Include life, output of luminaire (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data. 5. Include photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IES LM-45, for each luminaire type. a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires and signs, photometric data certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires and signs shall be certified by manufacturer. b. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
Emergency And Exit Lighting 26 52 13 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Luminaires. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extend to within 12 inches of the plane of the luminaires. 4. Structural members to which equipment will be attached. 5. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: a. Other luminaires. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Ceiling-mounted projectors. e. Sprinklers. f. Access panels. 7. Moldings.
B. Product Test Reports: For each luminaire for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
C. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's laboratory that is accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
Emergency And Exit Lighting 26 52 13 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with project requirements 1. Lithonia Lighting, Acuity Brands 2. Hubbell Lighting 3. Eaton 4. Philips Lighting
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully operational during and after the seismic event."
2.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. NRTL Compliance: Fabricate and label emergency lighting units, exit signs, and batteries to comply with UL 924.
C. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.
D. Comply with NEMA LE 4 for recessed luminaires.
E. Comply with UL 1598 for fluorescent luminaires.
F. Internal Type Emergency Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within luminaire body and compatible with ballast. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate at least one lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100 lumens each upon loss of normal power. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to luminaire ballast. 2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.
Emergency And Exit Lighting 26 52 13 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Less than 0 deg F or exceeding 104 deg F, with an average value exceeding 95 deg F over a 24-hour period. b. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding 140 deg F. c. Humidity: More than 95 percent (condensing). d. Altitude: Exceeding 3300 feet. 4. Test Push-Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening luminaire or entering ceiling space. a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 5. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 6. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer relay. 7. Remote Test: Switch in handheld remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response. 8. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.
G. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering one or more lamps, remote mounted from luminaire. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate luminaire continuously. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to luminaire. 2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type. 5. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure listed for installation inside, on top of, or remote from luminaire. Remote assembly shall be located no less than half the distance recommended by the emergency power unit manufacturer, whichever is less. 6. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. 7. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 8. Remote Test: Switch in handheld remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.
Emergency And Exit Lighting 26 52 13 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
9. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.
2.4 EMERGENCY LIGHTING
A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units.
B. Emergency Luminaires: 1. Emergency Luminaires: as indicated on Drawings, with the following additional features: a. Operating at nominal voltage: As required. b. Internal emergency power unit. c. Rated for installation in damp locations, and for sealed and gasketed luminaires in wet locations. d. UL 94 flame rating.
C. Emergency Lighting Unit: 1. Emergency Lighting Unit: as indicated on Drawings. 2. Operating at nominal voltage: As required. 3. Wall with universal junction box adaptor. 4. UV stable thermoplastic housing. 5. Two LED lamp heads. 6. Internal emergency power unit.
2.5 EXIT SIGNS
A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Operating at nominal voltage: As required. 2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs; 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 3. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Internal emergency power unit.
2.6 MATERIALS
A. Metal Parts: 1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: 1. Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions. 2. Designed to permit relamping without use of tools. 3. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
Emergency And Exit Lighting 26 52 13 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Acrylic: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 2. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.
D. Conduit: Minimum 3/4 inch in diameter.
2.7 METAL FINISHES
A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.8 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Support Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting performance of luminaires.
B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before luminaire installation.
C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings for suitable conditions where emergency lighting luminaires will be installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install lamps in each luminaire.
D. Supports: 1. Sized and rated for luminaire and emergency power unit weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position when testing emergency power unit.
Emergency And Exit Lighting 26 52 13 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3. Provide support for luminaire and emergency power unit without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of luminaire and emergency power unit weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.
E. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Attached to structural members in walls. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.
F. Suspended Luminaire Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices. 3. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end. 4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.
G. Ceiling Grid Mounted Luminaires: 1. Secure to any required outlet box. 2. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.
B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Perform startup service: 1. Charge emergency power units and batteries minimum of one hour and depress switch to conduct short-duration test.
Emergency And Exit Lighting 26 52 13 - 7 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2. Charge emergency power units and batteries minimum of 24 hours and conduct one-hour discharge test.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjustments: Within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site visit to do the following: 1. Inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps, emergency power units, batteries, signs, or luminaires that are defective. a. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 2. Conduct short-duration tests on all emergency lighting.
END OF SECTION
Emergency And Exit Lighting 26 52 13 - 8 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Hooks. 3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.
B. GRC: Galvanized rigid conduit.
C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
D. RTRC: Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for the following: 1. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Pathway routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: 1. Structural members in paths of pathway groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Description: Metal raceway of circular cross section with manufacturer-fabricated fittings.
Pathways For Communications Systems 27 05 28 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with TIA-569-D.
C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
D. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.
E. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated GRC. 1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.
F. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
G. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 1203 and NFPA 70. 2. Fittings for EMT: a. Material: Steel or die cast. b. Type: compression. 3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL-467, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.
H. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
2.2 HOOKS
A. Description: Prefabricated sheet metal cable supports for telecommunications cable.
B. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Comply with TIA-569-D.
D. Galvanized steel.
E. U shape.
2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Description: Enclosures for communications.
B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets:
Pathways For Communications Systems 27 05 28 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1. Comply with TIA-569-D. 2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for use in wet locations. 3. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. 4. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep. 5. Gangable boxes are prohibited.
C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
E. Metal Floor Boxes: 1. Material: Cast metal or sheet metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
F. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round. 1. Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
I. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.
J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.
K. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
Pathways For Communications Systems 27 05 28 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION
A. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Pathway locations include the following: a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet- handling units. c. Mechanical rooms. d. Gymnasiums 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel units in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.
B. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch trade size for copper and aluminum cables, and 1 inch for optical-fiber cables.
C. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 3. EMT: Use compression, steel or cast-metal fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
D. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
E. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with the following standards for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter: 1. NECA 1. 2. NECA/BICSI 568. 3. TIA-569-D. 4. NECA 101
B. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.
Pathways For Communications Systems 27 05 28 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 00 "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.
D. Comply with requirements in Section 27 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems" for hangers and supports.
E. Comply with requirements in Section 27 05 44 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling" for sleeves and sleeve seals for communications.
F. Keep pathways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping.
G. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation.
H. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
I. Install no more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends in any pathway run. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. Utilize long radius ells for all optical-fiber cables.
J. Conceal rigid conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
K. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
L. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure.
M. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
N. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts.
O. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus one additional quarter-turn.
P. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure, to assure a continuous ground path.
Q. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length.
R. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of
Pathways For Communications Systems 27 05 28 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
pull wire. Secure pull wire, so it cannot fall into conduit. Cap pathways designated as spare alongside pathways in use.
S. Surface Pathways: 1. Install surface pathway for surface telecommunications outlet boxes only where indicated on Drawings. 2. Install surface pathway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 3. Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight pathway section. Support surface pathway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.
T. Install pathway-sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway-sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
U. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals, so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all pathways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
V. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings.
W. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet. 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change. 3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.
Pathways For Communications Systems 27 05 28 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
X. Hooks: 1. Size to allow a minimum of 25 percent future capacity without exceeding design capacity limits. 2. Shall be supported by dedicated support wires. Do not use ceiling grid support wire or support rods. 3. Hook spacing shall allow no more than 6 inches of slack. The lowest point of the cables shall be no less than 6 inches adjacent to ceilings, mechanical ductwork and fittings, luminaires, power conduits, power and telecommunications outlets, and other electrical and communications equipment. 4. Space hooks no more than 5 feet o.c. 5. Provide a hook at each change in direction.
Y. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.
Z. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.
AA. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls, so they are not in the same vertical channel.
BB. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
CC. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.
DD. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
EE. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 27 05 44 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling."
Pathways For Communications Systems 27 05 28 - 7 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 00 "Firestopping."
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage or deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
Pathways For Communications Systems 27 05 28 - 8 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 27 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Steel slotted support systems for communication raceways. 2. Conduit and cable support devices. 3. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, including powder-actuated fasteners, mechanical expansion anchors, concrete inserts, clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts, and hanger rods.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following: a. Slotted support systems, hardware, and accessories. b. Clamps. c. Hangers. d. Sockets. e. Eye nuts. f. Fasteners. g. Anchors. h. Saddles. i. Brackets. 2. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation details for communications hangers and support systems. 1. Trapeze hangers. Include product data for components. 2. Steel slotted-channel systems. 3. Equipment supports. 4. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For hangers and supports for communications systems. 1. Include design calculations and details of trapeze hangers. 2. Include design calculations for seismic restraints.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
Hangers And Supports For Communications Systems 27 05 29 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Ductwork, piping, fittings, and supports. 3. Structural members to which hangers and supports will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following: a. Luminaires. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Projectors.
B. Welding certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design hanger and support system.
2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Preformed steel channels and angles with minimum 13/32-inch-diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c. in at least one surface. 1. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 2. Material for Channel, Fittings, and Accessories: Galvanized steel. 3. Channel Width: 1-5/8 inches. 4. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron clamps, hangers, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
C. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
Hangers And Supports For Communications Systems 27 05 29 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.3 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.
B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with the following standards for application and installation requirements of hangers and supports, except where requirements on Drawings or in this Section are stricter: 1. NECA 1. 2. NECA/BICSI 568. 3. TIA-569-D. 4. NECA 101 5. NECA 105.
B. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 00 "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.
C. Comply with requirements for pathways specified in Section 27 05 28 "Pathways for Communications Systems."
D. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMTs, IMCs, and RMCs as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
E. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components, so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading
Hangers And Supports For Communications Systems 27 05 29 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.
B. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten communications items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Use approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Use expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated-driven threaded studs, provided with lock washers and nuts, may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS SP-58, Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27), complying with MSS SP-69. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.
C. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for reinforcing bars.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site- fabricated metal supports.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor communications materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.4 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
Hangers And Supports For Communications Systems 27 05 29 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 27 05 44 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves for pathway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 84 00 "Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire- resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES
A. Wall Sleeves: 1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.
B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.
C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
E. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: 1. Material: Galvanized-steel sheet. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
Sleeves And Sleeve Seals For Communications Pathways 27 05 44 - 1 And Cabling Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable. 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 2. Pressure Plates: Steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.
2.4 GROUT
A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non- fire-rated walls or floors.
B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS
A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below. 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.
B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.
C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry- Unit Floors and Walls: 1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:
Sleeves And Sleeve Seals For Communications Pathways 27 05 44 - 2 And Cabling Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
a. Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing. 2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pathway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting. 5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.
D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: 1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pathway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at pathway entries into building.
B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathway or cable material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pathway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
Sleeves And Sleeve Seals For Communications Pathways 27 05 44 - 3 And Cabling Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
END OF SECTION
Sleeves And Sleeve Seals For Communications Pathways 27 05 44 - 4 And Cabling Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 27 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Color and legend requirements for labels and signs. 2. Labels. 3. Bands and tubes. 4. Tapes. 5. Signs. 6. Cable ties. 7. Fasteners for labels and signs.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for communications identification products.
B. Identification Schedule: 1. Outlets: Scaled drawings indicating location and proposed designation. 2. Backbone Cabling: Riser diagram showing each communications room, backbone cable, and proposed backbone cable designation. 3. Racks: Scaled drawings indicating location and proposed designation. 4. Patch Panels: Enlarged scaled drawings showing rack row, number, and proposed designations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and TIA 606-B.
B. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
C. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
Identification For Communications Systems 27 05 53 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS
A. Equipment Identification Labels: 1. Black letters on a white field.
2.3 LABELS
A. Vinyl Wraparound Labels: Preprinted, flexible labels laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing label ends.
B. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil-thick, polyester flexible labels with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive. 1. Self-Lamination: Clear; UV-, weather- and chemical-resistant; self-laminating protective shields over the legend. Labels sized such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend. 2. Marker for Labels: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof black ink recommended by printer manufacturer.
C. Self-Adhesive Labels: Polyester, thermal, transfer-printed, 3-mil-thick, multicolor, weather- and UV-resistant, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for intended use and location. 1. Minimum Nominal Size: a. 1-1/2 by 6 inches for raceway and conductors. b. 3-1/2 by 5 inches for equipment. c. As required by authorities having jurisdiction.
2.4 BANDS AND TUBES
A. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches long, with diameters sized to suit diameters of raceway or cable they identify, that stay in place by gripping action.
2.5 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
A. Tape: 1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground communications utility lines. 2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert and not subject to degradation when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.
B. Color and Printing: 1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1, ANSI Z535.2, ANSI Z535.3, and ANSI Z535.4. 2. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: "TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL-FIBER CABLE".
Identification For Communications Systems 27 05 53 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Tag: 1. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core; bright colored, continuous- printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct- burial service. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Overall Thickness: 5 mils. 4. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil. 5. Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft.. 6. Tensile according to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf and 4600 psi.
2.6 SIGNS
A. Laminated-Acrylic or Melamine-Plastic Signs: 1. Engraved legend. 2. Thickness: a. For signs up to 20 sq. in., minimum 1/16 inch thick. b. For signs larger than 20 sq. in., 1/8 inch thick. c. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. d. Self-adhesive. e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.
2.7 CABLE TIES
A. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, and self-locking. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F according to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi. 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F. 5. Color: Black.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying communications identification products, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification product.
Identification For Communications Systems 27 05 53 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
D. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual.
E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
F. Install signs with approved legend to facilitate proper identification, operation, and maintenance of communications systems and connected items.
G. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels, signs, and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.
H. Vinyl Wraparound Labels: 1. Secure tight to surface of raceway or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Attach labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape, with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate. 3. Provide label 6 inches from cable end.
I. Snap-Around Labels: 1. Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Provide label 6 inches from cable end.
J. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: 1. Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Provide label 6 inches from cable end.
K. Self-Adhesive Labels: 1. On each item, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and operation and maintenance manual. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-1/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
L. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
M. Underground-Line Warning Tape: 1. During backfilling of trenches, install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above cable or raceway at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use
Identification For Communications Systems 27 05 53 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for direct-buried cables and cables in raceways.
N. Cable Ties: General purpose, except as listed below: 1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to provide view of identifying devices.
B. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, pull points, and locations with high visibility. Identify by system and circuit designation.
C. Accessible Fittings for Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify covers of each junction and pull box with self-adhesive labels containing wiring system legend. 1. System legends shall be as follows: a. Telecommunications.
D. Faceplates: Label individual faceplates with self-adhesive labels. Place label at top of faceplate. Each faceplate shall be labeled with its individual, sequential designation, composed of the following, in the order listed: 1. Wiring closet designation. 2. Colon. 3. Faceplate number.
E. Equipment Room Labeling: 1. Racks, Frames, and Enclosures: Identify front and rear of each with self-adhesive labels containing equipment designation. 2. Patch Panels: Label individual rows in each rack, starting at top and working down, with self-adhesive labels. 3. Data Outlets: Label each outlet with a self-adhesive label indicating the following, in the order listed: a. Room number being served. b. Colon. c. Faceplate number.
F. Backbone Cables: Label each cable with a vinyl-wraparound label indicating the location of the far or other end of the backbone cable. Patch panel or punch down block where cable is terminated should be labeled identically.
Identification For Communications Systems 27 05 53 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
G. Horizontal Cables: Label each cable with a vinyl-wraparound label indicating the following, in the order listed: 1. Room number. 2. Colon. 3. Faceplate number.
H. Locations of Underground Lines: Underground-line warning tape for copper, coaxial, hybrid copper/fiber, and optical-fiber cable.
I. Instructional Signs: Self-adhesive labels.
J. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures: Self-adhesive labels. 1. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
K. Equipment Identification Labels: 1. Indoor Equipment: Laminated-acrylic or melamine-plastic sign. 2. Outdoor Equipment: Laminated-acrylic or melamine-plastic sign. 3. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Communications cabinets. b. Uninterruptible power supplies. c. Computer room air conditioners. d. Fire-alarm and suppression equipment. e. Egress points. f. Power distribution components.
END OF SECTION
Identification For Communications Systems 27 05 53 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 27 11 16 COMMUNICATIONS RACKS, FRAMES, AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. 19-inch equipment racks. 2. Power strips. 3. Grounding. 4. Labeling.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling" for copper data cabling associated with system panels and devices.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Access Provider: An operator that provides a circuit path or facility between the service provider and user. An access provider can also be a service provider.
B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
C. LAN: Local area network.
D. RCDD: Registered communications distribution designer.
E. Service Provider: The operator of a telecommunications transmission service delivered through access provider facilities.
F. TGB: Telecommunications grounding bus bar.
G. TMGB: Telecommunications main grounding bus bar.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for equipment racks and cabinets. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, certifications, standards compliance, and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For communications racks, frames, and enclosures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
Communications Racks, Frames, And Enclosures 27 11 16 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for cable connections. 3. Grounding: Indicate location of TGB and its mounting detail showing standoff insulators and wall-mounting brackets.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under direct supervision of RCDD. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under direct supervision of Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. 3. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as RCDD to perform on-site inspection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. UL listed.
B. Compliant with requirements of the Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard.
2.2 19-INCH EQUIPMENT RACKS
A. Description: Two- and four- post racks with threaded rails designed for mounting telecommunications equipment. Width is compatible with EIA/ECIA 310-E, 19-inch equipment mounting with an opening of 17.72-inches between rails.
B. General Requirements: 1. Frames: Modular units designed for telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported. 2. Material: Sheet and tube steel. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked-polyester powder coat. 4. Color: Black.
C. Wall-Mounted Racks: 1. Height: 24.5 inches. 2. Depth: 25 inches. 3. Load Rating: 85 lb. 4. Number of Rack Units per Rack: 11. 5. Wall Attachment: Four mounting holes minimum. 6. Equipment Access: Integral swing.
Communications Racks, Frames, And Enclosures 27 11 16 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
D. Cable Management: 1. Metal, with integral wire retaining fingers. 2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish. 3. Vertical cable management panels shall have front and rear channels, with covers. 4. Provide horizontal crossover cable manager at the top of each relay rack, with a minimum height of two rack units each.
2.3 POWER STRIPS
A. Power Strips: Comply with UL 1363. 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Rack mounting. 3. Six 15-A, 120-V ac, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-15R receptacles. 4. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 5. LED indicator lights for reverse polarity and open outlet ground. 6. Circuit Breaker: Unit continues to supply power if protection is lost. 7. Cord connected with 15-foot line cord. 8. Rocker-type on-off switch, illuminated when in on position. 9. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 13 kA per phase. 10. Protection modes shall be line to neutral, line to ground, and neutral to ground. UL 1449 clamping voltage for all three modes shall be not more than 330 V.
2.4 GROUNDING
A. Rack and Cabinet TGBs: Rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, accepting conductors ranging from No. 14 to No. 2/0 AWG, NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and complying with TIA-606-B. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section. 1. Cabinet-Mounted TGB: Terminal block, with stainless-steel or copper-plated hardware for attachment to cabinet. 2. Rack-Mounted Horizontal TGB: Designed for mounting in 19-inch equipment racks. Include a copper splice bar for transitioning to an adjoining rack, and stainless-steel or copper-plated hardware for attachment to the rack.
2.5 LABELING
A. Comply with TIA-606-B and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout of communications equipment spaces.
Communications Racks, Frames, And Enclosures 27 11 16 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM for installation of communications equipment spaces.
D. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
E. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment in racks and room. Coordinate service entrance configuration with service provider. 1. Meet jointly with system providers, equipment suppliers, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment configurations and installation interfaces. 2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants. 3. Adjust configurations and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels in equipment spaces to accommodate and optimize configuration and space requirements of telecommunications equipment. 4. Adjust configurations and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross- connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in equipment room.
F. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate.
3.2 GROUNDING
A. Comply with NECA/BICSI 607.
B. Install grounding according to BICSI ITSIMM, "Bonding, Grounding (Earthing) and Electrical Protection" Ch.
C. Locate TGB to minimize length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall, allowing at least 2 inches of clearance behind TGB. Connect TGB with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from TGB to nearest TGB or the TMGB. 1. Bond the shield of shielded cable to patch panel, and bond patch panel to TGB or TMGB.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Coordinate system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA-606-B. Comply with requirements in Section 270553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Labels shall be machine printed. Type shall be 1/8 inch in height.
END OF SECTION
Communications Racks, Frames, And Enclosures 27 11 16 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 27 15 13 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Category 6 twisted pair cable. 2. Twisted pair cable hardware, including plugs and jacks. 3. Cable management system. 4. Cabling identification products. 5. Grounding provisions for twisted pair cable. 6. Source quality control requirements for twisted pair cable.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection.
B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
C. FTP: Shielded twisted pair.
D. F/FTP: Overall foil screened cable with foil screened twisted pair.
E. F/UTP: Overall foil screened cable with unscreened twisted pair.
F. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
G. LAN: Local area network.
H. Jack: Also commonly called an "outlet," it is the fixed, female connector.
I. Plug: Also commonly called a "connector," it is the removable, male telecommunications connector.
J. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
K. Screen: A metallic layer, either a foil or braid, placed around a pair or group of conductors.
L. Shield: A metallic layer, either a foil or braid, placed around a pair or group of conductors.
M. S/FTP: Overall braid screened cable with foil screened twisted pair.
N. S/UTP: Overall braid screened cable with unscreened twisted pairs.
Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling 27 15 13 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
O. UTP: Unscreened (unshielded) twisted pair.
1.3 COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION
A. Horizontal cable cabling system shall provide interconnections between Distributor A, Distributor B, or Distributor C, and the equipment outlet, otherwise known as "Cabling Subsystem 1," in the telecommunications cabling system structure. Cabling system consists of horizontal cables, intermediate and main cross-connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for horizontal-to-horizontal cross- connection. 1. TIA-568-C.1 requires that a minimum of two equipment outlets be installed for each work area. 2. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or consolidation point between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications equipment outlet. 3. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.
B. A work area is approximately 100 sq. ft., and includes the components that extend from the equipment outlets to the station equipment.
C. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet. This maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet to the workstation equipment or in the horizontal cross-connect.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Reviewed and stamped by RCDD. 1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format selected by Owner. 2. Cabling administration Drawings and printouts. 3. Wiring diagrams and installation details of telecommunications equipment, to show location and layout of telecommunications equipment, including the following: a. Telecommunications rooms plans and elevations. b. Telecommunications pathways. c. Telecommunications system access points. d. Telecommunications grounding system. e. Telecommunications conductor drop locations. f. Typical telecommunications details. g. Mechanical, electrical, and plumbing systems.
C. Twisted pair cable testing plan.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For RCDD, installation supervisor, and field inspector.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of product.
Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling 27 15 13 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Source quality-control reports.
D. Field quality-control reports.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Connecting Blocks: One of each type. 2. Faceplates: One of each type. 3. Jacks: Ten of each type. 4. Patch-Panel Units: One of each type. 5. Plugs: Ten of each type.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and cabling administration Drawings by an RCDD. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. 3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on- site testing.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. Test each pair of twisted pair cable for open and short circuits.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.
Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling 27 15 13 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA-568-C.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard.
B. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA-569-D.
C. Grounding: Comply with TIA-607-B.
2.2 GENERAL CABLE CHARACTERISTICS
A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with the applicable standard and NFPA 70 for the following types: 1. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP complying with UL 1685.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
C. RoHS compliant.
2.3 CATEGORY 6 TWISTED PAIR CABLE
A. Description: Four-pair, balanced-twisted pair cable, with internal spline, certified to meet transmission characteristics of Category 6 cable at frequencies up to 250MHz.
B. Standard: Comply with NEMA WC 66/ICEA S-116-732 and TIA-568-C.2 for Category 6 cables.
C. Conductors: 100-ohm, 23 AWG solid copper.
D. Shielding/Screening: Unshielded twisted pairs (UTP).
E. Cable Rating: Plenum.
F. Jacket: Thermoplastic color to match existing cable.
2.4 TWISTED PAIR CABLE HARDWARE
A. Description: Hardware designed to connect, splice, and terminate twisted pair copper communications cable.
B. General Requirements for Twisted Pair Cable Hardware: 1. Comply with the performance requirements of Category 6. 2. Comply with TIA-568-C.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. 3. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.
Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling 27 15 13 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Source Limitations: Obtain twisted pair cable hardware from single source from single manufacturer.
D. Connecting Blocks: 1. 110-style IDC for Category 6. 2. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare, integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.
E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack location for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables. 1. Features: a. Universal T568A and T568B wiring labels. b. Labeling areas adjacent to conductors. c. Replaceable connectors. d. 24 or 48 ports. 2. Construction: 16-gauge steel and mountable on 19-inch equipment racks. 3. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair cable indicated.
F. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 36-inchlengths; terminated with an eight- position modular plug at each end. 1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.
G. Plugs and Plug Assemblies: 1. Male; eight position; color-coded modular telecommunications connector designed for termination of a single four-pair, 100-ohm, unshielded or shielded twisted pair cable. 2. Standard: Comply with TIA-568-C.2. 3. Marked to indicate transmission performance.
H. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: 1. Female; eight position; modular; fixed telecommunications connector designed for termination of a single four-pair, 100-ohm, unshielded or shielded twisted pair cable. 2. Designed to snap-in to a patch panel or faceplate. 3. Standard: Comply with TIA-568-C.2. 4. Marked to indicate transmission performance.
I. Faceplate: 1. Two port, vertical single gang faceplates designed to mount to single gang wall boxes. 2. Metal Faceplate: Stainless steel, complying with requirements in Section 262726 "Wiring Devices." 3. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of twisted pair, optical fiber, and coaxial work area cords.
J. Legend: 1. Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.
Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling 27 15 13 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2.5 CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
A. Description: Computer-based cable management system, with integrated database capabilities.
B. Document physical characteristics by recording the network, TIA details, and connections between equipment and cable.
C. Information shall be presented in database view, schematic plans, or technical drawings. 1. Microsoft Visio Professional or AutoCAD drawing software shall be used as drawing and schematic plans software.
D. System shall interface with the following testing and recording devices: 1. Direct upload tests from circuit testing instrument into the personal computer. 2. Direct download circuit labeling into labeling printer.
2.6 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Comply with TIA-606-B and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
2.7 GROUNDING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 270526 "Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors.
B. Comply with TIA-607-B.
2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.
B. Factory test cables on reels according to TIA-568-C.1.
C. Factory test twisted pair cables according to TIA-568-C.2.
D. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WIRING METHODS
A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays, except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables, except in unfinished spaces. 1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems."
Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling 27 15 13 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS
A. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, cabinets, and racks specified in Section 271100 "Communications Equipment Room Fittings."
B. Comply with Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems."
C. Comply with Section 270529 "Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems."
D. Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF TWISTED-PAIR HORIZONTAL CABLES
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA/BICSI 568.
B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA-568-C.0, TIA-568-C.1, and TIA-568-C.2. 2. Comply with BICSI's "Information Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual (ITSIMM), Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems," "Cable Termination Practices" Section. 3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 4. Do not untwist twisted pair cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. 5. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. 6. MUTOA shall not be used as a cross-connect point. 7. Consolidation points may be used only for making a direct connection to equipment outlets: a. Do not use consolidation point as a cross-connect point, as a patch connection, or for direct connection to workstation equipment. b. Locate consolidation points for twisted-pair cables at least 49 feet from communications equipment room. 8. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 9. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, prevent straining connections, and prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. 10. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI Information Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual , Ch. 5,
Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling 27 15 13 - 7 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
"Copper Structured Cabling Systems," "Cable Termination Practices" Section. Use lacing bars and distribution spools. 11. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation, and replace it with new cable. 12. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 13. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot-long service loop on each end of cable. 14. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI Information Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems," "Pulling and Installing Cable" Section. Monitor cable pull tensions.
C. Open-Cable Installation: 1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 2. Suspend twisted pair cabling, not in a wireway or pathway, a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart. 3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.
D. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
E. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. Comply with recommendations from BICSI's "Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual" and TIA-569-D for separating unshielded copper communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches. 3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. 4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways, power lines, and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.
Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling 27 15 13 - 8 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. 5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches. 6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches.
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 00 "Firestopping."
B. Comply with TIA-569-D, Annex A, "Firestopping."
C. Comply with "Firestopping Systems" Article in BISCI's "Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual."
3.5 GROUNDING
A. Install grounding according to the "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" chapter in BICSI's "Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual."
B. Comply with TIA-607-B and NECA/BICSI-607.
C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall, allowing at least a 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground, using a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor.
D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than a No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.
3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA-606-B. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 27 05 53 "Identification for Communications Systems." 1. Administration Class: Class 3 2. Color-code cross-connect fields and apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels.
B. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA-606-B for Class 3 level of administration.
C. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.
Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling 27 15 13 - 9 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
D. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors.
E. Cable and Wire Identification: 1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. 2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at the device if wire color is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet. 3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet. 4. Label each terminal strip, and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel. a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify each cable or wiring group, extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device, with the name and number of a particular device. b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames. 5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and -connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.
F. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type, with a printing area and font color that contrast with cable jacket color but still comply with TIA-606-B requirements for the following: 1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
D. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.
E. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visually inspect jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA-568-C.1.
Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling 27 15 13 - 10 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 3. Test twisted pair cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA- 568-C.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.
F. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similarly to Table 10.1 in BICSI's "Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual," or shall be transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, printed, and submitted.
G. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
H. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
I. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION
Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling 27 15 13 - 11 This page was intentionally left blank. Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 28 13 00 SECURITY SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. This section identifies the requirements, technical design, and specifications for the security system at the Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Building as indicated on the drawings.
B. The access control system as specified must be compatible and interoperable with TxDOT’s latest version Software House CCURE as a standard. This includes card readers, electrified locksets, door position sensors, gate release, control panels, glass, intercoms, and access control cabling.
C. The intrusion detection and notification devices as specified must be compatible and interoperable with TxDOT’s latest version Software House CCURE as a standard. This includes glass breaks, all position switches, duress/panic buttons cabling, etc., installation and programming to the CCURE system
D. The electronic surveillance system as specified is an industry standard and includes camera, encoders, decoders, monitor, video splitter, video transceiver, video receiver and cabling.
E. The Contractor shall provide a Manufacturer’s Performance Certification for the installed access control system.
F. Contractor shall include materials, equipment, programming and labor necessary to provide a complete and functional access control system regardless of any items not listed or described in this specification or associated drawings.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor Experience Requirements
B. Submittal Requirements
C. Acceptable Manufacturers
D. Codes, Standards and Regulations
E. General Requirements
F. System Requirements
G. Testing Requirements
H. Training Requirements
Security System 28 13 00 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
I. Project Closeout Documentation
J. Attachments
1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. The Drawings, Specifications, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and other requirements of Division 1 apply to the work specified in Division 28, and shall be complied with in every respect. The Contractor shall examine all of the items which make up the Contract Documents and shall coordinate them with the work on the project.
B. Respondent qualifications: The respondent shall: 1. Be a company engaged in the business of providing, installing, and maintaining SWH C●CURE® card access systems for a minimum of three years within the last five years. Recent start-up businesses do not meet the requirements of this solicitation. A startup business is defined as a new company that has no previous operational history or expertise in the relevant business and is not affiliated with a company that has that history or expertise. 2. Be an authorized dealer or distributor of SWH C●CURE® card access systems. 3. Be in good financial standing, current in payment of all taxes and fees such as state franchise fees. TxDOT reserves the right to request a copy of the respondent’s audited or un-audited financial statement. 4. When financial statements are requested, TxDOT will review the respondent's audited or un-audited financial statement to this solicitation in accordance with Texas Government Code, Title 10, Subtitle D, §2156.007 to evaluate the sufficiency of the respondent's financial resources and ability to perform the contract or provide the service required in the solicitation. TxDOT will be the sole judge in determining the sufficiency of the respondent's financial resources and ability to perform the contract or provide the service. Factors to be reviewed include: a. Balance sheets. b. Net working capital. c. Current asset ratio. d. Liquidity ratio. e. Auditor(s) notes. f. Any notes to the financial statements.
C. References: The respondent should submit a minimum of three references to substantiate the qualifications and experience requirements for similar services completed within the past 60 months. References shall illustrate respondent’s ability to provide the services outlined in the specification. References shall include name, point of contact, telephone number, and dates services were performed. The response will be disqualified if TxDOT is unable to verify qualification and experience requirements from the respondent’s references. The response may be disqualified if TxDOT receives negative responses. TxDOT will be the sole judge of references.
D. Key personnel qualifications: The respondent shall provide the following key personnel: 1. Project Manager: The respondent shall designate a Project Manager who shall:
Security System 28 13 00 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
a. Have a minimum of three years’ experience within the last five years in project management for the installation and maintenance of SWH C●CURE® card access systems. b. Have successfully completed SWH certification course AC4005: C●CURE® 800/8000 Advanced Integrator and be certified by SWH as an Advanced Integrator.
2. Install Technicians: a. Shall have a minimum of three years’ experience within the last five years, installing and maintaining SWH C●CURE® card access systems. b. A minimum of one Service Technician shall have successfully completed the following SWH certification course(s) and be certified by SWH as an Installer/Maintainer (Level 2): 1) AC4004-1: C●CURE® 800/8000 System Installer/Maintainer with iSTAR™ a) OR 2) AC4004: C●CURE® 800/8000 System Installer/Maintainer and AC2414: iSTAR™
E. Vendor Requirements: The vendor shall: 1. Adhere to the TxDOT Terms and Conditions 2. Contractor shall conduct a full functionality test of any and all existing CCURE systems and associated hardware. Submit complete test report to TXDOT before any work is to begin. Testing shall be coordinated with TXDOT Security 3. Provide the complete turnkey installation and programming of SWH C●CURE® card access system(s). 4. Revise existing SWH C●CURE® card access system programming to reflect current system programming standards available at the time of installation. 5. Furnish all personnel, labor, tools, test equipment, replacement parts, programming, and transportation required to install the SWH C●CURE® card access system(s) described in this solicitation. 6. Provide and install all system components, including all attachments and ancillary items required to make the system fully operational including, but not limited to, all EMT conduits and wiring for card readers, intercoms, and fixed CCTV cameras. Conduits, wire mold, wiring, cabling and all associated equipment shall be: a. Rated for installation location and device. b. Concealed within walls, ceilings, doorframes, or placed within existing conduit. If wire cannot be concealed in this manner, finished wire mold may be used on the inside of buildings and EMT conduit may be used on the outside. All wire mold and exposed conduits shall be approved by TxDOT Project Manager “PM”. c. Terminated. 7. Provide all equipment necessary to facilitate communications, (i.e.: terminal servers, short haul modems, and fiber optic transmission devices, etc.). All communications shall be fully supervised. 8. Provide all configuration set-ups.
Security System 28 13 00 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
9. Complete all system programming at all TxDOT buildings. All programming shall follow the naming convention(s) outlined by TxDOT controls with the following exception: a. Exception: Any programming conventions or other software options, or both, which allow TxDOT Security to define security controls, directly or indirectly, shall be coordinated with and approved by TxDOT Security Manager b. Note: For detailed instructions/guidelines on programing and configuration refer to TxDOT document C●CURE® 800/8000 Configuration and programing. Request latest version from TxDOT Security Manager
F. Key Personnel Requirements: The PM shall: 1. Be on site during all phases of the project: Preparation, installation, and activation; until the SWH C●CURE® card access system is complete and accepted by PM 2. Be available by phone 24 hours a day/7 days a week and shall respond to PM within 30 minutes of TxDOT’s call and be onsite within 24 hrs. 3. Have the primary responsibility of the day-to-day operation, ensuring proper installation of the SWH C●CURE® card access system and coordination of all activities, situations, and issues with subcontractors and PM. 4. Be a permanent staff employee.
G. Service Requirements: The vendor shall: 1. Cover and protect the furnishings and floor area for installations located above the ceiling line and above a work area prior to commencing work. 2. Clean all areas of scrap materials, dirt, dust, and debris generated in performance of the installation at the end of each working day to the satisfaction of PM. 3. Clean, repair, or replace any item damaged by the vendor or its subcontractor(s) during the installation to the satisfaction of PM, and at no additional cost to TxDOT. 4. Replace any ceiling tile that was damaged during installation. Match existing. 5. Remove and dispose of all defective materials removed from the building during the installation in accordance with all applicable rules, regulations, codes, laws, ordinances, and statutes, etc. The vendor shall obtain TxDOT approval for removal or disposal, or both, of all mechanical and electrical parts. a. NOTE: All mechanical and electrical parts removed from the building shall remain the property of TxDOT.
H. Submittal 1. Itemized list of all equipment, materials, and labor included in bid and required for the installation of the access control system as specified herein. This list shall be provided in printed and electronic format (Microsoft Excel) and contain: Part Number, Description, Unit of Measure, Unit Cost, Quantity, Labor Price, and Extended Price to provide a complete and functional access control system. 2. Estimated cable count required for the access control system listed per Equipment Room and or Telecommunications Room. This list shall be provided in printed and electronic format (Microsoft Excel).
Security System 28 13 00 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3. Manufacturer Product Certifications for Company. 4. Manufacturer Product Certifications for Installers. 5. Manufacturer Warranty offering. 6. Documentation indicating Contractor has been in business for (5) years installing Software House CCURE security systems. 7. Address of Contractor’s closest office to site. 8. Quantity of full-time local technicians within a 75-mile radius of the project site. 9. List of five (5) contractor-installed projects of a similar size and scope in operation for at least (1) year. The Contractor shall provide the following information for each project: Project Name, Project Location, Project Start Date, Project Completion Date, Project Start Cost, Project Completion Cost, Brief Description of Project, Client Point of Contact Name and Phone Number. 10. List of completed and ongoing projects with the Owner. The Contractor shall provide the following information for each project: Project Name, Project Location, Project Start Date, Project Completion Date, Project Start Cost, Project Completion Cost, and Brief Description of Project.
I. Pre-Installation Submittal 1. Contractor shall not order, purchase, or install any equipment until pre- installation submittals have been accepted in writing by the TxDOT Project Manager. 2. Manufacturer product data sheets for each proposed system component. a. For product data sheets containing more than one (1) part number or product, the Contractor shall clearly identify the specific part number or product being submitted and equipment schedules listing all system components, the manufacturer, model number and quantity of each. 3. Shop drawings of the proposed system installation. a. Shop drawings shall include card reader locations, door position sensor locations, access control panel elevations to include layout and power supply locations, installation typical details, preliminary cable numbers, proposed cable pathways, system schematics, and riser diagrams. Shop drawings shall be submitted electronically. b. Contractor shall maintain a set of shop drawings on site at all times and shall update the shop drawings on a weekly basis. Shop drawings shall be made available for inspection at the request of the TxDOT Project Manager. 4. Manufacturer Product Certifications for Company. 5. Manufacturer Product Certifications for Installers. 6. Manufacturer Warranty letter. 7. Documentation indicating that Contractor has been in business for (5) years. 8. Quantity of full time technicians available to service site and their locations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The following sections specifically list the acceptable equipment types and items for this project.
Security System 28 13 00 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. PM will have final determination of acceptability of all proposed equipment and must approve submitted equipment prior to purchase or installation.
C. Proposed equivalent items must be approved in writing by the PM prior to submitting a bid. Proposed equivalent items must meet or exceed these specifications and the specifications of the specified item.
D. In the event a manufacturer’s specified product or part number has changed or is no longer available, Contractor shall substitute the appropriate equivalent manufacturer’s part number.
E. In the event of a discrepancy between the specifications and the drawings, the greater quantity and/or better quality will be furnished.
F. For listed products with no part number specified, Contractor shall provide a product that meets the performance requirements of these specifications, industry standard practices, and intended application.
G. All wiring, equipment, and installation materials shall be new and of the highest quality.
H. Labels on all wiring, materials, and equipment must indicate a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
I. Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) documentation must be provided to the PM which certifies performance characteristics and compliance with industry standards and TxDOT standardized security system.
2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Access Control System Software/Hardware 1. Access Control Software a. SWH C●CURE® 2. Access Control Panels a. C●CURE® Ultra SE 3. LifeSafety Power a. LifeSafety Power FPO150/250-2C82D8E8S (36H x 30W x 4.5D cabinet) with battery, 120 vac 4. Card Reader a. Multi-Technology 1) Wall Mount a) HID® 920PHRNEK00005 RP40-H Multi-class SE reader 2) Mullion Mount a) HID® 900PHRNEK00005 RP10-H Multi-class SE reader 3) Long Range Reader (Gate Readers) a) HID® MaxiProx 5375, 125 kHz b)
Security System 28 13 00 - 6 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Surge Protection 1. Exterior Card Readers a. DITEK_DTK-4lvlpcr b. Or TxDOT approved equal 2. E Intercoms a. DTK-MRJPOE b. DITEK-DTK-4LVTEP for analog only with TXDOT approval c. Or TxDOT approved equal 3. Gate Operators a. DITEK-DTK-120/240HW b. Or TxDOT approved equal 4. Exterior Cameras a. DITEK_DTK-PVB27B and DTKPVP27BTPA b. Or TxDOT approved equal 5. Ultra se and Ultra se power supplies, Door Locking, Intrusion detection and alarm notification power supply panels a. DITEK-DTK-120/240CM+ b. Or TxDOT approved equal
C. Access Card a. HID® 1386 ISOProx®II Corporate 1000 Cards. Cards shall be: 1) Programming: L – Programmed, Low Frequency (125 kHz) 2) Front Packaging: G – Plain White PVC w/Gloss Finish 3) Back Packaging: G – Plain White PVC w Gloss Finish2 4) Card Numbering: M – Sequential Matching Internal/External (Ink jetted) 5) Slot Punch 4: N – No Slot Punch (Printed location of vertical and horizontal slot punch will remain)
D. Vehicle gate pedestal and pedestal base a. Provided by Owner (TxDOT). Refer to drawings details and location. b. Furnish and install dedicated power supply for pedestal card readers. c. Furnish and install KNOX Box Model 3502 Key switch, coordinate Keying with local AHJ.
E. Color ID Dual Sided Printer (For District Headquarters only) a. One each Fargo DTC 1250E dual sided ID printer, with SWH license for a. C●CURE® badging. b. Two each No. 86177 cleaning kits c. Three each No. 45010: YMCKOK Cartridge with cleaning roller, Full- color ribbon with two resin black panels and clear overlay panel 200 images – (Case Quantity: 20) 2. Camera: a. One each Video Associates Labs, VALCam 9000-628 3. PHOTO BACKGROUND: a. Promaster system pop-up background, 6’x7’ Blue Cromakey, 1 per printer
Security System 28 13 00 - 7 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
4. TRIPOD TABLE TOP a. One each 3 way pan/tilt head with quick release for VAL Cam 9000-628 Camera.
F. Electrified Locking Mechanisms 1. Furnish and install electrified locking hardware as indicated on the drawings
G. Electrified Locking Mechanism Power Supply 1. LifeSafety FP075-150-C8D8E2 with battery back up 2. LifeSafety FP0150-2C82D8E4 3. Von Duprin Model # PS914 for EL panic bars 4. Or TxDOT approved equal
H. Request-to-Exit (REX) Device 1. REX Infrared Motion Sensor a. Kantech/Tyco International Company; Model T.REX-LT b. BOSCH DS160 c. Or TxDOT approved equal
I. Duress/Panic Button 1. HUB2B 2. Or TxDOT approved equal
J. Door/Gate Release Button 1. HUB3B Momentary 2. OR TxDOT approved equal
K. Gate Monitor 1. PMCL319BL (PELCO 19” LCD MONITOR) 2. American Dynamics Model ADLCD196MPB (19" LCD monitor) 3. Or TxDOT approved equal
L. Gate Monitor Mount 1. PMCL-WMT (PELCO TILT/SWIVEL WALL MOUNT)
M. Gate Reader dedicated power supplies 1. Altronix-AL600UL3 2. Or approved equal
N. Gate Release 1. HUB3B Momentary 2. Or approved equal
O. Gate/Door Intercom 1. Viking Model E-30-IPEWP (if within distance limits) or Viking Model E-30- EWP with TXDOT approval 2. Viking VKW E5X5 back box for each Intercom 3. Viking Model # RC-4A or C 2000 with TXDOT PM approval 4. Viking Model # E-35-IP/EWP (Door Only)
Security System 28 13 00 - 8 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
P. Gate Camera 1. Analog: Digital-Watchdog DWC-V6263WTIR with mount DWC-V1WM and DWC-V1JUNC outdoor dome junction box 2. Or approved equal 3. IP: Illustra Model # IPSO2D2OSWIT only with prior approval only 4. Or TxDOT approved equal
Q. Gate Camera power supply 1. Altronix ALTV1224DC 2. WBOX Technologies 0E-4CPW5A60W with Txdot approval 3. Or Txdot approved equal
R. Video Active Receivers 1. NVT Model NV-652R 2. Or approved equal
S. Video Passive Transceivers 1. NVT Model NV-214A-M 2. Or approved equal
T. Quad Splitter 1. EverFocus, EP4CQVGA Color Quad Splitter 2. Or TxDOT approved equal
U. Video Decoder 1. Axis P7701 video decoder 2. Or Txdot approved equal
V. Video Encoder 1. Axis M7014 Video Encoder 2. Or TxDOT approved equal
W. Outdoor Rated Midspan POE 1. Veracity VOR OUTREACH MAX universal Ethernet and POE extender or TXDOT approved equal 2. AXIS T8123_E or TXDOT approved equal
X. Glass Break Sensor 1. Ceiling Mount a. Honeywell FG730 b. Or approved equal 2. Restrooms only a. Bosch ISC-SK10 Shock Sensor
Y. Interior Speaker 1. Elk Products, ceiling mount speaker ELK-73 2. Or approved equal
Security System 28 13 00 - 9 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
Z. Pre Recorded Sounder 1. Elk Products, ELK-124 2. Or approved equal.
AA. Exterior Weather Proof Strobe 1. Amseco, SL401 strobe light lens color blue 2. Or approved equal
BB. Device Power Supplies (Glass Break Sensors, Pre-Recorded Sounders and Exterior Strobes) 1. Altronix Model # AL600ULXPD8 2. Altronix Model # AL600ULXPD16 3. Or TxDOT approved equal
CC. Door/Vehicle Gate/Pedestrian Gate/ Roof Hatch Position Switches 1. Concealed Door/ Pedestrian Gate/ Roof Hatch Position Switch a. Sentrol model 1078C 2. Surface Mount Door/ Pedestrian Gate/ Roof Hatch Position Switch a. 2507ADsurface mount (only with prior approval from PM) b. GRI-29A surface mount (only with prior approval from PM) 3. Overhead Door Position Switch a. SR2315AL rail mounted Overhead door contact b. GRI-29A surface mount (only with prior approval from Pm) c. Or TxDOT approved equal
DD. Access Control System Cabling 1. Multi-Conductor Shielded Plenum rated Composite Cable a. West Penn 1) AC251822 Plenum Access Control Composite cable b. Belden 1) 658GMS Composite – Lock, Card Reader, Door Contact, Rex Applications c. LAKE CABLE LLC 1) S80081709-04 Plenum Rated Data Communications Composite Cable d. Or Approved Equal 2. Glass Breaks System Cabling a. Honeywell WG32041112 - 22/4 Stranded overall aluminum shield plenum 3. Pedestal Access and Personnel gate /Communication Cabling a. Windy City Smartwire Water warrior minimum 2 ea. Part # 714410VNQ (pedestals) b. Windy City Smartwire Water warrior minimum 1 ea. Part # 714410VNQ and 1ea. Part # 714310VNQ ( Personnel Gates) c. Or TxDOT approved equal
Security System 28 13 00 - 10 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
EE. Electronic Surveillance Cabling 1. Analog a. WG53551012, RG6/U & 18/2 siamese plenum, b. Belden 549945 rg-59u, c. WG51041008, RG59/U & 18/2 underground, d. WG51012106, 2. CAT6e a. 23/4PR CAT6e 350MHZ shielded direct burial rated b. 23/4/PR CAT6 350 MHZ shielded plenum rated (Indoor use only)
FF. Pathway Cable Support 1. Panduit J-Mod Cable Support System 2. Erico – CADDY CAT LINKS J-Hook Series 3. Panduit Plenum Rated Hook & Loop (Black)
GG. Labeling 1. Permanent Labels for Cables a. Panduit Self-Laminating Labels
HH. Fire Stop 1. Shall match or exceed wall ratings 2. Shall be UL classified fire rated sealant 3. STI Spec Seal 4. 3M Products
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CODES, STANDARDS, REGULATIONS
A. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1: General Requirements – (May 2001)
B. TIA-569-B Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces - (October 2004)
C. TIA/EIA-606-A Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure - (May 2002)
D. SIA-Security Industry Authority
E. Local
F. ADA-Americans with Disabilities Act
G. NEC-National Electric Code
H. ISO-International Organization for Standardization
Security System 28 13 00 - 11 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
I. FCC-Federal Communications Commission
J. UL-Underwriters Laboratories
K. OSHA-Occupational Safety and Health Administration
L. NFPA-National Fire Protection Association
M. NEMA-National Electrical Manufactures Association
N. Plenum Applications
O. Applicable Flame Test: UL 910 (NFPA 262 1990).
3.2 In the event of any conflicts between documents referenced herein and the contents of this specification, the Contractor shall notify the PM in writing of any such occurrences before purchasing or installing any equipment or materials. The PM will notify the Contractor of any actions required to resolve these conflicts. Such actions may include but are not limited to: design changes, equipment, materials and/or installation changes. In any event Contractor shall not supersede specifications and standards from the latest NFPA and NEC latest publications.
3.3 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS AND ACRONYMS
A. CCTV – Closed Circuit Television
B. DGP – Data Gathering Panels
C. DC – Door Contact
D. OHD – Overhead Door
E. HID – Hughes Identification devices
F. IP – Internet Protocol
G. OEM – Original Equipment Manufacturer
H. TxDOT _ Texas Department of Transportation
I. PM – TxDOT Project Manager
J. SWH – Software House
K. VAC – Volts Alternating Current
L. VDC – Volts Direct Current
M. LAN – Local Area Network
Security System 28 13 00 - 12 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
N. LED – Light-emitting Diode
O. AFG – Above Finished Grade
3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall comply with the requirements of local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), State of Texas, the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), and the National Electrical Code (NEC). If the Contractor identifies any item in the plans or specifications that will not strictly comply with the aforementioned laws, ordinances, and rules, the matter shall be referred to the PM for direction before proceeding with that part of the work.
B. The Contractor shall install the materials in accordance with these specifications and the manufacturer’s installation guidelines.
C. All pedestal cabling shall be direct burial rated. All interior cabling shall be plenum rated.
D. No deviations from the plans or specifications shall be made without full consent in writing of the TxDOT Project Manager. The Contractor shall have written approval from the PM for any additional work beyond the Contract Documents prior to beginning such work. If the Contractor does not obtain written approval from the PM prior to proceeding with the work, the contractor shall not be reimbursed for the work.
E. The Contractor shall obtain written permission from the PM before proceeding with any work that would necessitate cutting into or through any part of the building structure such as, but not limited to, girders, beams, floors, walls, roofs, or ceilings.
F. Contractor shall notify the PM a minimum of (2) weeks prior to beginning work and will participate in a pre-construction meeting with the PM to perform a walkthrough and review the scope of work, schedule, and escalation procedures.
G. The Contractor shall maintain a work area free of debris, trash, empty wire reels, scrap wire, etc., and dispose of such items on a daily basis and return the site to the original state of cleanliness. The Contractor shall not use Owner’s facilities for the disposal of excess or scrap materials.
H. Equipment and materials installed by the Contractor shall be free of defects and damage.
I. Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of any damage caused by the contractor during the installation.
J. Contractor shall test all wires prior to installation. By failing to perform this testing operation, the Contractor shall accept the wire as compliant and assume all liability for the replacement of the wire at no cost to the Owner should it be found defective at a later date.
Security System 28 13 00 - 13 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
K. Contractor shall maintain a set of working specifications, design drawings, and shop drawings to be kept on site at all times and shall update the shop drawings on a weekly basis. Shop drawings shall be made available for inspection at the request of the TxDOT Project Manager.
L. Equipment and materials shall be consistent throughout the installation. Where multiple units of the same type of equipment and materials are required, these units shall be a standard product with the same manufacturer and model number.
M. Equipment and materials shall be delivered and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines at the Contractor’s expense.
N. Contractor shall make all stored equipment and materials available for inspection at the request of the TxDOT Project Manager.
O. All equipment and material used in the installation shall be approved by the manufacturer for the environment in which it is being installed.
P. Wires shall be properly supported in accordance with industry standards at all times. Improperly supported wires shall be corrected by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
Q. Contractor shall be responsible to properly protect wiring from damage by other trades during construction.
R. Cables shall be routed at 90-degree angles to the building structure. At no time shall a diagonal pull be installed.
S. The Contractor shall not install wires in conduits or sleeves without nylon bushings. Wires installed through conduits or sleeves without nylon bushings shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the Owner.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. Coordination 1. Coordinate with the PM to ensure that adequate conduit is provided and that equipment backboxes are adequate for system installation. 2. Coordinate with the PM to ensure that adequate power has been provided and properly located for the security system equipment. 3. Coordinate with the PM to ensure that doors and door frames are properly prepared for electric locking hardware and door position switches. 4. Coordinate the provision key cylinders. Coordinate cylinder to match grand master keying system of location with the PM and related trades. 5. Coordinate locations of all devices with the PM prior to installation. 6. Coordinate and verify the location of each piece of rack mounted equipment with the Owner. 7. Coordinate custom ACS report requirements with the Owner. Submit report formats to the Owner for review and acceptance. 8. Coordinate all initial database partitioning and setup with the Owner prior to initial programming and card holder data entry.
Security System 28 13 00 - 14 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
9. Coordinate final camera locations, desired views, and camera housing and mount requirements with the PM prior to installation. 10. Coordinate camera housing and mount finishes with the PM prior to installation. 11. Coordinate finishes and colors of all equipment with the TxDOT Project Manager. Submit all finish and graphics for all equipment in public areas to the PM for approval prior to installation.
B. General 1. Verify acceptance of each type of specified door hardware and strikes for each application with local life safety code officials. 2. Verify fail-safe and fail-secure lock requirements with the TxDOT Project Manager. 3. Contractor or equipment manufacturer logos or names shall not be visible on equipment in public areas. 4. Provide tamper proof fasteners for all equipment in public areas. Fastener finish shall match equipment finish.
C. Access Control Software (ACS) 1. ACS Software shall be designed to support multi-tasking / multi-user applications for security systems management. Independent, simultaneous performance of multiple system functions from the File Server or system workstations shall not cause an appreciable reduction in system processing or response time. 2. Reference appendix A for programming requirements.
3.6 EQUIPMENT
A. Provide equipment as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Additional specific installation requirements are as follows:
B. Server 1. Provide equipment as required by Owner.
C. Control Panels 1. Provide a minimum of 20% card reader spare for future new card reader and 20% inputs and outputs available for future needs 2. The control panels shall collect alarm input point status and access control data, multiplex the information, and transmit that data back to the ACS System file server / system workstations. 3. The control panel shall incorporate Flash ROM to allow for efficient firmware update downloads from the system software and/or remotely from the ACS System manufacturer. 4. The control panels shall receive and execute instructions issued automatically or manually from the ACS System file server / system workstation. 5. The control panels shall have memory and logic circuits as required to ensure continued operation of connected devices without degradation in system security in the event that communications with the ACS System file server is interrupted. 6. All system control panels shall communicate with the ACS System file server over an Owner provided communications circuit.
Security System 28 13 00 - 15 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
7. The control panels shall provide the following: a. Supervised alarm inputs to monitor the status of alarm circuits and report the status information to the ACS System file server. b. Control relay outputs for controlling devices by remote command from the ACS System workstations, through time programming or on alarm point activation date on the ACS server. Control relay output contacts shall be rated for 2 A @ 24 VDC. c. Flash ROM technology and shall provide for remote update of DGPs firmware. d. Supervision of all wiring / circuits between the DGPs and monitored alarm devices. Wire / device supervision shall meet UL 1076 guidelines. e. Enough RAM to maintain a minimum card database of 5,000 cards. f. Automatic disconnection from the communication circuit upon a communication failure within the DGPs to prevent communication to other DGPs in the circuit from being interrupted. g. Enough RAM to operate normally upon loss of communication with the ACS System file server. In addition, the DGPs shall store up to 5,000 card transactions and up to (16) events per potential alarm input, and transmit that data to the ACS System file server as soon as communication is restored. h. Activation of a door control relay output and shunting of the intrusion alarm upon verification of a card authorization or request to exit. i. Adjustable door control relay activation time through ACS System Software from 1 to 30 seconds on an individual card reader basis. The door shall automatically relock upon closure. j. An intrusion alarm indication on the ACS System if the card reader controlled door is opened without an authorized card use or request to exit. k. A door prop alarm indication if the card reader controlled door is held open past an adjustable time period after an authorized card use or request to exit. The door prop time delay shall be adjustable through ACS System Software from 1 to 60 seconds on an individual card reader basis. l. A wiring chart delineating wire routings, labeling, and all termination points. The chart shall be produced by the Contractor, laminated and housed in a clear plastic sleeve affixed to the inside of the enclosure cover. m. A tamper switch to sense the removal or opening of the enclosure cover. 8. Transaction time for authorized cards shall be less than 0.5 second from the time of card read until the door is unlocked. 9. Configure the system such that devices can be connected to spare input points, output points and card reader inputs on the control panel without requiring reconfiguration of the ACS. 10. Configure the control panel communication chains such that no more than 16 card readers (including all possible spare card readers) shall be connected to each control panel chain.
Security System 28 13 00 - 16 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
11. Communications a. Communications between servers, workstations, and control panel will be based on utilizing the Owner’s LAN. b. The ACS shall support 10 Base T Ethernet communications between the ACS File Server and the System Workstations, and between the ACS File Server and the control panels. c. Communications shall be encapsulated in a TCP/IP network transport layer in a client / server type TxDOT Project Manager.
D. Card Readers 1. Provide card reader as indicated on the drawings. 2. The card reader shall be multi-technology and shall read encoded data from access cards and transmit the data to the DGP. 3. The vendor shall provide and install HID Multi-Technology readers that shall be controlled by the security system workstation(s) or be set on time schedule control of electric locking mechanisms, or both. The vendor shall install the readers within Americans with Disabilities Act standards and specifications. The readers shall: a. Be equipped for reading multiple reader technologies such as the HID®13.56 MHz Smart card and the HID® 125 KHz proximity card and shall allow for the utilization of changing technology. b. Be flex models that allow for the upgrade of readers to add new functionality or enhancements using flash firmware. c. Have a two (or three) – color LED on the face of the reader. d. Generate an audible tone to indicate authorized and unauthorized reader use. e. Operate if mounted directly on or attached to a metal surface. f. Have a minimum read range of four inches for doors and pedestrian gates. g. Have a minimum read range of eight inches for gate readers. h. Be marked with corresponding permanent label for Ccure Ultra SE panel location, ACM # and port #. Submit sample and coordinate with TXDOT project manager 4. Provide manufacturer recommended power to each reader directly from the DGP or a secondary supply. The power supply shall be UL Class 2, power limited and shall provide necessary output voltage to allow the card reader to operate at its maximum specified read range. 5. Wire card reader LEDs to indicate valid and invalid card reads, and door locked and unlocked conditions. All card reader LED indicators shall operate identically.
E. Access Card 1. The Access Card shall have only a hot stamp card number visible on the card and shall not indicate the Contractor or manufacturer name and/or logo. 2. Programming of the system shall be coordinated with TxDOT Security Manager. All Programming to be performed at 3810 Jackson Ave Bldg. 4, Austin, TX 78731unless approved to be performed at an alternative site by TxDOT Security Manager.
Security System 28 13 00 - 17 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3. Access Cards shall be available in multi-technology formats, which combine proximity with, magnetic stripe, Wiegand, and / or bar code as required by the Owner. 4. Provide 500 Access Cards.
F. Electric Locking mechanical 1. Interface electric locking must be compatible and interoperable with TxDOT’s latest version Software House CCURE as a standard.. 2. Wire electric locking mechanism as indicated on the drawings. 3. Wire fail-safe electric locking mechanical in accordance with local codes. 4. Wire fail-secure electric locking mechanical and power supplies such that a fire alarm condition or building power failure shall not affect operation of the lock.
G. Electrified Locking Mechanism Power Supply 1. Provide power supplies for all ACS electric locking mechanisms as specified with the exception of those noted as having Time-Delay functions as defined by NFPA 101. 2. Power supplies for time-delay function locks shall be provided by others. The security Contractor shall coordinate with others as necessary to ensure proper ACS operation of all Time-Delay electric locking mechanisms to include the provision of, and final termination of, ACS control and monitoring wire and cable as necessary to facilitate desired operation and integration with the ACS. 3. Provide power supplies for all electric locking mechanisms (with the exception of fire stair doors). Fail-safe locking devices shall unlock automatically under the following conditions: a. Any building fire alarm b. Loss of building power c. Failure of the power supply 4. Provide battery chargers and batteries for all power supplies 5. Monitor low battery and power fail alarms for each power supply. 6. Fire Alarm Interface (As required) a. Connect (hard wire) fail-safe electric and time delay locking mechanical to the building fire alarm system for fail-safe release upon any fire alarm. b. Interface with a single low voltage/low current normally closed dry contact from the fire alarm system provided by the fire alarm contractor in the Fire Command Center (FCC). The contact shall open on any fire alarm condition. c. Provide all additional UL listed fail-safe relays and power supplies necessary to interface to this contact and unlock all fail-safe doors. d. Connect fail-safe relays and power supplies to standard building power. Connection of fail-safe devices to emergency or UPS power shall not be acceptable. e. Reference the drawings for fire alarm interface requirements.
Security System 28 13 00 - 18 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
H. Request-to-Exit (REX) Device 1. Provide request-to-exit (REX) infrared motion sensors for detecting authorized exits through card reader controlled doors as indicated on the drawings. Wire the REX motion sensor to the REX input of the control panel. For doors equipped with electromagnetic locks, activation of the REX motion sensor shall release the electric locking mechanism and shall shunt the intrusion alarm output. For doors equipped with electric locking mechanical that are free exiting at all times (i.e. mortise electric locks, electric strikes, etc.), the REX motion sensor shall only shunt the intrusion alarm output and shall not unlock the lock.
I. Door Release Push Buttons: 1. The vendor shall provide, install, or reconnect door release push buttons as required 2. The door release push buttons shall:
a. Be desk-mounted at TxDOT designated desks b. Remotely release electric locks on card reader controlled doors. c. Not cause an alarm on the system workstation when activated d. Unlock the door and shunt the door contact to a user programmable time- period of no more than 15 seconds when a door release push button is pressed e. Not affect the request to exit device operation for doors with free egress hardware
J. Duress/Panic Buttons 1. The vendor shall provide and install, or reconnect duress buttons, below counter tops or in the knee space of desks or workstations in accessible locations as designated by PM. Duress buttons shall: a. Have Double-pull, Double-throw (DPDT) alarm outputs. b. Be activated by single recessed pushbutton contacts.
K. Vehicle Gate Pedestal 1. Install TxDOT provided pedestal base, pedestal post and associated pedestal assembly for installation as noted on drawings. 2. Furnish all conduit runs to pedestal and gate controllers as indicated on the drawings
L. Gate Monitor 1. Provide and install monitor, cabling and all associated equipment install at the designated location in building. Contractor will get approval for the monitor location from PM before installation 2. This monitor will provide live viewing only of the cameras mounted at the gate pedestal.
Security System 28 13 00 - 19 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
M. Gate Release 1. Provide and install gate release and all associated equipment install at the designated location in building. Contractor will get approval for the gate release location from the PM. The gate release will be achieved using standard desktop telephone and through gate release pushbutton. Not cause an alarm on the system workstation when activated. 2. Unlock the gate and shunt the gate contact to a user programmable time-period of no more than 10 seconds when a door release push button is pressed. 3. Not affect the request to exit device operation for gates.
N. Gate Intercom 1. Provide two (2) new intercoms on gate pedestal. Program to dial designated location through Owner’s telephone system.
O. Pedestal Gate Camera 1. Provide camera mounted on gate pedestal. Camera shall communicate through direct burial RG-59 cable for runs within maximum length limitations of 250 ft. Runs that exceed maximum length limitations of RG-59 shall be direct burial CAT5e copper center conductor utilizing video transceiver (NVT Model #NV- 652R), Video receiver (NVT Model #NV-652R).
P. Video Transceivers and Video Receivers 1. Camera shall communicate through CAT5e direct burial cable.
Q. Video Monitoring 1. Contractor shall furnish and install cabling, monitor and quad splitter at designated location to monitor the display of the camera/cameras at designated pedestal.
R. Glass Break Sensors 1. Provide glass break sensors to provide coverage of all exterior glass covering all glass up to 10 feet.from AFG at buildings indicated on drawings. Glass break detectors to monitor glass areas against breakage and create alarm condition upon detection. Contractor will submit a drawing indicating proposed of glass break zones to PM for approval of zones only before installation begins. Connect and program to CCURE system Glass break sensors to be armed 24/7. 2. Device shall meet minimum requirements: a. Detection technology shall be acoustic. b. Detection area will be 25’ radius c. Output contact will be normally closed powered non-alarm / trouble state. 3. Provide the manufacturer recommended power supply. The power supply shall be UL Class 2, power limited.
Security System 28 13 00 - 20 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
S. Device Power Supply 1. Power management shall be provided by a power supply and shall be installed and provide power for all electric door strikes, request to exit devices, door management alarm units , strobes and pre-recorded sounders. All electric- locking mechanisms and remote control locking mechanisms shall be individually fused at the power supply to ensure that a short in one power cable will only blow that fuse and not affect other equipment. 2. Provide U.L. Listed power supplies for all ACS equipment as specified. 3. Provide battery chargers and batteries for all power supplies except those for fail- safe locks. 4. Monitor low battery and power fail alarms for each power supply.
T. Door/Vehicle Gate/Pedestrian Gate/ Roof Hatch Position Switches 1. Provide normally closed magnetic concealed door position switches, surface mount door position switches, to monitor all the access controlled vehicle gate (entrance and exit sides), access controlled pedestrian gates, roof hatches, exterior doors, overhead doors and on each leaf of card reader controlled doors switches to monitor the open/closed status of doors. 2. Magnetic mounted door position switches to monitor all roof hatches, exterior doors, overhead doors, and on each leaf of card reader controlled doors (double doors). Door position switches shall monitor for door propping, intrusion alarms, and open or closed status. The system shall provide for supervised monitoring of the door position switches. The system shall annunciate each condition individually. The switches shall be concealed whenever possible. 3. Provide double-pole / double-throw (DPDT) contacts if contact is monitored by ACS and Intrusion Detection system. 4. Provide armored cable (as required) from the switch location to the associated junction box in order to conceal the wire. 5. Resistor pack will be installed EOL (End of Line).
U. Access Control Cabling 1. The Contractor shall furnish and install the following as indicated on the drawings and associated equipment schedules and diagrams. 2. The Contractor shall install a10 -foot service loop to be coiled, mounted, and stored at the access control panel above the ladder rack in Equipment Room/Telecommunications Rooms. 3. The Contractor shall install a 5-foot service loop to be coiled, mounted, and stored at each device installed above the ceiling. Service loop will not be mounted to the ceiling tile supports or left on top of the ceiling. 4. Size wire as recommended by manufacturer. 5. Wires shall be routed utilizing the pathways as indicated in the technology drawings. If technology drawings are not included Contractor will get approval for their proposed cable routing from PM before installation.
V. Intrusion Detection Cabling 1. The Contractor shall furnish and install the following as indicated on the technology drawings and associated equipment schedules and diagrams.
Security System 28 13 00 - 21 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
2. The Contractor shall install a 10-foot service loop to be coiled, mounted, and stored at the access control panel above the ladder rack in Equipment Room/Telecommunications Rooms. 3. The Contractor shall install a 5-foot service loop to be coiled, mounted, and stored at each device installed above the ceiling. Service loop will not be mounted to the ceiling tile supports or left on top of the ceiling. 4. Size wire as recommended by manufacturer. 5. Wires shall be routed utilizing the pathways as indicated in the technology drawings. If technology drawings are not included Contractor will get approval from the PM before installation.
3.7 DEMOLITION OF EXISITING CARD ACCESS AND INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEMS
A. The contractor is required to remove all existing devices, wiring and all cabling of all buildings indicated on drawings where contractor is performing work.
B. The existing system must remain functional until new CCURE system and devices are installed. Doors are to be switched over one at a time to minimize disruption and access to that door.
C. The Vendor shall 1. Cover and protect the furnishings and floor area for demolition of the devices, panels, wiring and cabling at work area prior to commencing work. 2. Patch, paint and repair any holes or devices to leave the wall/door/door frame with uniform look 3. Clean all areas of scrap materials, dirt, dust, and debris generated in performance of the demolition at the end of each working day to the satisfaction of TxDOT. 4. Clean, repair, or replace any item damaged by the vendor or its subcontractor(s) during the demolition to the satisfaction of TxDOT, and at no additional cost to TxDOT. 5. Replace any ceiling tile that was damaged during installation. Match existing. 6. Remove and dispose of all cables, wiring, and devices from the building during the demolition in accordance with all applicable rules, regulations, codes, laws, ordinances and statutes, etc. The vendor shall obtain TxDOT approval for removal or disposal, or both, of all devices, wiring, cabling and panels. a. NOTE: All devices and panels removed from the building shall remain the property of TxDOT.
3.8 PATHWAY CABLE SUPPORT
A. All cables shall be installed and supported in conduit systems, cable trays, cores, sleeves, etc.
B. When cables leave the main pathway systems, they shall be installed and supported in Contractor furnished and installed j-hooks or saddle straps.
C. Use 4 finger channels at security riser location for pathway between panels and power supplies.
Security System 28 13 00 - 22 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
D. No cable pathway shall exceed 40% fill ratio.
E. The contractor shall furnish a separate j-hook or saddle strap pathway for each wire type.
F. J-hooks and saddle straps shall be installed no more than five-feet (5’) apart on center, using only manufacturer-approved installation methods and hardware.
G. J-hooks shall be furnished with closure clips.
H. Maximum sag between supports shall not exceed twelve-inches (12”).
I. Contractor shall establish j-hook and saddle strap pathways and shall coordinate pathways with all other disciplines. Under no-circumstances shall these pathways be used to support other low-voltage applications not included in this specification.
J. Cable Dressing 1. No nylon cable ties shall be used at any time during the installation of the wire. Velcro only. 2. Above Ceiling a. Contractor shall furnish and install plenum-rated hook & loop straps in plenum-rated airspaces. 1) The Contractor shall install no more than (1) hook & loop strap between each j-hook or saddle strap or at service loop locations. 3. Security Controller Locations a. The Contractor shall bundle all visible wires with Contractor furnished and installed hook & loop straps. b. Hook & loop straps shall be installed twenty-four (24) inches apart on center.
3.9 LABELING
A. Contractor shall verify room numbers and confirm the final room numbering scheme prior to generating any labels.
B. Create and attach a panel schedule to the new panel that includes the description and location of each installed point used within the panel. 1. Hand written panel schedules shall not be accepted. 2. Within the Title Block, the panel schedule shall identify the panel name, panel Internet Protocol (IP), panel Media Access Control (MAC), and panel address. 3. A minimum of two keys shall be left with the designated TxDOT onsite representative upon final inspection.
C. Cables shall be labeled within (6) to (12) inches from the termination point inside the Equipment Room/Telecommunications/Security Control Location Rooms.
D. Cables shall be labeled within (6) inches from the termination point at the device end.
E. Cables shall be labeled identically at both ends.
Security System 28 13 00 - 23 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
F. Label all controls as necessary to agree with their function. 1. Label the cables using a label-maker provided in the programming manual.
3.10 FIRE STOP
A. Provide fire stop as required.
B. Provide code compliant fire proofing techniques for all penetrations of fire rated partitions and slabs where the penetrations are made by or used for installation of the ACS.
C. Provide fire stops where conduits penetrate fire rated walls and/or floors.
3.11 EXTERIOR STROBE
A. Furnish, install and connect to CCURE system one each exterior strobe (AMSECO SL- 401), or approved equal, at all buildings indicated on drawings. Coordinate final location with PM before installation.
3.12 INTERIOR SPEAKER AND PRE-RECORDED SOUNDER
A. Furnish, install and connect to CCURE interior ceiling mounted speaker (and pre- recorded sounder, or approved equal, at all buildings indicated on drawings. Coordinate final location with PM before installation.
3.13 WIRING TECHNIQUES
A. Furnish and install all ACS wire and cable with the exception of traveling cable for elevator control and monitoring.
B. Coordinate the routing of wire and cable requiring isolation from power, radio frequency (RF), electromagnetic interference (EMI), telephone, etc. with the PM.
C. Run all wire and cable continuous from device location to the final point of termination. No mid-run cable splices shall be allowed.
D. Secure all cable up and out of the way of electrical, lighting and ceiling grid using UL rated J-hooks or D-rings spaced a maximum of five feet apart. Cable shall not be tied to electrical conduit or ceiling grid hangers nor laid on top of ceiling grid.
E. Cabling shall be labeled to designate what equipment it supports.
F. Cable shall be color coded consistently throughout the installation.
G. Utilize combined cable runs to the equipment room, whenever possible.
H. Utilize existing cable trays.
I. No splicing shall be accepted.
Security System 28 13 00 - 24 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
J. All penetrations shall be sealed with approved UL fire stopping.
K. Installation shall be level and plumb at right angles and perpendicular and parallel to building lines.
L. Cabling leading to security panel shall be enclosed within conduit. The conduit shall be sized for future expansion, 1” minimum. Four inch finger channel is acceptable.
M. Length of cable installed shall not exceed the manufacturer’s maximum distance allowed for the component or equipment.
N. Furnish and install all CCTV cable such that ample slack is supplied at the device terminating end of the cable to compensate for any final field modifications in camera location. The extra cable (approximately three feet) shall be bundled and wrapped.
O. At no time shall any coaxial cable be subjected to a bend less than a 5.9”/150 mm radius.
P. Wire and cable within DGPs, power distribution cabinets and other security enclosures shall be neatly installed, completely terminated, pulled tight with slack removed and routed in such a way as to allow direct, unimpeded access to the equipment within the enclosure. All wire and cable shall be bundled with Velcro.
Q. Provide heat-shrink to insulate all wire connections. The use of electrical tape for connections shall not be acceptable.
R. Visually inspect all wire and cable for faulty insulation prior to installation.
S. Provide grommets and strain relief material where necessary to avoid abrasion of wire and excess tension on wire and cable.
T. Make connections with solderless devices, mechanically and electrically secured in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations. Wire nuts are not an acceptable means of connecting wire and cable.
U. Neatly bundle and wrap all horizontally run (above accessible ceilings and not within conduit) wire and cable at nine feet intervals. Provide supports as required. All supports shall be UL listed for the application.
V. All system wiring within vertical riser shafts (as required) shall be bundled, wrapped and Velcro to the structure at nine feet intervals in order to isolate it from other wire and cable within the shaft. Additionally, all wire and cable within the shaft shall be supported at least every two floors using Greenlee Slack Grips (Split Mesh Lace Closing) or approved equal. Provide all personnel and equipment necessary to install and support the cable. All equipment shall be UL listed for the application.
3.14 PANEL AND COMPONENT INSTALLATION
A. Vendor shall meet with designated TxDOT onsite representative to get written approval of exact locations for all devices installed at each facility.
Security System 28 13 00 - 25 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. All panels shall be mounted on a Unistrut® or plywood backboard that is securely anchored to the wall.
C. All cables shall be bundled inside panels with Velcro®. Tie wraps shall NOT be used.
3.15 CARD READERS
A. Vendor shall provide and install SWH Multi-Technology readers that shall be controlled by the security system workstations or be set on time schedule control of electric locking mechanism, or both. The vendor shall install readers within Americans with Disabilities Act standards and specifications.
B. Readers shall be equipped for reading multiple reader technologies such as HID® 13.56 MHz smart card and HID® 125KHz proximity card and shall allow for the utilization of changing technology.
C. Readers shall be flex models that allow for the upgrade to add new functionality or enhancements using flash firmware.
D. All readers shall have minimum of three) – color LEDs on the face.
E. Readers shall generate an audible tone to indicate authorized and unauthorized reader use.
F. Readers shall be capable of operating if directly mounted or attached to a metal surface.
G. Readers shall have a minimum read range of four inches for doors and pedestrian gates.
H. Readers shall have a minimum read range of eight inches for gates.
I. Readers shall be marked with corresponding permanent label for C●CURE® Ultra SE panel location.
3.16 CONDUIT, BOXES AND RACEWAYS
A. Install all conduits necessary for a complete installation, but not provided for in the Security Conduit Drawings, in finished areas concealed in chases, furring’s, concrete slabs and/or above suspended ceilings. No exposed conduit shall be installed within public areas.
B. Conduit shall be carefully installed, properly and adequately supported as required to comply with the requirements outlined herein and as required by the NEC to provide a neat, workmanlike installation. Horizontal conduit runs shall be supported by clamps, pipe straps, special brackets or heavy iron tie, tied to the black iron structural members supporting the ceiling. Fastening of conduit to masonry walls, floor or partitions require malleable pipe clips with screws and suitable expansion sleeves.
C. All conduit shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building and shall be installed without springing or forcing.
Security System 28 13 00 - 26 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
D. All required inserts shall be drilled-in and all openings required through concrete or masonry shall be saw cut or core drilled with tools specifically designed for this purpose.
E. Swab out and remove all burrs from conduit before any wires are pulled.
F. Lay out and install conduit runs as to avoid proximity to hot pipes. In no case shall a conduit be run within 29.5”/ 75 mm of such pipes, except where crossings are unavoidable and then the conduit shall be kept at least .98”/25 mm from the covering of the pipe crossed.
G. All conduit installation, whether run exposed or concealed, shall be approved prior to installation by the TxDOT Project Manager.
3.17 POWER REQUIREMENTS
A. 120VAC AC power dedicated to security shall be provided by the electrical contractor for the Security System as indicated on drawings. Coordinate with the PM to establish locations of security dedicated 120VAC AC circuits.
B. Connect to the AC power (provided by electrical contractor) and provide UL listed power supplies and transformers to distribute low voltage power to the system components as required.
C. Provide hinged cover terminal cabinets with tamper switches for all power supplies, transformers and power distribution terminal strips. Provide all conduit and wiring from the AC power facilities to the terminal cabinets.
D. Surge Protection 1. Provide protection against spikes, surges, noise, and other line problems for all system equipment and components. Refer to Section 2.2 B items 1 thru 5.
3.18 LABELED DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Any devices that require any frame modifications or drilling shall match the fire rating of the door where the devices are to be installed. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing any labeled door or frame that is modified without written approval from the TxDOT Project Manager.
3.19 UNDERGROUND PRIVATE UTILITY LOCATING
A. If trenching is required as part of scope of work, the Contractor shall select and employ a company that has a minimum of 5 years of experience performing the appropriate suite of industry standard geophysical equipment or company to search for existing utilities within the limits specified on the project to identify and locate existing utilities within 10 feet of each side of proposed trench route and 5 foot radius of pedestal base, Ballard and any fencing post provided.
B. Contractor shall utilize Electromagnetic induction, Magnetic equipment, Ground penetrating Radar, Rodding, Probing or other proven methods.
Security System 28 13 00 - 27 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Mapping of Existing Utilities shall include 1. Metallic/Conductive utilities a. Steel Pipe b. Electrical c. Telephone d. Fiber e. Utility Service lines f. Duct banks g. Natural Gas Lines h. Water i. Wastewater j. Gas/Oil Pipelines k. Cable TV l. Storm Sewer m. Irrigation
D. Interpret the surface geophysics and mark the indications of utilities with paint or pin flags on the ground surface for subsequent depiction on deliverable utility maps. The existing utilities will be designated within the project limits as shown in the drawings
E. Record all marks on electronic field sketches and correlate such data with provided utility records and above ground appurtenances obtained from visual inspection to resolve differences. Denote any utilities found where ownership/utility type is not available from records as “unknown” facilities.
F. Provide field sketch to TXDOT for survey of the existing utility designating marks and above ground utility appurtenances according to the project control and record the data for subsequent depiction on the plan deliverables.
G. Contractor does not need to anticipate maintenance of traffic for lane closures will be required for completion of professional utility designating work on this project. Normal traffic control, included within this service, is considered standard placement of traffic cones and freestanding warning signage. Traffic control requiring lane closures, traffic detouring, police support, flag persons, etc. is considered additional and may be added to the scope of work at the request of the PM
H. DELIVERABLES 1. 11” x 17” CAD Field Sketch depicting all designated and located utilities. These plans will be delivered to the PM in electronic AutoCAD 2013 or latest version and PDF form.
3.20 TRAINING
A. Coordinate with the Owner to establish a training outline and schedule. Submit a comprehensive training curriculum to the Owner once all preliminary coordination is complete. The Owner will revise and comment on the curriculum as required.
Security System 28 13 00 - 28 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. The vendor shall provide a competent technician, factory certified and trained in the use and operation of the SWH C●Cure® card access system. This technician shall train TxDOT employees for a minimum of two separate 2 hour individual scheduled training sessions. Training shall be provided within ten calendar days after the SWH C●Cure® card access system has been installed and is ready for operation, but prior to final payment. The training shall take place on TxDOT premises at a time and date mutually agreed upon by the vendor and TxDOT. Training shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Badging 2. Cable labeling 3. Troubleshooting 4. Equipment 5. Hardware 6. Interface operations 7. Operation 8. Safety 9. Software
C. Record, label, and catalog all training on DVD. Provide the DVD to the Owner for future in-house training sessions and / or reviews. Furnish all temporary equipment necessary for recording all training sessions. Maintain accurate and up-to-date time sheets of all training sessions.
D. The Contractor shall be on call during the warranty period, be available by phone 24 hours a day/7 days a week and shall respond to TxDOT within 30 minutes of TxDOT’s call and be onsite within 24 hrs.
3.21 SYSTEM START-UP
A. The Work shall be complete and ready to operate prior to final acceptance. TxDOT Security Manager must be notified and included.
B. Load the entire initial user database into all programmable systems up to the inaugural day of beneficial use of the Security System. The PM shall assist in establishing procedural guidelines and in defining terminology and conditions unique to the Owner’s operation.
3.22 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. TxDOT Security Department must be notified and included.
B. In order to qualify for the TxDOT Project Manager’s consideration of Substantial Completion, the Work must, at a minimum, meet the following requirements: 1. The initial card holder database must be fully loaded into the ACS. 2. All sub-system interfaces must be complete and operational. 3. All required operator training must have been provided to the Owner and/or its representatives.
C. Substantial Completion shall not be construed as final acceptance of the Work.
Security System 28 13 00 - 29 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3.23 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
A. Final acceptance testing of the Work will be conducted by PM and TxDOT Security Department must be notified and included.
B. Prior to any final acceptance testing, the Contractor shall submit two sets of preliminary (draft) Record Drawings to the TxDOT Project Manager. The preliminary Record Drawings are to be used by the PM to conduct the system final test.
C. Submit a paragraph by paragraph completion matrix indicating completion or delinquency for each item included in the Specification and all subsequent addenda and bulletins as part of the Work. Indicate completion of the requirement by the word “Completed” following each paragraph number. Indicate delinquency for the requirement by the words “To Be Completed” following the applicable paragraph number. Should work on any item be under way, but not yet fully complete, indicate the extent (or lack thereof) of completion to date, and the proposed date of completion.
D. Conduct a complete test of the entire Security System and provide the PM with a written report on the results of that test. During the course of this test, place the integrated Security System in service, and calibrate and test all equipment.
E. Following completion of the initial testing and correction of any noted deficiencies, conduct a ten (10) day burn-in test. The intent of the burn-in test shall be to prove the Security System by placing it in near real operating conditions. During this period, the Security System shall be fully functional and programmed such that all points, interfaces, controls, reports, messages, prompts, etc. can be exercised and validated. Record and correct any system anomaly, deficiency, or failure noted during this period. Scheduling of the final acceptance test shall be based on a review of the results of this burn-in test.
F. Deliver a report describing the results of functional tests, burn-in tests, diagnostics, calibrations, corrections, and repairs, including written certification to the PM, that the complete installed Security System, has been calibrated, tested, and is fully functional as specified herein.
G. Prior to the final acceptance test, coordinate with the PM for security related construction clean-up and patch work requirements. Security equipment closets and similar areas should be free of accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, remove all waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor’s and it’s subcontractors’ tools, construction equipment, machinery and all surplus materials.
H. Upon written notification from the Contractor that the Security System is completely installed, integrated and operational, and the burn-in testing completed, the PM will conduct a final acceptance test of the entire system.
Security System 28 13 00 - 30 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
I. During the course of the final acceptance test by the TxDOT Project Manager, the Contractor shall be responsible for demonstrating that, without exception, the completed and integrated system complies with the contract requirements. All physical and functional requirements of the project shall be demonstrated and shown. This demonstration will begin by comparing “as built” conditions of the Security System to requirements outlined in the Specification, item by item. Following the Specification compliance review, all Security System head-end equipment will be evaluated.
J. The functionality of the various interfaces between systems will be tested.
K. Following the Security System head-end equipment and console review, the installation of all field devices will be inspected. This field inspection will weigh heavily on the general neatness and quality of installations, complete functionality of each individual device, and mounting, backbox and conduit requirements compliance.
L. All equipment shall be on and fully operational during any and all testing procedures. Provide all personnel, equipment, and supplies necessary to perform all site testing. Provide a minimum of two employees familiar with the system for the final acceptance test. One employee shall be responsible for monitoring and verifying alarms while the other will be required to demonstrate the function of each device. Supply at least two two-way radios for use during the test. A manufacturer’s representative may be present on site to answer any questions that may be beyond the technical capability of the Contractor’s employees, if the Contractor so elects or by specific request of the PM or Owner, at no charge to the PM or Owner.
M. Upon successful completion of the final acceptance test (or subsequent punch list retest), the PM will issue a letter of final acceptance.
N. The TxDOT Project Manager retains the right to suspend and/or terminate testing at any time when the system fails to perform as specified. In the event that it becomes necessary to suspend the test, all of the Owner’s/TxDOT Project Manager’s fees and expenses related to the suspended test will be deducted from the Contractor’s retainage. Furthermore, in the event it becomes necessary to suspend the test, the Contractor shall work diligently to complete/repair all outstanding items to the condition specified in the Specification and as indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall supply the PM with a detailed completion schedule outlining phase by phase completion dates and a tentative date for subsequent punch list retest. During the final acceptance test, no adjustments, repairs or modifications to the systems will be conducted without the permission of the PM. TxDOT PM must witness testing
3.24 PROJECT CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTATION
A. As-Built Drawings 1. Drawings shall be provided to the PM at the time of substantial completion. Final payment will not be recommended until drawings are received and approved by the PM 2. Three (3) sets of drawings depicting the condition of the access control system as installed. All documents to be provided in binders.
Security System 28 13 00 - 31 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3. As-Built drawings shall be produced in AutoCAD 2010 or up to latest version and provided in hardcopy and electronically in .dwg and PDF format. 4. Hardcopy drawings shall be provided in the original size as issued by the PM 5. Drawings shall retain the formatting and title block of the original drawings as issued by the PM. 6. Drawings shall be provided utilizing the original scale and shall include the exact dimensions and locations of all equipment room/telecommunication room layouts, wall elevations, equipment rack elevations, ladder racks, cable tray, sleeves, pathways, card reader locations and labeling scheme.
END OF SECTION 28 13 00
Security System 28 13 00 - 32 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
SECTION 28 46 21 FIRE-ALARM SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 2. Notification appliances.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.
B. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.
C. HLI: High Level Interface.
D. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles, and finishes. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. 1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory and field wiring. 4. Detail assembly and support requirements. 5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits. 6. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air- conditioning ducts, drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke detectors and access to them. a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. b. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown. 7. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams.
Fire-Alarm Systems 28 46 21 - 1 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. General Submittal Requirements: 1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications: a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified, fire-alarm technician; Level III minimum. c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire- alarm Level II technician.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Perform a full test of the existing system prior to starting work. Document any equipment or components not functioning as designed.
B. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-alarm service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Owner's permission.
C. Use of Devices during Construction: Protect devices during construction unless devices are placed in service to protect the facility during construction.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new equipment has been tested and accepted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Components shall be compatible with, and operate as an extension of, existing system.
B. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system.
Fire-Alarm Systems 28 46 21 - 2 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.2 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES
A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. 1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.
2.3 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors: 1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. 3. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated. 4. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.
B. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A. 1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector: a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.). 3. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 4. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 5. Relay Fan Shutdown: Fully programmable relay rated to interrupt fan motor- control circuit.
2.4 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: connected to a signaling-line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections. 1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single- mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.
Fire-Alarm Systems 28 46 21 - 3 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
B. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound- pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.
C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch-high letters on the lens. 1. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 2. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined with guards in place. 3. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 4. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 5. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature, humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before installation begins.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems." 1. Devices placed in service before all other trades have completed cleanup shall be replaced. 2. Devices installed but not yet placed in service shall be protected from construction dust, debris, dirt, moisture, and damage according to manufacturer's written storage instructions.
B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections. 1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building. 2. Expand, modify, and supplement existing control equipment as necessary to extend existing control functions to the new points. New components shall be
Fire-Alarm Systems 28 46 21 - 4 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system.
C. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: 1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches of the exit doorway. 2. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42 inches and 48 inches above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise indicated.
D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 inches long shall be supported at both ends. 1. Do not install smoke detector in duct smoke-detector housing during construction. Install detector only during system testing and prior to system turnover.
E. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling. Install at 80 inches above finished floor to the lens. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 PATHWAYS
A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in nonaccessible locations may be routed exposed. 1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inches above the floor shall be installed in EMT.
B. Junction box covers shall be painted red enamel.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
C. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing. a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation that is required by the "Completion Documents, Preparation" table in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72. b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components. 2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
Fire-Alarm Systems 28 46 21 - 5 Renovation of the DHQ Warehouse El Paso District Headquarters El Paso District 24, El Paso County Project No: 24-4704-18083
3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4. 4. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.
D. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.
E. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
G. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
END OF SECTION
Fire-Alarm Systems 28 46 21 - 6